B-Class Operator's Manual

Your Operator's Manual
Digital form inside the vehicle

Familiarize yourself with the contents of the Operator's Manual directly via your
vehicle's multimedia system (Menu item "Vehicle").
Booklet inside the vehicle

In addition to the vehicle's Operator's Manual, you can obtain the complete multi-
media system Supplement from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Digital form via the Internet

You can find the Operator's Manual on the Mercedes-Benz homepage.
Digital form as an App

The Mercedes-Benz Guides App is available for free on the Apple® App store or Google
Play.
Apple® iOS Android™
B-Class
Operator's Manual
B-Class Operator's Manual
É2465844001!ËÍ
2465844001
Order no. P246 0098 13 Part no. 246 584 40 01 Edition B2018
Mercedes-Benz
Symbols Publication details
In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol- Internet
lowing symbols:
G WARNING Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi-
cles and about Daimler AG can be found on the
Warning notes make you aware of dangers following websites:
which could pose a threat to your health or
http://www.mercedes-benz.ca
life, or to the health and life of others.
H Environmental note Editorial office

Environmental notes provide you with infor-
mation on environmentally aware actions or ©Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated or
disposal. otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, with-
out written permission from Daimler AG.
! Notes on material damage alert you to dan-
gers that could lead to damage to your vehi-
cle. Vehicle manufacturer
i Practical tips or further information that
could be helpful to you. Daimler AG
X This symbol indicates an instruction Mercedesstraße 137
that must be followed. 70327 Stuttgart
X Several of these symbols in succession Germany
indicate an instruction with several
steps.
(Y This symbol tells you where you can
page) find more information about a topic.
Dis‐ This text indicates a message on the
play multifunction display/multimedia dis-
play.
As at 28.03.2017
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz media system from your authorized
We urge you to read this Operator's Manual Mercedes-Benz Center.
carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehi- Digital form via the Internet
cle before driving. For your own safety and a The Operator's Manual on the Internet pro-
longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and vides easy access to all information
warning notices in this Operator's Manual. regarding your vehicle and multimedia sys-
Ignoring them could result in damage to the tem. It also provides helpful animations,
vehicle or personal injury to you or others. interesting background information and a
Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow wide array of search options.
instructions is not covered by the Mercedes- Digital form as an App
Benz Limited Warranty. Using the Mercedes-Benz Guides App, you
The equipment or product designation of your can view all the information on your vehicle
vehicle may vary depending on: and multimedia system via mobile Internet
RModel or download it independently of network
access. Available for smartphones or tab-
ROrder
lets.
RCountry specification
You can also use the Mercedes-Benz Guides
RAvailability
App:
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to
introduce changes in the following areas:
RDesign
REquipment
RTechnical features
The equipment in your vehicle may therefore
differ from that shown in the descriptions and
illustrations.
The following are integral components of the
vehicle: Please note that the Mercedes-Benz Guides App
RPrinted Operator's Manual may not yet be available in your country.
RMaintenance Booklet Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
REquipment-dependent supplements Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
Keep these documents in the vehicle at all A Daimler Company
times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all
documents on to the new owner.
You can also use the Mercedes-Benz Guides
App:
Your Operator's Manual:
Digital form inside the vehicle
The Digital Operator's Manual provides
comprehensive and specifically adapted
information on your vehicle's equipment
and multimedia system. It contains infor-
mative animations, individual language
settings and an intuitive search function.
Booklet inside the vehicle
In addition to this manual and the afore-
mentioned digital media, you also have the
option to obtain a comprehensive printed
version of the Supplement for your multi-
2465844001 É2465844001!ËÍ
2 Contents
Mirrors ................................................... 88
Index ....................................................... 4 Memory function ................................... 91
Digital Operator's Manual .................. 22 Lights and windshield wipers ............ 93

Introduction ........................................... 22 Exterior lighting ..................................... 93
Operation ............................................... 22 Interior lighting ...................................... 95
Replacing bulbs ..................................... 96
Introduction ......................................... 23 Windshield wipers ................................ 100
Protecting the environment ................... 23
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ............... 23 Climate control ................................. 104
Operator's Manual ................................. 24 Overview of climate control systems ... 104
Service and vehicle operation ................ 24 Operating the climate control sys-
Operating safety .................................... 25 tems .................................................... 107
QR codes for the rescue card ................ 27 Air vents .............................................. 112
Data stored in the vehicle ...................... 27
Information on copyright ....................... 29
Driving and parking .......................... 113
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ..... 113
At a glance ........................................... 30 Driving ................................................. 113
Cockpit .................................................. 30 DYNAMIC SELECT button .................... 120
Instrument cluster ................................. 31 Automatic transmission ....................... 121
Multifunction steering wheel ................. 32 Refueling ............................................. 127
Center console ...................................... 33 Parking ................................................ 129
Door control panel ................................. 35 Driving tips .......................................... 131
Overhead control panel ......................... 36 Driving systems ................................... 138
Safety ................................................... 37 On-board computer and displays .... 164

Panic alarm ............................................ 37 Important safety notes ........................ 164
Occupant safety .................................... 37 Displays and operation ........................ 164
Children in the vehicle ........................... 50 Menus and submenus ......................... 167
Pets in the vehicle ................................. 56 Display messages ................................ 177
Driving safety systems ........................... 56 Warning and indicator lamps in the
Protection against theft ......................... 62 instrument cluster ............................... 203
Opening and closing ........................... 64 Multimedia system ........................... 213

SmartKey ............................................... 64 General notes ...................................... 213
Doors ..................................................... 70 Important safety notes ........................ 213
Cargo compartment ............................... 72 Function restrictions ............................ 213
Side windows ......................................... 75 Operating system ................................ 214
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel ...................................................... 79
Stowage and features ...................... 221
Loading guidelines ............................... 221
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 83 Stowage areas ..................................... 221
Correct driver's seat position ................ 83 Features .............................................. 230
Seats ..................................................... 83
Steering wheel ....................................... 88
Contents 3
Maintenance and care ...................... 239

Engine compartment ........................... 239
ASSYST PLUS ...................................... 243
Care ..................................................... 244
Breakdown assistance ..................... 251

Where will I find...? .............................. 251
Flat tire ................................................ 253
Battery (vehicle) .................................. 258
Jump-starting ....................................... 260
Towing and tow-starting ...................... 263
Fuses ................................................... 266
Wheels and tires ............................... 269

Important safety notes ........................ 269
Operation ............................................ 269
Winter operation .................................. 271
Tire pressure ....................................... 272
Loading the vehicle .............................. 276
All about wheels and tires ................... 279
Changing a wheel ................................ 286
Wheel and tire combinations ............... 290
Emergency spare wheel ....................... 291
Technical data ................................... 293

Information regarding technical data ... 293
Vehicle electronics .............................. 293
Identification plates ............................. 294
Service products and filling capaci-
ties ...................................................... 295
Vehicle data ......................................... 300
4 Index
1, 2, 3 ... Occupant Classification System

(OCS) ............................................... 44
4ETS (Electronic Traction System) PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator
see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac- lamps ............................................... 38
tion System) Side impact air bag .......................... 43
4MATIC Window curtain air bag .................... 44
Display message ............................ 200 Air vents
4MATIC (permanent four-wheel Important safety notes .................. 112
drive) .................................................. 148 Rear ............................................... 112
12 V socket Setting the center air vents ........... 112
see Sockets Setting the side air vents ............... 112
Air-conditioning system
A see Climate control
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Alarm
Display message ............................ 179 ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 63
Function/notes ................................ 57 Switching off (ATA) .......................... 63
Important safety notes .................... 57 Switching the function on/off
Warning lamp ................................. 206 (ATA) ................................................ 63
Accident Alarm system
Automatic measures after an acci- see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
dent ................................................. 50 Anti-lock braking system
Activating media mode see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
General notes ................................ 219 Anti-skid chains
Activating/deactivating cooling see Snow chains
with air dehumidification ................. 107 Anti-theft alarm system
Active Brake Assist see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Activating or deactivating .............. 174 Ashtray ............................................... 232
Display message ............................ 184 Assistance display (on-board com-
Function/notes ................................ 58 puter) .................................................. 173
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 62 Assistance menu (on-board com-
Adaptive Damping System puter) .................................................. 172
Function/notes ............................. 148 ASSYST PLUS
Additional speedometer ................... 175 Displaying a service message ........ 243
Additives (engine oil) ........................ 298 Driving abroad ............................... 244
Address book Hiding a service message .............. 243
see also Digital Operator's Man- Information about Service ............. 243
ual .................................................. 213 Resetting the service interval dis-
Adjusting the volume play ................................................ 243
Multimedia system ........................ 214 Service message ............................ 243
Air bags Special service requirements ......... 243
Deployment ..................................... 49 ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Display message ............................ 187 Activating/deactivating ................... 63
Front air bag (driver, front Function ........................................... 63
passenger) ....................................... 43 Switching off the alarm .................... 63
Important safety notes .................... 42 ATTENTION ASSIST
Introduction ..................................... 42 Activating/deactivating ................. 174
Knee bag .......................................... 43 Display message ............................ 194
Function/notes ............................. 158
Index 5
Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 170 B

Audio system
see Digital Operator's Manual Back button ....................................... 214
Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center Backup lamp
see Qualified specialist workshop Display message ............................ 190
Authorized workshop Replacing bulbs ............................... 98
see Qualified specialist workshop Bag hook ............................................ 227
AUTO lights BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 57
Display message ............................ 191 Battery (SmartKey)
see Lights Checking .......................................... 67
Automatic car wash (care) ............... 244 Important safety notes .................... 67
Automatic engine start (ECO start/ Replacing ......................................... 67
stop function) .................................... 118 Battery (vehicle)
Automatic engine switch-off (ECO Charging ........................................ 260
start/stop function) .......................... 118 Display message ............................ 192
Automatic headlamp mode ................ 93 Important safety notes .................. 258
Automatic transmission Jump starting ................................. 260
Belt
Accelerator pedal position ............. 123
see Seat belts
Changing gear ............................... 123
Belt warning ......................................... 41
DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 121
Blind Spot Assist
Drive program ................................ 124
Drive program display .................... 121 Activating/deactivating (on-
Driving tips .................................... 123 board computer) ............................ 174
DYNAMIC SELECT button .............. 120 Display message ............................ 195
Emergency running mode .............. 126 Notes/function .............................. 160
Engaging drive position .................. 123 Bluetooth®
Engaging neutral ............................ 122 Searching for a mobile phone ........ 217
Engaging park position automati- Searching for a mobile phone
cally ............................................... 122 (device manager) ........................... 218
Engaging reverse gear ................... 122 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Engaging the park position ............ 121 ual .................................................. 213
Holding the vehicle stationary on Telephony ...................................... 217
uphill gradients .............................. 124 Brake Assist System
Kickdown ....................................... 124 see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Manual shifting .............................. 125 Brake fluid
Overview ........................................ 121 Display message ............................ 184
Problem (malfunction) ................... 126 Notes ............................................. 298
Pulling away ................................... 117 Brake force distribution
Starting the engine ........................ 116 see EBD (electronic brake force
Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 125 distribution)
Transmission position display Brake lamps
(DIRECT SELECT lever) ................... 121 Display message ............................ 189
Transmission positions .................. 123 Brakes
Automatic transmission emer- ABS .................................................. 57
gency mode ....................................... 126 BAS .................................................. 57
Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 298
Braking assistance appropriate to
the situation ..................................... 59
6 Index
Display message ............................ 179 Wheels ........................................... 247

EBD .................................................. 62 Windows ........................................ 247
Hill start assist ............................... 117 Wiper blades .................................. 247
HOLD function ............................... 146 Wooden trim .................................. 249
Important safety notes .................. 135 Cargo compartment cover
Maintenance .................................. 136 Important safety notes .................. 227
Parking brake ................................ 130 Installing/removing ....................... 228
Riding tips ...................................... 135 Notes/how to use ......................... 227
Warning lamp ................................. 205 Cargo compartment enlargement ... 224
Braking assistance appropriate to Cargo compartment floor
the situation Height adjustment ......................... 229
Function/notes ................................ 59 Important safety notes .................. 228
Breakdown assistance Opening/closing ............................ 228
Where will I find...? ........................ 251 Stowage well (under) ..................... 228
see Flat tire Cargo tie down rings ......................... 227
see Tow-starting CD
see Towing away see also Digital Operator's Man-
Brightness control (instrument ual .................................................. 213
cluster lighting) ................................... 31 CD player (on-board computer) ........ 171
Buttons on the steering wheel ......... 165 Center console
Lower section .................................. 34
C Upper section .................................. 33
Central locking
Calling up a malfunction
Automatic locking (on-board com-
see Display messages
puter) ............................................. 176
Car
Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 64
see Vehicle
Change of address .............................. 25
Care
Change of ownership .......................... 25
Car wash ........................................ 244
Changing a wheel
Carpets .......................................... 250
Display ........................................... 249 Wheels and tires ............................ 287
Child
Exhaust pipe .................................. 248
Exterior lights ................................ 247 Restraint system .............................. 52
Child seat
Gear or selector lever .................... 249
Interior ........................................... 249 Forward-facing restraint system ...... 55
Matte finish ................................... 246 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
Notes ............................................. 244 anchors ............................................ 53
Paint .............................................. 245 On the front-passenger seat ............ 54
Plastic trim .................................... 249 Rearward-facing restraint system .... 54
Power washer ................................ 245 Top Tether ....................................... 53
Child-proof locks
Rear view camera .......................... 248
Roof lining ...................................... 250 Important safety notes .................... 55
Seat belt ........................................ 250 Rear doors ....................................... 56
Children
Seat cover ..................................... 249
Sensors ......................................... 248 Special seat belt retractor ............... 51
Children in the vehicle
Steering wheel ............................... 249
Trim pieces .................................... 249 Important safety notes .................... 50
Washing by hand ........................... 245 Cigarette lighter ................................ 232
Index 7
Cleaning Connecting a USB device

Mirror turn signal ........................... 248 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Climate control ual .................................................. 213
Air-conditioning system ................. 104 Consumption statistics (on-board
Automatic climate control (dual- computer) .......................................... 168
zone) .............................................. 106 Controller ........................................... 214
Controlling automatically ............... 108 Convenience closing feature .............. 76
Cooling with air dehumidification .. 107 Convenience opening feature ............ 76
Defrosting the windows ................. 110 Coolant (engine)
Defrosting the windshield .............. 109 Checking the level ......................... 242
General notes ................................ 104 Display message ............................ 191
Indicator lamp ................................ 108 Filling capacity ............................... 299
Information about using auto- Important safety notes .................. 298
matic climate control ..................... 106 Temperature gauge ........................ 165
Notes on using the air-condition- Warning lamp ................................. 210
ing system ..................................... 105 Cooling
Overview of systems ...................... 104 see Climate control
Problem with the rear window Copyright ............................................. 29
defroster ........................................ 111 Cruise control
Problems with cooling with air Activation conditions ..................... 139
dehumidification ............................ 108 Cruise control lever ....................... 138
Refrigerant ..................................... 299 Deactivating ................................... 139
Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 300 Display message ............................ 197
Setting the air distribution ............. 108 Driving system ............................... 138
Setting the air vents ...................... 112 Function/notes ............................. 138
Setting the airflow ......................... 109 Important safety notes .................. 138
Setting the temperature ................ 108 Setting a speed .............................. 139
Switching air-recirculation mode Storing and maintaining current
on/off ............................................ 111 speed ............................................. 139
Switching on/off ........................... 107 Cup holder
Switching residual heat on/off ...... 111 Center console .............................. 231
Switching the rear window Important safety notes .................. 230
defroster on/off ............................ 110 Rear compartment ......................... 231
Switching the ZONE function Customer Assistance Center
on/off ............................................ 109 (CAC) ..................................................... 27
Cockpit Customer Relations Department ....... 27
Overview .......................................... 30
see Instrument cluster D
COMAND display
Cleaning ......................................... 249 Dashboard
Combination switch ............................ 94 see Instrument cluster
Compass Data
Calibrating ..................................... 237 see Technical data
Calling up ....................................... 236 Daytime running lamps
Magnetic field zone maps .............. 237 Display message ............................ 191
Setting ........................................... 237 Function/notes ................................ 93
Switching on/off (on-board com-
puter) ............................................. 176
8 Index
Declarations of conformity ................. 26 Automatic locking (switch) ............... 71

Decorative film Central locking/unlocking
Cleaning instructions ..................... 246 (SmartKey) ....................................... 64
Diagnostics connection ...................... 26 Control panel ................................... 35
Digital Operator's Manual Display message ............................ 201
Help ................................................. 22 Emergency locking ........................... 71
Introduction ..................................... 22 Emergency unlocking ....................... 71
Digital speedometer ......................... 169 Important safety notes .................... 70
DIRECT SELECT lever Opening (from inside) ...................... 70
Automatic transmission ................. 121 Drinking and driving ......................... 132
Display messages Drive program
ASSYST PLUS ................................ 243 Automatic transmission ................. 124
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 178 Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 121
Driving systems ............................. 194 Driver's door
Engine ............................................ 191 see Doors
General notes ................................ 177 Driving abroad
Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 177 Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 244
Lights ............................................. 189 Driving on flooded roads .................. 137
Safety systems .............................. 179 Driving safety system
SmartKey ....................................... 202 Active Brake Assist .......................... 58
Tires ............................................... 198 Braking assistance appropriate to
Vehicle ........................................... 199 the situation ..................................... 59
Distance display (on-board com- Driving safety systems
puter) .................................................. 173 ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 57
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 62
Activating ....................................... 141 BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 57
Calling up a speed ......................... 142 Distance warning function ............... 58
Cruise control lever ....................... 141 EBD (electronic brake force distri-
Display Message ............................ 196 bution) ............................................. 62
Displays in the instrument cluster .. 144 ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-
Driving tips .................................... 146 gram) ............................................... 60
Function/notes ............................. 140 Important safety information ........... 56
Important safety notes .................. 140 Overview .......................................... 56
Setting a speed .............................. 143 STEER CONTROL ............................. 62
Setting the specified minimum Driving system
distance ......................................... 143 Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ............. 140
Stopping ........................................ 143 DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL ............ 148
Storing a speed .............................. 142 Parking assist PARKTRONIC .......... 148
Switching off .................................. 144 Parking Pilot .................................. 151
Distance recorder ............................. 168 Start-off assist ............................... 147
Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 212 Driving systems
Distance warning function ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 158
Function/notes ................................ 58 Blind Spot Assist ............................ 160
Warning lamp ................................. 212 Cruise control ................................ 138
Doors Display message ............................ 194
Automatic locking (on-board com- HOLD function ............................... 146
puter) ............................................. 176 Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 162
Lane Tracking package .................. 160
Index 9
Rear view camera .......................... 155 Deactivating/activating ................. 118

Driving tips General information ....................... 118
Automatic transmission ................. 123 Important safety notes .................. 117
Brakes ........................................... 135 Introduction ................................... 117
Break-in period .............................. 113 Electronic Stability Program
Checking brake lining thickness .... 136 see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ............. 146 Emergency
Downhill gradient ........................... 135 Automatic measures after an acci-
Drinking and driving ....................... 132 dent ................................................. 50
Driving in winter ............................. 137 Emergency release
Driving on flooded roads ................ 137 Driver's door .................................... 71
Driving on wet roads ...................... 137 Vehicle ............................................. 71
Exhaust check ............................... 132 Emergency spare wheel
Fuel ................................................ 132 General notes ................................ 291
General .......................................... 131 Important safety notes .................. 291
Hydroplaning ................................. 137 Removing ....................................... 291
Icy road surfaces ........................... 137 Emergency Tensioning Devices
Limited braking efficiency on sal- Activation ......................................... 49
ted roads ....................................... 136 Emissions control
Snow chains .................................. 272 Service and warranty information .... 24
The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ..... 113 Engine
Wet road surface ........................... 135 Check Engine warning lamp ........... 210
DVD video Display message ............................ 191
Operating (on-board computer) ..... 171 ECO start/stop function ................ 117
see also Digital Operator's Man- Engine number ............................... 295
ual .................................................. 213 Irregular running ............................ 119
DYNAMIC SELECT button .................. 120 Jump-starting ................................. 260
Climate control (3-zone automatic Starting (important safety notes) ... 115
climate control) ............................. 107 Starting problems .......................... 119
Climate control (air-conditioning Starting the engine with the
system) .......................................... 105 SmartKey ....................................... 116
Starting with the Start/Stop but-
E ton ................................................. 116
Switching off .................................. 129
EASY-PACK tailgate
Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 266
see Tailgate
Engine electronics
EASY-VARIO-PLUS system
Problem (malfunction) ................... 119
Cargo compartment enlargement .. 224
Engine oil
EBD (electronic brake force distri-
Adding ........................................... 241
bution)
Additives ........................................ 298
Display message ............................ 181
Checking the oil level ..................... 240
Function/notes ................................ 62
Checking the oil level using the
ECO display
dipstick .......................................... 240
Function/notes ............................. 133
Display message ............................ 193
On-board computer ....................... 168
Filling capacity ............................... 298
ECO start/stop function
Notes about oil grades ................... 297
Automatic engine start .................. 118
Notes on oil level/consumption .... 240
Automatic engine switch-off .......... 118
10 Index
Entering an address Preparing the vehicle ..................... 253

see also Digital Operator's Man- TIREFIT kit ...................................... 254
ual .................................................. 213 see Emergency spare wheel
ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- Floormats ........................................... 237
gram) Folding table ...................................... 223
Activating/deactivating (on- Frequencies
board computer) ............................ 173 Mobile phone ................................. 293
Characteristics ................................. 61 Two-way radio ................................ 293
Deactivating/activating (notes) ....... 61 Front-passenger seat
Display message ............................ 179 Folding the backrest forward/
Function/notes ................................ 60 back ............................................... 223
General notes .................................. 60 Fuel
Important safety information ........... 60 Additives ........................................ 297
Trailer stabilization ........................... 62 Consumption statistics .................. 168
Warning lamp ................................. 207 Displaying the current consump-
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys- tion ................................................ 168
tem) ...................................................... 60 Displaying the range ...................... 168
Exhaust Driving tips .................................... 132
see Exhaust pipe E10 ................................................ 296
Exhaust check ................................... 132 Fuel gauge ....................................... 31
Exhaust pipe Grade (gasoline) ............................ 296
Cleaning ......................................... 248 Important safety notes .................. 296
Exterior lighting Problem (malfunction) ................... 128
Cleaning ......................................... 247 Refueling ........................................ 127
see Lights Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 296
Exterior mirrors Fuel filler flap
Adjusting ......................................... 89 Opening ......................................... 127
Dipping (automatic) ......................... 90 Fuel level
Folding in when locking (on-board Calling up the range (on-board
computer) ...................................... 176 computer) ...................................... 168
Folding in/out (automatically) ......... 90 Fuel tank
Folding in/out (electrically) ............. 89 Capacity ........................................ 296
Out of position (troubleshooting) ..... 90 Problem (malfunction) ................... 128
Setting ............................................. 89 Fuses
Storing settings (memory func- Allocation chart ............................. 267
tion) ................................................. 91 Before changing ............................. 266
Storing the parking position ............. 90 Fuse box in the engine compart-
Eyeglasses compartment ................. 222 ment .............................................. 267
Fuse box in the front-passenger
F footwell .......................................... 267
Important safety notes .................. 266
Favorites
Overview ........................................ 215 G
Filler cap
see Refueling Garage door opener
First-aid kit ......................................... 252 Clearing the memory ..................... 236
Flat tire General notes ................................ 233
MOExtended tires .......................... 254 Important safety notes .................. 234
Index 11
Opening/closing the garage door .. 236 I

Problems when programming ........ 235
Programming (button in the rear- Ignition lock
view mirror) ................................... 234 see Key positions
Synchronizing the rolling code ....... 235 Immobilizer .......................................... 62
Gasoline ............................................. 296 Indicator lamps
Genuine parts ...................................... 23 see Warning and indicator lamps
Indicators
Glove box ........................................... 222
Google™ Local Search see Turn signals
Instrument cluster
see also Digital Operator's Man-
Overview .......................................... 31
ual .................................................. 213
Settings ......................................... 175
Warning and indicator lamps ........... 31
H
Instrument cluster lighting .............. 164
Hazard warning lamps Interior lighting
Display message ............................ 202 Control ............................................. 96
Switching on/off .............................. 95 Overview .......................................... 95
Head restraints Reading lamp ................................... 95
Adjusting ......................................... 85 iPod®
Adjusting (manually) ........................ 86 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Adjusting (rear) ................................ 86 ual .................................................. 213
Headlamps
Fogging up ....................................... 95 J
see Automatic headlamp mode
Heating Jack
see Climate control Storage location ............................ 252
High beam flasher ............................... 94 Using ............................................. 287
High-beam headlamps Jump starting (engine) ...................... 260
Display message ............................ 190
Replacing bulbs ............................... 98 K
Switching on/off .............................. 94 Key positions
Hill start assist .................................. 117 Start/Stop button .......................... 114
HOLD function KEYLESS-GO
Activating ....................................... 147 Convenience closing feature ............ 76
Activation conditions ..................... 147 Deactivation ..................................... 64
Deactivating ................................... 147 Locking ............................................ 64
Display message ............................ 194 Unlocking ......................................... 64
Function/notes ............................. 146 Kickdown
Home address Driving tips .................................... 124
see also Digital Operator's Man- Manual gearshifting ....................... 126
ual .................................................. 213 Knee bag .............................................. 43
Hood
Closing ........................................... 240 L
Display message ............................ 201
Important safety notes .................. 239 Lamps
Opening ......................................... 239 see Warning and indicator lamps
Horn ...................................................... 30
Hydroplaning ..................................... 137
12 Index
Lane Keeping Assist Lumbar support

Activating/deactivating (on- Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-
board computer) ............................ 174 port .................................................. 86
Display message ............................ 194
Function/information .................... 162 M
Lane Tracking package ..................... 160
M+S tires ............................................ 271
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
Malfunction message
anchors ................................................ 53
see Display messages
License plate lamp
Matte finish (cleaning instruc-
Changing bulbs .............................. 100
tions) .................................................. 246
License plate lamp (display mes-
Mechanical key
sage) ................................................... 190
Function/notes ................................ 66
Light sensor (display message) ....... 191
Inserting .......................................... 66
Lights
Locking vehicle ................................ 71
Automatic headlamp mode .............. 93
Removing ......................................... 66
Fogged up headlamps ...................... 95
Unlocking the driver's door .............. 71
Hazard warning lamps ..................... 95
Memory card (audio) ......................... 171
High beam flasher ............................ 94
Memory function ................................. 91
High-beam headlamps ..................... 94
Message memory (on-board com-
Light switch ..................................... 93
puter) .................................................. 178
Low-beam headlamps ...................... 94
Messages
Parking lamps .................................. 94
Rear fog lamp .................................. 94 see Display messages
Mirror turn signal
Setting exterior lighting ................... 93
Standing lamps ................................ 94 Cleaning ......................................... 248
Mirrors
Switching the daytime running
lamps on/off (on-board com- see Exterior mirrors
puter) ............................................. 176 see Rear-view mirror
Turn signals ..................................... 94 see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)
Mobile phone
Loading guidelines ............................ 221
Locking Connecting (Bluetooth® inter-
see Central locking face) .............................................. 217
Locking (doors) Connecting (device manager) ........ 218
Automatic ........................................ 71 Frequencies ................................... 293
Emergency locking ........................... 71 Installation ..................................... 293
From inside (central locking but- Menu (on-board computer) ............ 171
ton) .................................................. 70 Transmission output (maximum) .... 293
Locking centrally Modifying the programming
see Central locking (SmartKey) ........................................... 66
Locking verification signal (on- MOExtended tires .............................. 254
board computer) ............................... 176 Mounting wheels
Low-beam headlamps Lowering the vehicle ...................... 289
Display message ............................ 189 Mounting a new wheel ................... 289
Replacing bulbs ............................... 97 Preparing the vehicle ..................... 287
Switching on/off .............................. 94 Raising the vehicle ......................... 287
Removing a wheel .......................... 289
Securing the vehicle against roll-
ing away ........................................ 287
Index 13
MP3 Seat belt .......................................... 38

Operation ....................................... 171 OCS
see also Digital Operator's Man- Conditions ....................................... 44
ual .................................................. 213 Faults ............................................... 48
Multifunction display Operation ......................................... 45
Function/notes ............................. 167 System self-test ............................... 47
Permanent display ......................... 175 Odometer ........................................... 168
Multifunction steering wheel On-board computer
Operating the on-board computer .. 165 Assistance graphic menu ............... 173
Overview .......................................... 32 Assistance menu ........................... 172
Multimedia system Audio menu ................................... 170
Switching on and off ...................... 214 Convenience submenu .................. 176
Music files Display messages .......................... 177
see also Digital Operator's Man- Displaying a service message ........ 243
ual .................................................. 213 Factory settings ............................. 177
N Instrument cluster submenu .......... 175
Lighting submenu .......................... 176
Navigation
Menu overview .............................. 167
Entering a destination .................... 215
Message memory .......................... 178
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 169
Navigation menu ............................ 169
see also Digital Operator's Man-
Operation ....................................... 165
ual .................................................. 213
Service menu ................................. 174
Notes on breaking-in a new vehi-
Settings menu ............................... 175
cle ....................................................... 113
Standard display ............................ 168
Telephone menu ............................ 171
O Trip menu ...................................... 168
Occupant Classification System Vehicle submenu ........................... 176
(OCS) Video DVD operation ..................... 171
Conditions ....................................... 44 Operating safety
Faults ............................................... 48 Declaration of conformity ................ 26
Operation ......................................... 45 Important safety notes .................... 25
System self-test ............................... 47 Operating system
Occupant safety see On-board computer
Air bags ........................................... 42 Operation
Automatic measures after an acci- Digital Operator's Manual ................ 22
dent ................................................. 50 Operator's Manual
Belt warning ..................................... 41 Vehicle equipment ........................... 24
Children in the vehicle ..................... 50 Outside temperature display ........... 164
Important safety notes .................... 37 Overhead control panel ...................... 36
Introduction to the restraint sys- Override feature
tem .................................................. 37 Rear side windows ........................... 56
Occupant Classification System
(OCS) ............................................... 44 P
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator
Paint code number ............................ 294
lamps ............................................... 38
Pets in the vehicle ........................... 56 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 245
Restraint system warning lamp ........ 38 Panic alarm .......................................... 37
14 Index
Panorama roof with power tilt/ PASSENGER AIR BAG

sliding panel Display message ............................ 187
Important safety notes .................... 79 Indicator lamps ................................ 38
Operating ......................................... 80 Problem (malfunction) ................... 187
Operating the roller sunblinds for Pets in the vehicle ............................... 56
the sliding sunroof ........................... 80 Phone book
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 82 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Reversing feature ............................. 79 ual .................................................. 213
Parking Plastic trim (cleaning instruc-
Important safety notes .................. 129 tions) .................................................. 249
Parking brake ................................ 130 Power washers .................................. 245
Parking position for the exterior Power windows
mirror on the front-passenger see Side windows
side .................................................. 90 Protection against theft
Rear view camera .......................... 155 ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 63
Parking aid Immobilizer ...................................... 62
see Exterior mirrors Protection of the environment
see Rear view camera General notes .................................. 23
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Pulling away
Deactivating/activating ................. 150 Automatic transmission ................. 117
Driving system ............................... 148 General notes ................................ 117
Function/notes ............................. 148 Hill start assist ............................... 117
Problems (malfunctions) ................ 151 Q
Sensor range ................................. 149
Warning display ............................. 150 QR code
Parking assistance Mercedes-Benz Guide App ................. 1
see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Rescue card ..................................... 27
Parking brake Qualified specialist workshop ........... 26
Applying automatically ................... 131
Applying or releasing manually ...... 130 R
Display message ............................ 181 Radio
Electric parking brake .................... 130 Selecting a station ......................... 170
Emergency braking ........................ 131 see Digital Operator's Manual
General notes ................................ 130 Radio mode
Releasing automatically ................. 131 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Warning lamp ................................. 209 ual .................................................. 213
Parking lamps Radio-wave reception/transmis-
Switching on/off .............................. 94 sion in the vehicle
Parking Pilot Declaration of conformity ................ 26
Canceling ....................................... 155 Rain closing feature (panorama
Detecting parking spaces .............. 152 roof with power tilt/sliding panel) .... 80
Display Message ............................ 195 Reading lamp ....................................... 95
Exiting a parking space .................. 154 Rear compartment
Function/notes ............................. 151 Setting the air vents ...................... 112
Important safety notes .................. 151 Rear fog lamp
Parking .......................................... 153 Display message ............................ 190
Index 15
Replacing bulbs ............................... 98 Installing/removing the cover

Switching on/off .............................. 94 (front wheel arch) ............................ 97
Rear lamps License plate lamp ......................... 100
see Lights Low-beam headlamps ...................... 97
Rear seat Overview of bulb types .................... 96
Adjusting the angle of the backr- Rear fog lamp .................................. 98
ests ................................................ 226 Turn signals (front) ........................... 98
Folding the backrest forwards/ Rescue card ......................................... 27
back (vehicles with the EASY- Reserve (fuel tank)
VARIO-PLUS system) ..................... 225 see Fuel
Folding the backrest forwards/ Reserve fuel
back (vehicles without the EASY- Display message ............................ 193
VARIO-PLUS system) ..................... 225 Warning lamp ................................. 210
Fore-and-aft adjustment ................ 226 see Fuel
Rear view camera Residual heat (climate control) ........ 111
"Reverse parking" function ............ 157 Restraint system
Cleaning instructions ..................... 248 Display message ............................ 185
Display in the multimedia system .. 156 Introduction ..................................... 37
Function/notes ............................. 155 Warning lamp ................................. 209
General notes ................................ 155 Warning lamp (function) ................... 38
Switching on/off ........................... 156 Reversing feature
Rear window defroster Roller sunblind ................................. 81
Problem (malfunction) ................... 111 Side windows ................................... 75
Switching on/off ........................... 110 Tailgate ............................................ 72
Rear window wiper Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 24
Replacing the wiper blade .............. 102 Roller sunblind
Switching on/off ........................... 101 Panorama roof with power tilt/
Rear-view mirror sliding panel ..................................... 80
Anti-glare (manual) .......................... 88 Roof carrier ........................................ 229
Dipping (automatic) ......................... 90 Roof lining and carpets (cleaning
Reflective safety jacket .................... 251 guidelines) ......................................... 250
Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys- Roof load (maximum) ........................ 300
tem) Route guidance
Important safety notes .................. 299 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Refueling ual .................................................. 213
Fuel gauge ....................................... 31
Important safety notes .................. 127 S
Refueling process .......................... 127
see Fuel Safety
Remote control Children in the vehicle ..................... 50
Garage door opener ....................... 233 see Occupant safety
Programming (garage door Safety system
opener) .......................................... 234 see Driving safety systems
Replacing bulbs SD card
Backup lamp .................................... 98 Inserting ........................................ 219
High-beam headlamps ..................... 98 Inserting/removing ........................ 219
Important safety notes .................... 96 Removing ....................................... 219
16 Index
SD memory card Service message

see also Digital Operator's Man- see ASSYST PLUS
ual .................................................. 213 Service products
Search & Send Brake fluid ..................................... 298
see also Digital Operator's Man- Coolant (engine) ............................ 298
ual .................................................. 213 Engine oil ....................................... 297
Seat Fuel ................................................ 295
Correct driver's seat position ........... 83 Important safety notes .................. 295
Seat belts Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-
Adjusting the height ......................... 41 tem) ............................................... 299
center rear-compartment seat ......... 41 Washer fluid ................................... 299
Cleaning ......................................... 250 Setting the air distribution ............... 108
Correct usage .................................. 40 Setting the airflow ............................ 109
Fastening ......................................... 41 Setting the date/time format
Important safety guidelines ............. 39 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Introduction ..................................... 38 ual .................................................. 213
Releasing ......................................... 41 Setting the language
Warning lamp ................................. 204 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Warning lamp (function) ................... 41 ual .................................................. 213
Seats Setting the time
Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 85 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Adjusting (manually) ........................ 84 ual .................................................. 213
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup- Settings
port .................................................. 86 Factory (on-board computer) ......... 177
Adjusting the head restraint ............ 85 On-board computer ....................... 175
Cleaning the cover ......................... 249 Side impact air bag ............................. 43
Folding the backrest (rear com- Side marker lamp (display mes-
partment) forwards/back (vehi- sage) ................................................... 190
cles with the EASY-VARIO-PLUS Side windows
system) .......................................... 225 Cleaning ......................................... 247
Folding the backrest (rear com- Convenience closing feature ............ 76
partment) forwards/back (vehi- Convenience opening feature .......... 76
cles without the EASY-VARIO- Important safety information ........... 75
PLUS system) ................................ 225 Opening/closing .............................. 75
Important safety notes .................... 83 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 78
Seat heating problem ...................... 87 Resetting ......................................... 77
Storing settings (memory func- Reversing feature ............................. 75
tion) ................................................. 91 SIRIUS services
Switching seat heating on/off ......... 87 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Section ual .................................................. 213
Cargo compartment ......................... 72 Sliding sunroof
Securing cargo .................................. 227 see Panorama roof with power
Selector lever tilt/sliding panel
Cleaning ......................................... 249 SmartKey
Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 248 Changing the battery ....................... 67
Service menu (on-board com- Changing the programming ............. 66
puter) .................................................. 174 Checking the battery ....................... 67
Convenience closing feature ............ 76
Index 17
Convenience opening feature .......... 76 Steering

Display message ............................ 202 Display message ............................ 201
Door central locking/unlocking ....... 64 Steering assistant STEER CON-
Important safety notes .................... 64 TROL
KEYLESS-GO start function .............. 65 see STEER CONTROL
Loss ................................................. 68 Steering wheel
Mechanical key ................................ 66 Adjusting (manually) ........................ 88
Positions (ignition lock) ................. 114 Button overview ............................... 32
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 68 Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 165
Starting the engine ........................ 116 Cleaning ......................................... 249
SmartKey positions (ignition lock) .. 114 Important safety notes .................... 88
SMS Paddle shifters ............................... 125
see also Digital Operator's Man- Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 125
ual .................................................. 213 Stowage compartments
Snow chains ...................................... 272 Armrest (front) ............................... 222
Sockets Armrest (under) ............................. 223
Center console .............................. 233 Center console .............................. 222
General notes ................................ 233 Center console (rear) ..................... 223
Luggage compartment ................... 233 Cup holders ................................... 230
Rear compartment ......................... 233 Eyeglasses compartment ............... 222
Sound Glove box ....................................... 222
Switching on/off ........................... 214 Important safety information ......... 221
Special seat belt retractor .................. 51 Map pockets .................................. 223
Specialist workshop ............................ 26 Stowage net ................................... 223
Speed, controlling Stowage net ....................................... 223
see Cruise control Summer tires ..................................... 271
Speedometer Sun visor ............................................ 231
Activating/deactivating the addi- Switching air-recirculation mode
tional speedometer ........................ 175 on/off ................................................. 111
Digital ............................................ 169 Switching on media mode
In the Instrument cluster ................. 31 Via the device list .......................... 219
Segments ...................................... 164
Selecting the display unit ............... 175 T
Standing lamps
Display message ............................ 190 Tachometer ........................................ 164
Switching on/off .............................. 94 Tail lamps
Start-off assist Display message ............................ 190
Activating ....................................... 147 see Lights
Important safety notes .................. 147 Tailgate
Start/Stop button Display message ............................ 201
Removing ....................................... 115 Emergency unlocking ....................... 74
Starting the engine ........................ 116 Important safety notes .................... 72
Start/stop function Limiting the opening angle ............... 74
see ECO start/stop function Obstruction detection ...................... 72
Status overview (on-board com- Opening dimensions ...................... 300
puter) .................................................. 173 Opening/closing (from outside) ....... 73
STEER CONTROL .................................. 62 Opening/closing automatically
from inside ....................................... 73
18 Index
Tank Tire pressure not reached .............. 256

see Fuel tank Tire pressure reached .................... 256
Tank content Tires
Fuel gauge ....................................... 31 Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 285
Technical data Average weight of the vehicle
Capacities ...................................... 295 occupants (definition) .................... 284
Information .................................... 293 Bar (definition) ............................... 284
Tires/wheels ................................. 290 Changing a wheel .......................... 286
Vehicle data ................................... 300 Characteristics .............................. 284
Telephone Checking ........................................ 269
Accepting a call (multifunction Curb weight (definition) ................. 285
steering wheel) .............................. 172 Definition of terms ......................... 284
Authorizing a mobile phone (con- Direction of rotation ...................... 286
necting) ......................................... 217 Display message ............................ 198
Authorizing a mobile phone via the Distribution of the vehicle occu-
device manager (connecting) ......... 218 pants (definition) ............................ 286
Connecting a mobile phone DOT (Department of Transporta-
(device manager) ........................... 218 tion) (definition) ............................. 284
Connecting a mobile phone (gen- DOT, Tire Identification Number
eral information) ............................ 217 (TIN) ............................................... 283
Display message ............................ 201 GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
Introduction ................................... 171 (definition) ..................................... 284
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 171 General notes ................................ 290
Number from the phone book ........ 172 GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def-
Redialing ........................................ 172 inition) ........................................... 285
Rejecting/ending a call ................. 172 GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
see also Digital Operator's Man- ing) (definition) .............................. 285
ual .................................................. 213 Important safety notes .................. 269
Temperature Increased vehicle weight due to
Coolant .......................................... 165 optional equipment (definition) ...... 284
Outside temperature ...................... 164 Information on driving .................... 269
Setting (climate control) ................ 108 Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 285
Through-loading feature ................... 224 Labeling (overview) ........................ 281
Tire pressure Load bearing index (definition) ...... 286
Checking manually ........................ 275 Load index ..................................... 283
Display message ............................ 198 Load index (definition) ................... 285
Maximum ....................................... 275 M+S tires ....................................... 271
Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 256 Maximum load on a tire (defini-
Notes ............................................. 274 tion) ............................................... 285
Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 256 Maximum loaded vehicle weight
Recommended ............................... 272 (definition) ..................................... 285
Tire pressure loss warning system Maximum permissible tire pres-
General notes ................................ 275 sure (definition) ............................. 285
Important safety notes .................. 275 Maximum tire load ......................... 283
Restarting ...................................... 276 Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 285
TIREFIT kit .......................................... 254 MOExtended tires .......................... 271
Important safety notes .................. 254 Optional equipment weight (defi-
Storage location ............................ 253 nition) ............................................ 286
Index 19
PSI (pounds per square inch) (def- With the front axle raised ............... 264
inition) ........................................... 285 Towing eye ......................................... 252
Replacing ....................................... 286 Traffic reports
Service life ..................................... 270 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Sidewall (definition) ....................... 285 ual .................................................. 213
Speed rating (definition) ................ 285 Transmission
Storing ........................................... 286 see Automatic transmission
Structure and characteristics Transmission position display
(definition) ..................................... 284 (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...................... 121
Summer tires ................................. 271 Transporting the vehicle .................. 265
Temperature .................................. 280 Trim pieces (cleaning instruc-
TIN (Tire Identification Number) tions) .................................................. 249
(definition) ..................................... 286 Trip computer (on-board com-
Tire bead (definition) ...................... 285 puter) .................................................. 168
Tire pressure (definition) ................ 285 Trip odometer
Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 284 Calling up ....................................... 168
Tire size (data) ............................... 290 Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 169
Tire size designation, load-bearing Trunk
capacity, speed rating .................... 281 Emergency release button ............... 74
Tire tread ....................................... 270 Trunk lid
Tire tread (definition) ..................... 285 see Tailgate
Total load limit (definition) ............. 286 Turn signals
Traction ......................................... 280 Display message ............................ 189
Traction (definition) ....................... 286 Replacing bulbs (front) ..................... 98
Tread wear ..................................... 280 Switching on/off .............................. 94
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Two-way radio
Standards ...................................... 279 Frequencies ................................... 293
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Installation ..................................... 293
Standards (definition) .................... 284 Transmission output (maximum) .... 293
Wear indicator (definition) ............. 286 Type identification plate
Wheel rim (definition) .................... 284 see Vehicle identification plate
see Flat tire
Top Tether ............................................ 53 U
Tow-starting
Emergency engine starting ............ 266 Unlocking
Important safety notes .................. 263 Emergency unlocking ....................... 71
Installing the towing eye ................ 264 From inside the vehicle (central
Removing the towing eye ............... 264 unlocking button) ............................. 70
Towing a trailer USB devices
ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- Connecting to the Media Inter-
gram) ............................................... 62 face ............................................... 220
Towing away
Important safety guidelines ........... 263 V
Installing the towing eye ................ 264 Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 232
Notes for 4MATIC vehicles ............ 266 Vehicle
Removing the towing eye ............... 264 Correct use ...................................... 27
Transporting the vehicle ................ 265 Data acquisition ............................... 27
With both axles on the ground ....... 265
20 Index
Display message ............................ 199 Fuel tank ........................................ 210

Equipment ....................................... 24 Overview .......................................... 31
Individual settings .......................... 175 PASSENGER AIR BAG ...................... 38
Limited Warranty ............................. 27 Reserve fuel ................................... 210
Loading .......................................... 276 Restraint system ............................ 209
Locking (in an emergency) ............... 71 Seat belt ........................................ 204
Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 64 Warning triangle ................................ 252
Lowering ........................................ 289 Warranty .............................................. 24
Maintenance .................................... 24 Washer fluid
Parking for a long period ................ 131 Display message ............................ 201
Pulling away ................................... 117 Weather display (COMAND)
Raising ........................................... 287 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Reporting problems ......................... 27 ual .................................................. 213
Securing from rolling away ............ 287 Wheel and tire combinations
Transporting .................................. 265 Tires ............................................... 290
Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 71 Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 289
Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 64 Wheel chock ...................................... 287
Vehicle data ................................... 300 Wheels
Vehicle data Changing a wheel .......................... 286
Roof load (maximum) ..................... 300 Checking ........................................ 269
Trunk load (maximum) ................... 300 Cleaning ......................................... 247
Vehicle dimensions ........................... 300 Emergency spare wheel ................. 291
Vehicle emergency locking ................ 71 Important safety notes .................. 269
Vehicle identification number Information on driving .................... 269
see VIN Interchanging/changing ................ 286
Vehicle identification plate .............. 294 Mounting a new wheel ................... 289
Vehicle tool kit .................................. 252 Removing a wheel .......................... 289
Ventilation Storing ........................................... 286
Setting the vents ........................... 112 Tightening torque ........................... 289
Video Wheel size/tire size ....................... 290
Operating the DVD ......................... 171 Wheels and tires
see also Digital Operator's Man- Changing a wheel .......................... 287
ual .................................................. 213 Window curtain air bag
VIN Display message ............................ 186
Seat ............................................... 295 Operation ......................................... 44
Type plate ...................................... 294 Windows
see Side windows
W Windshield
Defrosting ...................................... 109
Warning and indicator lamps
Windshield washer system
ABS ................................................ 206
Adding washer fluid ....................... 242
Active Brake Assist ........................ 212
Brakes ........................................... 205 Windshield wipers
Check Engine ................................. 210
Display message ............................ 202
Coolant .......................................... 210
Problem (malfunction) ................... 103
Distance warning ........................... 212
Rear window wiper ........................ 101
ESP® .............................................. 207 Replacing the wiper blades ............ 101
ESP® OFF ....................................... 208 Switching on/off ........................... 100
Index 21
Winter driving
Slippery road surfaces ................... 137
Snow chains .................................. 272
Winter operation
General notes ................................ 271
Winter tires
M+S tires ....................................... 271
Wiper blades
Cleaning ......................................... 247
Replacing (rear window) ................ 102
Wooden trim (cleaning instruc-
tions) .................................................. 249
Workshop
see Qualified specialist workshop
Z
ZONE function
Switching on/off ........................... 109
22 Digital Operator's Manual
Introduction Operating the Digital Operator's Man-

ual
The printed Operator's Manual provides infor-
mation about the safe operation of your vehicle. General notes
The Digital Operator's Manual provides compre-
Please observe the information about the oper-
hensive and specifically adapted information on
ation of the controller (Y page 214).
your vehicle's equipment and multimedia sys-
tem. You can call up the Digital Operator's Man-
ual via the multimedia system. Content pages
i You will not incur any costs when calling up The content pages can be accessed by means of
the Digital Operator's Manual. The Digital a visual search, a keyword search or using the
Operator's Manual works without connecting contents.
to the Internet.
There are three ways to access the topics of the
Digital Operator's Manual:
RVisual search
The visual search allows you to explore your
vehicle "virtually". Starting from either the
vehicle exterior view or interior view, you can
access many of the different topics covered
by the Digital Operator's Manual. To access
the vehicle interior section, select the "Vehi-
cle interior" view.
RKeyword search
X To scroll forwards/backwards: turn 3
The keyword search allows you to search for a
the controller.
keyword by entering characters.
X To display in full-screen or animation: slide
RContents
8 the controller to the left :.
You can select individual sections in the con-
X To select information texts or save book-
tents.
marks: slide 9 the controller to the
i The Digital Operator's Manual is deactiva- right ;.
ted for safety reasons while driving. X To select a link: slide 6 the controller
downwards =.
X To exit a content page: select % sym-
Operation bol ?.
X To call up the basic menu of the Digital
Calling up the Digital Operator's Man- Operator's Manual: select Þ symbol A.
ual
X To switch functions to the multimedia
X Press the Ø button in the center console. system using the buttons on the center
The overview relating to the vehicle appears. console: press the $, %, Õ or Ø
X Select the "Operator's Manual" menu item by button.
turning 3 or pressing 7 the controller. The selected menu appears. The Digital Oper-
X Confirm 7 the message about the warning
ator's Manual remains open in the back-
and safety notes. ground.
The basic menu for the Digital Operator's
Manual appears.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts 23
Protecting the environment Rchange gear in good time and use each gear
only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed.
General notes
Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.
Introduction
H Environmental note Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump-
Daimler's declared policy is one of compre- tion.
hensive environmental protection.
The objectives are for the natural resources
that form the basis of our existence on this Environmental concerns and recom-
planet to be used sparingly and in a manner mendations
that takes the requirements of both nature Wherever the Operator's Manual requires you to
and humanity into account. dispose of materials, first try to regenerate or re-
You too can help to protect the environment use them. Observe the relevant environmental
by operating your vehicle in an environmen- rules and regulations when disposing of materi-
als. In this way you will help to protect the envi-
tally responsible manner.
ronment.
Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,
transmission, brake and tire wear are affected
by these factors: Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
Roperating conditions of your vehicle
Ryour personal driving style H Environmental note
You can influence both factors. You should Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major
bear the following in mind: assemblies and parts which are of the same
Operating conditions: quality as new parts. They are covered by the
same Limited Warranty entitlements as new
Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con-
parts.
sumption.
Ralways make sure that the tire pressures ! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-
are correct. ces, as well as control units and sensors for
these restraint systems, may be installed in
Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.
the following areas of your vehicle:
Rremove roof racks once you no longer need
Rdoors
them. Rdoor pillars
Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute Rdoor sills
to environmental protection. You should Rseats
therefore adhere to the service intervals. Rcockpit
Ralways have service work carried out at a Rinstrument cluster
qualified specialist workshop. Rcenter console
Personal driving style: Do not install accessories such as audio sys-
Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when tems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs
or welding. You could impair the operating
starting the engine. efficiency of the restraint systems.
Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle Have aftermarket accessories installed at a
is stationary. qualified specialist workshop.
Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance You could jeopardize the operating safety of
from the vehicle in front. your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as
Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and well as accessories relevant to safety which
have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. This
braking.
could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant
Z
24 Service and vehicle operation
systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only genu- Service and vehicle operation
ine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal qual-
ity. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that Warranty
have been specifically approved for your vehi-
Introduction
cle. The Limited Warranty for your vehicle applies in

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to accordance with the warranty terms and condi-
strict quality control. Every part has been spe- tions in the Service and Warranty Information
cifically developed, manufactured or selected booklet.
for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
Therefore, only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts replace and repair all factory-installed parts in
should be used. accordance with the following warranty terms
More than 300,000 different genuine and conditions:
Mercedes-Benz parts are available for RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty
Mercedes-Benz models. REmission System Warranty
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain REmission Performance Warranty
a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts for RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu-
necessary service and repair work. In addition, setts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island
strategically located parts delivery centers pro- and Vermont Emission Control System War-
vide quick and reliable parts service. ranty
Always specify the vehicle identification number RState warranty enforcement laws (lemon
(VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz laws)
parts (Y page 294).
Replacement parts and accessories are covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessories
warranties. These are available at any author-
Operator's Manual ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Vehicle equipment i Should you lose your Service and Warranty
Information booklet, have an authorized
i This Operator's Manual describes all models Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replace-
and all standard and optional equipment of ment. The new Service and Warranty Infor-
your vehicle available at the time of this Oper- mation booklet will be posted to you.
ator's Manual going to print. Country-specific
differences are possible. Bear in mind that
your vehicle may not feature all functions
described here. This also applies to safety- Maintenance
relevant systems and functions. The equip- Always bring the Maintenance Booklet with you
ment in your vehicle may therefore differ from when taking the vehicle to an authorized
that shown in the descriptions and illustra- Mercedes-Benz Center. Your customer service
tions. advisor will enter every service into your Main-
The original purchase agreement lists all sys- tenance Booklet on your behalf.
tems installed in your vehicle.
Should you have any questions concerning
equipment and operation, please consult an Roadside Assistance
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro-
The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Book- gram offers technical help in the event of a
let are important documents and should be kept breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assis-
in the vehicle. tance Hotline are answered by our agents 24
hours a day, 365 days a year.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
(USA)
1-800-387-0100 (Canada)
For additional information, refer to the
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program
Operating safety 25
brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance" In Canada

section in the Service and Warranty Booklet Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
(Canada). You will find both in the vehicle docu- European Delivery Department
ment wallet.
Introduction
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Change of address or change of own-
ership
Operating safety
In the event of a change of address, please send
us the "Notification of Address Change" in the Important safety notes
Service and Warranty Booklet or simply call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center G WARNING
(USA) at the hotline number If you do not have the prescribed service/
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or maintenance work or any required repairs
Customer Service Center (Canada) at
1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in contact- carried out, this can result in malfunctions or
ing you in a timely manner should the need arise. system failures. There is a risk of an accident.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all liter- Always have the prescribed service/mainte-
ature in the vehicle so that it is available to the nance work as well as any required repairs
next owner. carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
If you have purchased a used car, please send us
the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in the G WARNING
Service and Warranty Booklet or simply call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
(USA) at the hotline number twigs may ignite if they come into contact with
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk
Customer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. of fire.
When driving off road or on unpaved roads,
check the vehicle's underside regularly. In
Vehicle operation outside Canada particular, remove parts of plants or other
When you are abroad with your vehicle, observe flammable materials which have become
the following points: trapped. In the case of damage, contact a
RService facilities or replacement parts may qualified specialist workshop.
not be readily available.
RLead-free fuel for vehicles with a catalytic G WARNING
converter may not be available. Leaded fuel Modifications to electronic components, their
can cause damage to the catalytic converter.
software as well as wiring can impair their
RThe fuel may have a considerably lower
function and/or the function of other net-
octane number. Unsuitable fuel can cause
engine damage. worked components. In particular, systems
Some Mercedes-Benz models are available for relevant to safety could also be affected. As a
delivery in Europe through our European Deliv- result, these may no longer function as inten-
ery Program. For details, consult an authorized ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of
Mercedes-Benz Center or write to one of the the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an
following addresses. accident and injury.
In the USA Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC tronic components or their software. You
European Delivery Department should have all work to electrical and elec-
One Mercedes Drive tronic equipment carried out at a qualified
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 specialist workshop.
Z
26 Operating safety
! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if: Diagnostics connection

Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high The diagnostics connection is only intended for
curb or an unpaved road the connection of diagnostic equipment at a
Introduction
Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a qualified specialist workshop.
curb, a speed bump or a pothole in the road
Ra heavy object strikes the underbody or G WARNING
parts of the chassis If you connect equipment to a diagnostics
In situations like this, the body, the under- connection in the vehicle, it may affect the
body, chassis parts, wheels or tires could be operation of vehicle systems. As a result, the
damaged without the damage being visible. operating safety of the vehicle could be affec-
Components damaged in this way can unex- ted. There is a risk of an accident.
pectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, no
longer withstand the loads they are designed Only connect equipment to a diagnostics con-
to. nection in the vehicle, which is approved for
If the underbody paneling is damaged, com- your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
bustible materials such as leaves, grass or
twigs can gather between the underbody and G WARNING
the underbody paneling. If these materials
come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
system, they can catch fire. pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
In such situations, have the vehicle checked The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
and repaired immediately at a qualified spe- jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
cialist workshop. If on continuing your jour- Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
ney you notice that driving safety is impaired, stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
pull over and stop the vehicle immediately,
paying attention to road and traffic condi- the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
tions. In such cases, consult a qualified spe- securely and as specified in order to ensure
cialist workshop. sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
loose floormats and do not place floormats on
top of one another.
Declarations of conformity
! If the engine is switched off and equipment
USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle com- on the diagnostics connection is used, the
ply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is starter battery may discharge.
subject to the two following two conditions: 1)
These devices may not cause harmful interfer- Connecting equipment to the diagnostics con-
ence, and 2) These devices must accept any nection can lead to emissions monitoring infor-
interference received, including interference mation being reset, for example. This may lead
that may cause undesired operation. Changes to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of
or modifications not expressly approved by the the next emissions test during the main inspec-
party responsible for compliance could void the tion.
user’s authority to operate the equipment."
Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle
comply with Industry Canada license-exempt Qualified specialist workshop
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the fol- An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a quali-
lowing two conditions: (1) These devices may fied specialist workshop. It has the necessary
not cause interference, and (2) These devices specialist knowledge, tools and qualifications to
must accept any interference, including inter- correctly carry out the work required on your
ference that may cause undesired operation of vehicle. This is especially the case for work rel-
the device." evant to safety.
Observe the notes in the Maintenance Booklet.
Data stored in the vehicle 27
Always have the following work carried out at an Limited Warranty

authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:
Rwork relevant to safety ! Observe the notes in this Operator's Manual
regarding the correct operation of your vehi-
Introduction
Rservice and maintenance work
cle and possible damage to the vehicle. Dam-
Rrepair work age to the vehicle which is caused by violation
Ralterations, installation work and modifica- of these notes is not covered by the
tions Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or the new
Rwork on electronic components or used-vehicle warranty.
Correct use QR codes for the rescue card

If you remove any warning stickers, you or oth- The QR codes are secured in the fuel filler flap
ers could fail to recognize certain dangers. and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the
Leave warning stickers in position. event of an accident, rescue services can use
Observe the following information when driving the QR code to quickly find the appropriate res-
your vehicle: cue card for your vehicle. The current rescue
Rthe safety notes in this manual card contains the most important information
Rtechnical data for the vehicle
about your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the
routing of the electric cables.
Rtraffic rules and regulations
You can find more information under
Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to motor
www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code.
vehicles
Data stored in the vehicle

Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your Data storage
vehicle, particularly one that you believe may A wide range of electronic components in your
affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact vehicle contain data memories.
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immedi- These data memories temporarily or perma-
ately to have the problem diagnosed and recti- nently store technical information about:
fied. If the problem is not resolved to your sat-
isfaction, please discuss the problem again with Rthe vehicle's operating state
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or, if nec- Rincidents
essary, contact us at one of the following Rmalfunctions
addresses.
In general, this technical information docu-
In the USA ments the state of a component, a module, a
Customer Assistance Center system or the surroundings.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC These include, for example:
3 Mercedes Drive Roperating conditions of system components,
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 e.g. fluid levels
In Canada Rthe vehicle's status messages and those of its
Customer Relations Department individual components, e.g. number of wheel
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. revolutions/speed, deceleration in move-
ment, lateral acceleration, accelerator pedal
98 Vanderhoof Avenue position
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 Rmalfunctions and defects in important system
components, e.g. lights, brakes
Rvehicle reactions and operating conditions in
special driving situations, e.g. air bag deploy-
Z
28 Data stored in the vehicle
ment, intervention of stability control sys- crash-like situations, such as an air bag deploy-
tems ment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
Rambient conditions, e.g. outside temperature assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data
Introduction
This data is of an exclusively technical nature

and can be used to: related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
Rassist in recognizing and rectifying malfunc- or less.
tions and defects The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
Ranalyze vehicle functions, e.g. after an acci- such data as:
dent
RHow various systems in your vehicle were
Roptimize vehicle functions
operating
The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's RWhether or not the driver and passenger
movements. safety belts were buckled/fastened
When your vehicle is serviced, technical infor- RHow far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
mation can be read from the event data memory accelerator and/or brake pedal and
and malfunction data memory.
RHow fast the vehicle was traveling.
Services include, for example:
These data can help provide a better under-
Rrepair services standing of the circumstances in which crashes
Rservice processes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded
Rwarranties by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situa-
Rquality assurance
tion occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR
under normal driving conditions and no personal
The vehicle is read out by employees of the ser- data (e.g. name, gender, age and crash location)
vice network (including the manufacturer) using are recorded. However, other parties, such as
special diagnostic testers. More detailed infor- law enforcement could combine the EDR data
mation is obtained from it, if required. with the type of personally identifying data rou-
After a malfunction has been rectified, the infor- tinely acquired during a crash investigation.
mation is deleted from the malfunction memory Access to the vehicle and/or the EDR is needed
or is continually overwritten. to read data that is recorded by an EDR, and
When operating the vehicle, situations are con- special equipment is required. In addition to the
ceivable in which this technical data, in connec- vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have
tion with other information (if necessary, under the special equipment, such as law enforce-
consultation with an authorized expert), could ment, can read the information by accessing the
be traced to a person. vehicle or the EDR.
Examples include: EDR data may be used in civil and criminal mat-
Raccident reports ters as a tool in accident reconstruction, acci-
Rdamage to the vehicle
dent claims and vehicle safety. Since the Crash
Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extract
Rwitness statements data from the EDR is commercially available,
Further additional functions that have been con- Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly
tractually agreed upon with the customer allow disclaims any and all liability arising from the
certain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehi- extraction of this information by unauthorized
cle as well. The additional functions include, for Mercedes-Benz personnel.
example, vehicle location in case of an emer- MBUSA will not share EDR data with others
gency. without the consent of the vehicle owners or, if
the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the
lessee. Exceptions to this representation
Event data recorders include responses to subpoenas by law enforce-
ment; by federal, state or local government; in
This vehicle is equipped with an event data connection with or arising out of litigation involv-
recorder (EDR). This vehicle is equipped with an ing MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or,
event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of as required by law.
an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
Information on copyright 29
Warning: The EDR is a component of the

Restraint System Module. Tampering with, alter-
ing, modifying or removing the EDR component
may result in a malfunction of the Restraint Sys-
Introduction
tem Module and other systems.
State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that
conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted.
This means that in the event of such conflict, the
federal regulation governs. As of February 2013,
13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.
Information on copyright
General information
Information on license for free and open-source
software used in your vehicle and its electronic
components is available on the following web-
site:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource
Registered trademarks
RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue-
tooth SIG Inc.
RDTS™ is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.
RDolby® and MLP™ are registered trademarks
of DOLBY Laboratories.
RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are reg-
istered trademarks of Daimler AG.
RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of John-
son Controls.
RiPod® and iTunes® are registered trademarks
of Apple Inc.
RLogic7® is a registered trademark of Harman
International Industries.
RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are regis-
tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
RSIRIUS® is a registered trademark of Sirius
XM Radio Inc.
RHD Radio™ is a registered trademark of iBiq-
uity Digital Corporation.
RGracenote® is a registered trademark of
Gracenote, Inc.
RZAGAT Survey® and related brands are regis-
tered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC.
Z
30 Cockpit
Cockpit
At a glance
Function Page Function Page

: Steering wheel paddle shift- D Climate control systems 104
ers 125
E Ignition lock 114
; Combination switch 94
F Adjusts the steering wheel 88
= Instrument cluster 31
G Cruise control lever 138
? Horn
H Electric parking brake 130
A DIRECT SELECT lever 121
I Light switch 93
B Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
warning display 150 J Diagnostics connection 26
C Overhead control panel 36 K Opens the hood 239

Instrument cluster 31
Instrument cluster
At a glance
: Speedometer with segments 164 ; #! Turn signals 94
Warning and indicator lamps: = Multifunction display 167
L Low-beam headlamps 94
T Parking lamps 94 ? Tachometer 164
K High-beam headlamps 94 6 Restraint system 38
÷ ESP® 207 ü Seat belt not fastened 204
Electric parking brake R Rear fog lamp 94
applied (red) ; Check Engine 210
F (USA only) A Coolant temperature gage 165
! (Canada only) 209 Warning and indicator lamps:
! Electric parking brake ? Coolant too hot/cold 210
(yellow) 209
· Distance warning 212 B Fuel level indicator
å ESP® OFF 207 Warning and indicator lamps:
! ABS malfunctioning 206 æ Reserve fuel 210
Braking 205 C Instrument cluster lighting 164
$ (USA only)
J (Canada only)
32 Multifunction steering wheel
Multifunction steering wheel

At a glance

: Multifunction display 167 ? ò Opens the menu list
; Multimedia system display 9 : Selects a menu
a Confirms the selection
= ~ Rejects or ends a call % Back
6 Makes or accepts a call Operates the on-board com-
Further telephone functions 171 puter 165
W X Adjusts volume ? Switches off voice-
8 Mute operated control for naviga-
? Switches on voice- tion or the Voice Control Sys-
operated control for naviga- tem
tion or the Voice Control Sys-
tem
i In vehicles with multimedia system Audio 20 i In vehicles with multimedia system

you can find further information: COMAND you can find further information:
Ron the multimedia system in the Digital Ron the multimedia system in the Digital
Operator's Manual Operator's Manual
Ron voice-controlled navigation in the man- Ron the DVD changer or single DVD drive in
ufacturer's operating instructions the Digital Operator's Manual
Ron the Voice Control System in the sepa-
rate operating instructions
Center console 33
Center console
Center console, upper section
At a glance
: Multimedia system; see the A £ Hazard warning lamps 95
Digital Operator's Manual
B PASSENGER AIRBAG indica-
; c Seat heating 87 tor lamps 38
= c Parking Assist C DYNAMIC SELECT button 120
PARKTRONIC 150
? è ECO start/stop func-
tion 117
34 Center console
Center console, lower section

At a glance

: Ashtray 232 ? Stowage compartment with
Cigarette lighter 232 Media Interface 221
Socket 233 A Multimedia system control-
Stowage compartment 221 ler; see Digital Operator's
Manual
; Stowage compartment 221
= Cup holder 230
Door control panel 35
Door control panel
At a glance
: Opens the door 70 B W Opens/closes the side
windows 75
; % & Unlocks/locks
the vehicle 70 C n Activates/deactivates
the override feature for the
= r45= Saves side windows in the rear
the seat and exterior mirror compartment 56
settings 91
? Adjusts the seats electrically 85
A 7Zö\
Adjusts and folds the exterior
mirrors in/out electrically 89
36 Overhead control panel
Overhead control panel

At a glance

: u Switches the rear com- C Eyeglasses compartment 222
partment interior lighting
on/off 95 D 3 Opens/closes the pan-
orama roof with power tilt/
; p Switches the right- sliding panel with roller sun-
hand reading lamp on/off 95 blinds 80
= | Switches the front inte- E c Switches the front inte-
rior lighting/automatic interior lighting on 95
rior lighting control off 95
F p Switches the left-hand
? Rear-view mirror 90 reading lamp on/off 95
A Sets the compass 236
B Buttons for the garage door
opener 234
Occupant safety 37
Panic alarm As the driver, you also have to make sure that
the steering wheel is adjusted correctly.
Observe the information relating to the correct
driver's seat position (Y page 83).
You also have to make sure that an air bag can
inflate properly if deployed (Y page 42).
An air bag supplements a correctly worn seat
belt. As an additional safety device, the air bag
increases the level of protection for vehicle
Safety
occupants in the event of an accident. For exam-
ple, if, in the event of an accident, the protection
offered by the seat belt is sufficient, the air bags
are not deployed. When an accident occurs, only
the air bags that increase protection in that par-
ticular accident situation are deployed. How-
X To activate: press and hold the ever, seat belts and air bags generally do not
! button : for approx. one second. protect against objects penetrating the vehicle
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the from the outside.
alarm system is armed. Information on restraint system operation can
X To deactivate: press ! button : again. be found under "Triggering of the Emergency
or Tensioning Devices and air bags" (Y page 49).
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. See "Children in the vehicle" for information on
or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function children traveling with you in the vehicle as well
or KEYLESS‑GO as on child restraint systems (Y page 50).
X Press the Start/Stop button.
The SmartKey must be in the vehicle. Important safety notes
G WARNING
Occupant safety Modifications to the restraint system may
cause it to no longer work as intended. The
Introduction to the restraint system
restraint system may then not perform its
The restraint system can reduce the risk of vehi- intended protective function and may fail in an
cle occupants coming into contact with parts of accident or trigger unexpectedly, for example.
the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even
The restraint system can also reduce the forces
to which vehicle occupants are subjected during fatal injury.
an accident. Never modify parts of the restraint system.
The restraint system comprises: Never tamper with the wiring, the electronic
RSeat belt system components or their software.
RAir bags
If it is necessary to modify components of the
RChild restraint system restraint system to accommodate a person with
RChild seat securing systems disabilities, contact an authorized Mercedes-
The components of the restraint system work in Benz Center for details. USA only: for further
conjunction with each other. They can only information contact our Customer Assistance
deploy their protective function if, at all times, all Center at 1-800 FOR-MERCEDES
vehicle occupants: (1‑800‑367‑6372).
Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use
(Y page 40) driving aids which have been approved specifi-
cally for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
Rhave the seat and head restraint adjusted
properly (Y page 83)
Z
38 Occupant safety
Restraint system warning lamp The indicator lamps display the status of the
front-passenger front air bag.
The functions of the restraint system are RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 sec-
checked after the ignition is switched on and at
regular intervals while the engine is running. onds, subsequently both indicator lamps are
Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): the
good time. front-passenger front air bag is able to deploy
in the event of an accident.
The 6 restraint system warning lamp on the RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the front-
instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is
passenger front air bag is deactivated. It will
Safety
switched on. It goes out no later than a few sec-

then not be deployed in the event of an acci-
onds after the vehicle is started. The compo-
dent.
nents of the restraint system are in operational
readiness. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is
off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
A malfunction has occurred if the 6 restraint
lamp shows the status of the front-passenger
system warning lamp:
front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
Rdoes not light up after the ignition is switched indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.
on Depending on the person in the front-passenger
Rdoes not go out after a few seconds with the seat, the front-passenger front air bag must
engine running either be deactivated or enabled; see the fol-
Rlights up again while the engine is running lowing points. You must make sure of this both
before and during a journey.
G WARNING
RChildren in a child restraint system:
If the restraint system is malfunctioning, whether the front-passenger front air bag is
restraint system components may be trig- enabled or deactivated depends on the instal-
gered unintentionally or may not deploy as led child restraint system, and the age and
intended during an accident. This can affect size of the child. Therefore, be sure to observe
for example the Emergency Tensioning the notes on the "Occupant Classification
System (OCS)" (Y page 44) and on "Chil-
Device or the air bag. This poses an increased dren in the vehicle" (Y page 50). There you
risk of injury or even fatal injury. will also find instructions on rearward and
Have the restraint system checked and forward-facing child restraint systems on the
repaired in a qualified specialist workshop as front-passenger seat.
soon as possible. RAll other persons: depending on the classi-
fication of the person in the front-passenger
seat, the front-passenger front air bag is ena-
bled or deactivated (Y page 44). Be sure to
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp observe the notes on "Seat
belts“ (Y page 38) and "Air bags"
(Y page 42). There you can also find infor-
mation on the correct seat position.
Seat belts
Introduction
Seat belts are the most effective means of
restricting the movement of vehicle occupants
in the event of an accident or the vehicle rolling
over. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupants
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp : and coming into contact with parts of the vehicle
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp ; are interior or being ejected from the vehicle. Fur-
part of the Occupant Classification System thermore, the seat belt helps to keep the vehicle
(OCS).
Occupant safety 39
occupant in the best position in relation to the incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause
air bag. injuries, for example, in the event of an acci-
The seat belt system comprises: dent or when braking or changing direction
RSeat belts abruptly. This poses an increased risk of injury
REmergency Tensioning Devices for the front or even fatal injury.
seat belts and the outer seat belts in the rear Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have
RSeat belt force limiters for the front seat belts
their seat belts fastened correctly and are sit-
and the outer seat belts in the rear
ting properly.
Safety
If the seat belt is pulled out of the belt outlet
quickly or with a jerky movement, the belt The components of the restraint system work in
retractor locks. The belt strap cannot be extrac- conjunction with each other. They can only
ted any further. deploy their protective function if, at all times, all
The Emergency Tensioning Device tightens the vehicle occupants:
seat belt in an accident, pulling the belt close
Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly
against the body. However it does not pull the
vehicle occupant back in the direction of the (Y page 40)
backrest. Rhave the seat and head restraint adjusted
The Emergency Tensioning Device does not cor- properly (Y page 83)
rect an incorrect seat position or the routing of G WARNING
an incorrectly fastened seat belt.
The seat belt does not offer the intended level
When triggered, a seat belt force limiter helps to
reduce the force exerted by the seat belt on the of protection if you have not moved the back-
vehicle occupant. rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-
The seat belt force limiters for the front seats are ing or in the event of an accident, you could
synchronized with the front air bags, which slide underneath the seat belt and sustain
absorb part of the deceleration force. This can abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This
reduce the force exerted on the vehicle occu- poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal
pants during an accident. injury.
! If the front-passenger seat is not occupied, Adjust the seat properly before beginning
do not engage the seat belt tongue in the your journey. Always ensure that the backrest
buckle on the front-passenger seat. Other- is in an almost vertical position and that the
wise, in the event of an accident the Emer-
gency Tensioning Device and the side impact shoulder section of your seat belt is routed
air bag, in addition to other systems, may be across the center of your shoulder.
triggered and have to be replaced.
G WARNING
Important safety notes Persons less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall cannot
The use of seat belts and child restraint systems wear the seat belt correctly without an addi-
is required by law in: tional and suitable restraint system. If the
seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot per-
Rall 50 states
form its intended protective function. An
Rthe U.S. territories
incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause
Rthe District of Columbia
injuries, for example, in the event of an acci-
Rall Canadian provinces
dent or when braking or changing direction
Even where this is not required by law, all vehicle abruptly. This poses an increased risk of injury
occupants should correctly fasten their seat
belts before starting the journey. or even fatal injury.
For this reason, always secure persons under
G WARNING 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable additional restraint
If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot systems.
perform its intended protective function. An
Z
40 Occupant safety
If a child younger than twelve years old and Proper use of the seat belts
under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the
vehicle: Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
(Y page 39).
Ralways secure the child in a child restraint
system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehi- All vehicle occupants must be wearing the seat
cle. The child restraint system must be appro- belt correctly before beginning the journey. Also
priate to the age, weight and size of the child. make sure that all vehicle occupants are always
wearing the seat belt correctly while the vehicle
Ralways observe the instructions and safety
is in motion.
notes on "Children in the vehicle"
Safety
(Y page 50) in addition to the child restraint When fastening the seat belt, always make sure
system manufacturer's installation and oper- that:
ating instructions Rthe seat belt buckle tongue is inserted only
Ralways observe the instructions and safety into the belt buckle belonging to that seat
notes on the "Occupant classification system Rthe seat belt is pulled tight across your body
(OCS)" (Y page 44) Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter
coat.
G WARNING
Rthe seat belt is not twisted
The seat belts may not perform their intended
Only then can the forces which occur be dis-
protective function if: tributed over the area of the belt.
Rthey are damaged, modified, extremely Rthe shoulder section of the belt is routed
dirty, bleached or dyed across the center of your shoulder
Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or The shoulder section of the seat belt should
not touch your neck or be routed under your
extremely dirty
arm or behind your back. Where possible,
Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt adjust the seat belt to the appropriate height.
anchorages or inertia reels have been modi- Rthe lap belt is taut and passes across your lap
fied. as low down as possible
Seat belts may be damaged in an accident, The lap belt must always be routed across
although the damage may not be visible, e.g. your hip joints and not across your abdomen.
due to splinters of glass. Modified or damaged This applies particularly to pregnant women.
If necessary, push the lap belt down to your
seat belts may tear or fail, e.g. in an accident. hip joint and pull it tight using the shoulder
Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices section of the belt.
could accidentally trigger or fail to deploy Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp, poin-
when necessary. This poses an increased risk ted or fragile objects
of injury or even fatal injury. If you have such items located on or in your
Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Ten- clothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses, store
sioning Devices, belt anchorages and inertia these in a suitable place.
reels. Make sure that the seat belts are Ronly one person is using a seat belt
undamaged, not worn out and clean. Follow- Infants and children must never travel sitting
ing an accident, have the seat belts checked on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the event
of an accident, they could be crushed
immediately at a qualified specialist work- between the vehicle occupant and seat belt.
shop. Robjects are never secured with a seat belt if
the seat belt is also being used by one of the
Only use seat belts that have been approved for
vehicle's occupants
your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
Also ensure that there are never objects
between a person and the seat, e.g. cushions.
Seat belts are only intended to secure and
restrain vehicle occupants. Always observe the
"Loading guidelines" for securing objects, lug-
gage or loads (Y page 221).
Occupant safety 41
Fastening and adjusting the seat belts X To release the rear center seat belt: pull
the seat belt out approximately 1 in (25 mm)
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt at the belt outlet on the backrest and then
(Y page 39) and the notes on correct use of seat release it again.
belts (Y page 40). The seat belt is retracted and released.
If the center rear seat belt is being used, also
observe the information about the seat belt for
the center rear seat (Y page 41). Releasing seat belts
! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up.
Safety
Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be
trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism.
This could damage the door, the door trim
panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts
can no longer fulfill their protective function
and must be replaced. Visit a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
X Press the release button in the belt buckle,
hold the belt tongue firmly and guide the belt
back.
Basic illustration
Belt warning for the driver and front
X Adjust the seat (Y page 83).
passenger
The seat backrest must be in an almost
upright position. The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru-
X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt out- ment cluster is a reminder that all vehicle occu-
let. pants must wear their seat belts. It may light up
X Engage seat belt tongue ; in belt buckle :. continuously or flash. In addition, there may be
a warning tone.
X If necessary, pull up on the shoulder section
of the seat belt to tighten the belt across your Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt has
body. already been fastened, the 7 seat belt warn-
ing lamp lights up for six seconds each time the
The shoulder section of the seat belt must engine is started. If the front doors are closed
always be routed across the center of the shoul- and the driver's or front-passenger seat belt has
der. Adjust the belt outlet if necessary. not been fastened, the 7 seat belt warning
X To raise: slide the belt outlet up. lamp lights up again after the six seconds. As
The belt outlet will engage in various posi- soon as the driver's and front-passenger seat
tions. belts are fastened or a front door is opened
again, the 7 seat belt warning lamp goes out.
X To lower: hold belt outlet release = and slide
the belt outlet down. If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after the
engine is started, an additional warning tone will
X Let go of belt outlet release = in the desired
sound. The warning tone switches off after six
position and make sure that the belt outlet seconds or once the driver's seat belt is fas-
engages. tened.
All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph
equipped with a special seat belt retractor to (25 km/h) once and the driver's and front-
securely fasten child restraint systems in the passenger seat belts are not fastened, a warning
vehicle. Further information can be found under tone sounds. A warning tone also sounds with
"Special seat belt retractor" (Y page 51). increasing intensity for 60 seconds or until the
driver or front passenger have fastened their
Seat belt for the center rear seat seat belts.
If the driver or front passenger unfasten their
If the left-hand rear seat backrest is folded down seat belts during the journey, the seat belt warn-
and back up again, the rear center seat belt may ing is activated again.
lock. The seat belt can then not be pulled out.
Z
42 Occupant safety
Air bags door or side window. You may otherwise be in

the deployment area of the air bags.
Introduction RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in front
of the seat. Do not put your feet on the dash-
The installation point of an air bag can be rec- board, for example. Your feet may otherwise
ognized by the AIRBAG marking. be in the deployment area of the air bag.
An air bag complements the correctly fastened RFor this reason, always secure persons less
seat belt. It is no substitute for the seat belt. The than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint sys-
air bag provides additional protection in appli- tems. Up to this height, the seat belt cannot
cable accident situations.
Safety
be worn correctly.
Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. The If a child is traveling in your vehicle, also
different air bag systems function independ- observe the following notes:
ently from one another (Y page 49).
RAlways secure children under twelve years of
However, no system available today can com-
pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities. age and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable
child restraint systems.
It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injury
RChild restraint systems should be installed on
caused by an air bag due to the high speed at
which the air bag must be deployed. the rear seats.
ROnly secure a child in a rearward-facing child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat
Important safety notes when the front-passenger front air bag is
deactivated. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
G WARNING indicator lamp is permanently lit, the front-
If you do not sit in the correct seat position, passenger front air bag is deactivated
the air bag cannot protect as intended and (Y page 38).
could even cause additional injury when RAlways observe the instructions and safety
deployed. This poses an increased risk of notes on the "Occupant Classification System
injury or even fatal injury. (OCS)" (Y page 44) and on "Children in the
vehicle" (Y page 50) in addition to the child
To avoid hazardous situations, always make restraint system manufacturer's installation
sure that all of the vehicle's occupants: and operating instructions.
Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly, Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent
including pregnant women an air bag from functioning correctly. Before
starting your journey and to avoid risks resulting
Rare sitting correctly and maintain the great- from the speed of the air bag as it deploys, make
est possible distance to the air bags sure that:
Rfollow the following instructions Rthere are no people, animals or objects
Always make sure that there are no objects between the vehicle occupants and an air bag
between the air bag and the vehicle's occu- Rthere are no objects between the seat, door
pants. and B-pillar
Rthere are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers,
RAdjust the seats properly before beginning hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks
your journey. Always make sure that the seat Rno accessories, such as cup holders, are
is in an almost upright position. The center of attached to the vehicle within the deployment
the head restraint must support the head at area of an air bag, e.g. to doors, side windows,
about eye level. rear side trim or side walls
RMove the driver's and front-passenger seats Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are in
as far back as possible. The driver's seat posi- the pockets of your clothing. Store such
tion must allow the vehicle to be driven safely. objects in a suitable place
ROnly hold the steering wheel on the outside.
This allows the air bag to be fully deployed. G WARNING
RAlways lean against the backrest while driv- If you modify the air bag cover or affix objects
ing. Do not lean forward or lean against the such as stickers to it, the air bag can no longer
Occupant safety 43
function correctly. There is an increased risk The front-passenger front air bag will only
of injury. deploy if:
Rthe system, based on the OCS weight sensor
Never modify an air bag cover or affix objects
readings, detects that the front-passenger
to it. seat is occupied (Y page 44). The
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is
G WARNING not lit (Y page 45)
Sensors to control the air bags are located in Rthe restraint system control unit predicts a
the doors. Modifications or work not per- high accident severity
Safety
formed correctly to the doors or door panel-
ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the Driver's knee bag
function of the sensors being impaired. The air
bags might therefore not function properly
anymore. Consequently, the air bags cannot
protect vehicle occupants as they are
designed to do. There is an increased risk of
injury.
Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.
Always have work on the doors or door pan-
eling carried out at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Front air bags Driver's knee bag : deploys under the steering
column. The driver's knee bag is deployed
! Do not place heavy objects on the front- together with the front air bag.
passenger seat. This could cause the system The driver's knee bag offers additional thigh,
to identify the seat as being occupied. In the knee and lower leg protection for the occupant
event of an accident, the restraint systems on in the driver's seat.
the front-passenger side may be triggered
and have to be replaced. Side impact air bags
G WARNING
Unsuitable seat covers can obstruct or pre-
vent deployment of the air bags integrated
into the seats. Consequently, the air bags
cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are
designed to do. In addition, the operation of
the occupant classification system (OCS)
could be adversely affected. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
You should only use seat covers that have
Driver's air bag : deploys in front of the steer- been approved for the respective seat by
ing wheel. Front-passenger front air bag ;
deploys in front of and above the glove box. Mercedes-Benz.
When deployed, the front air bags offer addi-
tional head and thorax protection for the occu-
pants in the front seats.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
informs you about the status of the front-
passenger front air bag (Y page 38).
Z
44 Occupant safety
Window curtain air bags : are integrated into

the side of the roof frame and deployed in the
area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar.
When deployed, the window curtain air bag
enhances the level of protection for the head.
However, it does not protect the chest or arms.
If the restraint system control unit detects a side
impact, the window curtain air bag is deployed
on the side on which the impact occurs.
Safety
If the system determines that they can offer

additional protection to that provided by the
seat belt, a window curtain air bag may be
Front side impact air bags : and rear side deployed in other accident situations
impact air bags ; deploy next to the outer bol- (Y page 49).
ster of the seat backrest.
When deployed, the side impact air bag offers
additional thorax protection. It also offers addi- Occupant Classification System
tional pelvis protection for occupants in the (OCS)
front seats. However, it does not protect the:
RHead Introduction
RNeck The Occupant Classification System (OCS) cat-
RArms egorizes the person in the front-passenger seat.
If the restraint system control unit detects a side Depending on that result, the front-passenger
impact, the side impact air bag is deployed on front air bag is either enabled or deactivated.
the side on which the impact occurs. The system does not deactivate:
The side impact air bag on the front-passenger Rthe side impact air bag
side deploys under the following conditions: Rthe window curtain air bag
Rthe OCS system detects that the front- Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices
passenger seat is occupied or
Rthe seat belt buckle tongue is engaged in the
Requirements
belt buckle of the front-passenger seat
If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle, To be classified correctly, the front passenger
the side impact air bag on the front-passenger must sit:
side deploys if an appropriate accident situation Rwith the seat belt fastened correctly
occurs. In this case, deployment is independent
Rin an almost upright position with their back
of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied
or not. against the seat backrest
Rwith their feet resting on the floor, if possible
Window curtain air bags If the front passenger does not observe these
conditions, OCS may produce a false classifica-
tion, e.g. because the front passenger:
Rtransfers their weight by supporting them-
selves on a vehicle armrest
Rsits in such a way that their weight is raised
from the seat cushion
If it is absolutely necessary to install a child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat, be
sure to observe the correct positioning of the
child restraint system. Never place objects
under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. a
cushion. The entire base of the child restraint
system must always rest on the seat cushion of
Occupant safety 45
the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is
forward-facing child restraint system must lie as off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
flat as possible against the backrest of the front- lamp shows the status of the front-passenger
passenger seat. front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
The child restraint system must not touch the indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.
roof or be subjected to a load by the head If the status of the front-passenger front air bag
restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest changes while the vehicle is in motion, an air bag
and the head restraint position accordingly. display message appears in the instrument clus-
Only then can OCS be guaranteed to function ter (Y page 187). When the front-passenger
Safety
correctly. Always observe the child restraint sys- seat is occupied, always pay attention to the
tem manufacturer's installation and operating PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp. Be
instructions. aware of the status of the front-passenger front
air bag both before and during the journey.
Operation of Occupant Classification G WARNING
System (OCS) If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag is
disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of
an accident and cannot perform its intended
protective function. A person in the front-
passenger seat could then, for example, come
into contact with the vehicle's interior, espe-
cially if the person is sitting too close to the
dashboard. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
When the front-passenger seat is occupied,
always ensure that:
: PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp
; PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp Rthe classification of the person in the front-
passenger seat is correct and the front-
The indicator lamps inform you whether the
front-passenger front air bag is deactivated or passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-
enabled. bled in accordance with the person in the
X Press the Start/Stop button once or twice, or
front-passenger seat
turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved
ignition lock. back as far back as possible.
The system carries out self-diagnostics. Rthe person is seated correctly.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER Make sure, both before and during the jour-
AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simul-
ney, that the status of the front-passenger
taneously for approximately six seconds.
front air bag is correct.
The indicator lamps display the status of the
front-passenger front air bag.
G WARNING
RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 sec-
onds, subsequently both indicator lamps are If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child
off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): the restraint system on the front-passenger seat
front-passenger front air bag is able to deploy and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
in the event of an accident. lamp is off, the front-passenger front air bag
RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the front- can deploy in the event of an accident. The
passenger front air bag is deactivated. It will child could be struck by the air bag. This poses
then not be deployed in the event of an acci- an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
dent.
Z
46 Occupant safety
Make sure that the front-passenger front air remains lit. This indicates that the front-
bag has been deactivated. The PASSENGER passenger front air bag is deactivated.
RThe front-passenger seat is occupied by a
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
child of up to twelve months old, in a standard
NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR
on a seat protected by an ACTIVE FRONT AIR- BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the
BAG in front of it; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY system self-test and remains lit. This indi-
to the child can occur. cates that the front-passenger front air bag is
deactivated.
Safety
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp But even in the case of a twelve-month-old
stays off, do not install a rearward-facing child child, in a standard child restraint system, the
restraint system on the front-passenger seat. PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp can
You can find more information on OCS under go out after the system self-test. This indi-
"Problems with the Occupant Classification Sys- cates that the front-passenger front air bag is
tem" (Y page 48). activated. The result of the classification is
dependent on, among other factors, the child
G WARNING restraint system and the child's stature. It is
If you secure a child in a forward-facing child recommended that you install the child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat restraint system on a suitable rear seat.
and you position the front-passenger seat too RThe front-passenger seat is occupied by a
close to the dashboard, in the event of an person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or
small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
accident, the child could: indicator lamp lights up and remains lit after
Rcome into contact with the vehicle's inte- the system self-test depending on the result
rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi- of the classification or, alternatively, goes out.
cator lamp is lit, for example - If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is off, move the front-passenger seat
Rbe struck by the air bag if the PASSENGER
as far back as possible. Alternatively, a per-
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off son of smaller stature can sit on a rear seat.
This poses an increased risk of injury or even - If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
fatal injury. lamp is lit, a person of smaller stature
Always move the front-passenger seat as far should not use the front-passenger seat.
RThe front-passenger seat is occupied by an
back as possible and fully retract the seat
adult or a person of adult stature, the
cushion length. Always make sure that the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from goes out after the system self-test. This indi-
the vehicle belt sash guide to the shoulder cates that the front-passenger front air bag is
belt guide on the child restraint system. The activated.
shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to
and downwards from the vehicle belt sash observe the notes on "Children in the vehicle"
guide. If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt (Y page 50).
sash guide and the front-passenger seat When the Occupant Classification System
accordingly. Always observe the child (OCS) is malfunctioning, the red 6 restraint
system warning lamp on the instrument cluster
restraint system manufacturer's installation and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
instructions. lamp light up simultaneously. The front-
passenger front air bag is deactivated in this
If OCS determines that: case and does not deploy during an accident.
RThe front-passenger seat is unoccupied, the Have the Occupant Classification System (OCS)
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp checked and repaired immediately at a qualified
lights up after the system self-test and specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you use an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center for this purpose.
Occupant safety 47
If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or the board. This poses an increased risk of injury or
seat cushion are damaged, have the necessary even fatal injury.
repair work carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that When the front-passenger seat is occupied,
you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center always ensure that:
for this purpose.
Rthe classification of the person in the front-
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
passenger seat is correct and the front-
mends that you only use seat accessories that
have been approved by Mercedes-Benz. passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-
bled in accordance with the person in the
Safety
If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not
mean that the front-passenger front air bag will front-passenger seat
also deploy. The Occupant Classification Sys- Rthe person is seated properly with a cor-
tem (OCS) categorizes the occupant on the rectly fastened seatbelt
front-passenger seat. Depending on that result,
Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved
the front-passenger front air bag is either ena-
bled or deactivated. as far back as possible
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
System self-test lamp remains lit when it should not, the front-
passenger seat may not be used. Do not
G DANGER install a child restraint system on the front-
If both the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classifi-
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps do cation System (OCS) checked and repaired
not light up during the system self-test, the immediately at a qualified specialist work-
system is malfunctioning. The front- shop.
passenger front air bag might be triggered
unintentionally or might not be triggered at all G WARNING
in the event of an accident with high deceler- Objects between the seat surface and the
ation. This poses an increased risk of injury or child restraint system could affect OCS oper-
even fatal injury. ation. This could result in the front-passenger
In this case the front-passenger seat may not air bag not functioning as intended during an
be used. Do not install a child restraint system accident. This poses an increased risk of
on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occu- injury or even fatal injury.
pant Classification System (OCS) checked Do not place any objects between the seat
and repaired immediately at a qualified spe- surface and the child restraint system. The
cialist workshop. entire base of the child restraint system must
always rest on the seat cushion of the front-
G WARNING passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator facing child restraint system must, as far as
lamp remains lit after the system self-test, the possible, be resting on the backrest of the
front-passenger front air bag is disabled. It will front-passenger seat. Always comply with the
not be deployed in the event of an accident. In child restraint system manufacturer's instal-
this case, the front-passenger front air bag lation instructions.
cannot perform its intended protective func-
tion, e.g. when a person is seated in the front- After the system self-test, the PASSENGER AIR
passenger seat. BAG OFF or PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator
lamp displays the status of the front-passenger
That person could, for example, come into front air bag (Y page 45). If the front-passenger
contact with the vehicle's interior, especially front air bag is enabled, the PASSENGER AIR
if the person is sitting too close to the dash- BAG ON indicator lamp lights up for 60 seconds
and then goes out.
Z
48 Occupant safety
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is For more information about the OCS, see "Prob-
off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lems with the Occupant Classification System"
lamp shows the status of the front-passenger (Y page 48).
front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.
Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS)

Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 47).
Safety
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The PASSENGER AIR The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is incor-
BAG OFF indicator lamp rect.
lights up and remains lit, X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the person
even though the front- on the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 44).
passenger seat is occu-
X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the front-
pied by an adult or a per-
passenger seat may not be used.
son of a stature corre-
sponding to that of an X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-
adult. Benz Center.
The PASSENGER AIR OCS is malfunctioning.

BAG OFF indicator lamp X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the child
does not light up and/or seat.
does not stay on.
X Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests on
The front-passenger seat the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the
is: forward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as possible
Runoccupied against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. If necessary,
Roccupied by the adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.
weight of a child up to X Make sure that the seat cushion length is fully retracted.
twelve months old in a X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seat
child restraint system belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight using the front-passenger
seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and the child
restraint system being pulled too tightly.
X Check for correct installation of the child restraint system.
Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to the child
restraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraint accord-
ingly.
X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto the
seat.
X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/or
the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not install
a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. It is recom-
mended that you install the child restraint system on a suitable rear
seat.
X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center.
Occupant safety 49
Deployment of Emergency Tensioning Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning

Devices and air bags Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate material,
which may require special handling and regard
Important safety notes for the environment. National guidelines must
be observed during disposal. In California, see
G WARNING www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/
Perchlorate/index.cfm.
The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has
been deployed. There is a risk of injury.
Method of operation
Safety
Do not touch the air bag parts. Have a
deployed air bag replaced at a qualified spe- During the first stage of a collision, the restraint
cialist workshop as soon as possible. system control unit evaluates important physi-
cal data relating to vehicle deceleration or accel-
eration, such as:
G WARNING
Rduration
A deployed air bag no longer offers any pro- Rdirection
tection and cannot provide the intended pro-
Rintensity
tection in an accident. There is an increased
Based on the evaluation of this data, the
risk of injury. restraint system control unit triggers the Emer-
Have the vehicle towed to a qualified special- gency Tensioning Devices during a frontal or
ist workshop in order to have a deployed air rear collision.
bag replaced. An Emergency Tensioning Device can only be
triggered, if:
It is important for your safety and that of your Rthe ignition is switched on
passenger to have deployed air bags replaced
Rthe components of the restraint system are
and to have any malfunctioning air bags
repaired. This will help to make sure the air bags operational. You can find further information
continue to perform their protective function for under "Restraint system warning lamp"
the vehicle occupants in the event of a crash. (Y page 38)
Rthe seat belt buckle tongue has engaged in
G WARNING the belt buckle of the respective front seat
Emergency Tensioning Devices that have The Emergency Tensioning Devices in the rear
deployed pyrotechnically are no longer opera- compartment are triggered independently of the
tional and are unable to perform their inten- lock status of the seat belts.
ded protective function. This poses an If the restraint system control unit detects a
more severe accident, further components of
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
the restraint system are activated independ-
Have pyrotechnically triggered Emergency ently of each other in certain frontal collision
Tensioning Devices replaced immediately at a situations:
qualified specialist workshop. RFront air bags and driver's knee bag
RWindow curtain air bag, if the system deter-
If Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggered mines that deployment can offer additional
or air bags are deployed, you will hear a bang, protection to that provided by the seat belt
and some powder may also be released. The The front-passenger front air bag is activated or
6 restraint system warning lamp lights up. deactivated depending on the person on the
Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hear- front-passenger seat. The front-passenger front
ing. The powder that is released generally does air bag can only deploy in an accident if the
not constitute a health hazard, but it may cause PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off.
short-term breathing difficulties in people with Observe the information on the PASSENGER AIR
asthma or other respiratory problems. Provided BAG indicator lamps (Y page 38).
it is safe to do so, you should leave the vehicle Your vehicle has two-stage front air bags. In the
immediately or open the window in order to pre- first deployment stage, the front air bag is filled
vent breathing difficulties. with propellant gas. The front air bag is fully
Z
50 Children in the vehicle
deployed with the maximum amount of propel- independently of whether the front-
lant gas if a second deployment threshold is passenger seat is occupied
reached within a few milliseconds. REmergency Tensioning Devices, if the system
The activation threshold of the Emergency Ten- determines that deployment can offer addi-
sioning Devices and the air bags is determined tional protection in this situation
by evaluating the rate of vehicle deceleration or
acceleration which occurs at various points in i Not all air bags are deployed in an accident.
the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in The different air bag systems work independ-
nature. Deployment should take place in good ently of each other.
How the air bag system works is determined
Safety
time at the start of the collision.

The rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration by the severity of the accident detected,
and the direction of the force are essentially especially the vehicle deceleration or accel-
determined by: eration and the apparent type of accident:
RFrontal collision
Rthe distribution of forces during the collision
RSide impact
Rthe collision angle
Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehicle
Rthe characteristics of the object with which
the vehicle has collided Automatic measures after an acci-
Factors which can only be seen and measured
dent
after a collision has occurred do not play a deci- Immediately after an accident, the following
sive role in the deployment of an air bag. Nor do measures are implemented, depending on the
they provide an indication of air bag deploy- type and severity of the impact:
ment.
Rthe hazard warning lamps are activated
The vehicle can be deformed considerably, with-
Rthe emergency lighting is activated
out an air bag being deployed. This is the case if
only parts which are relatively easily deformed Rthe vehicle doors are unlocked
are affected and the rate of deceleration is not Rthe front side windows are lowered
high. Conversely, air bags may be deployed even Rthe engine is switched off and the fuel supply
though the vehicle suffers only minor deforma- is cut off
tion. This is the case if, for example, very rigid Rvehicles with mbrace: automatic emergency
vehicle parts such as longitudinal body mem- call
bers are hit, and sufficient deceleration occurs
as a result.
If the restraint system control unit detects a side
impact, the relevant restraint system compo- Children in the vehicle
nents are deployed independently of each other. Important safety notes
RSide impact air bags on the side where the
impact takes place, independently of the Accident statistics show that children secured
Emergency Tensioning Device and the use of in the rear seats are safer than children secured
the seat belt on the driver's seat and outer in the front-passenger seat. For this reason,
seats in the second row Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install
The side impact air bag on the front- a child restraint system on a rear seat. Children
passenger side deploys under the following are generally better protected there.
conditions: If a child younger than twelve years old and
- the OCS system detects that the front- under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the
passenger seat is occupied or vehicle:
- the seat belt buckle tongue is engaged in Ralways secure the child in a child restraint
the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
RWindow curtain air bag on the side of impact, The child restraint system must be appropri-
independently of the use of the seat belt and ate to the age, weight and size of the child.
Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety
notes in this section in addition to the child
Children in the vehicle 51
restraint system manufacturer's installation Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
instructions. (Y page 39) and the notes on correct use of seat
Ralways observe the instructions and safety belts (Y page 40).
notes on the "Occupant classification system A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
(OCS)". (Y page 44) proper seat belt positioning for children over
40 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height where a
G WARNING three-point seat belt can be properly fastened
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi- without a booster seat.
cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
Safety
Rrelease the parking brake.
Special seatbelt retractor
Rshift the automatic transmission out of the
parking position P. G WARNING
Rstart the engine. If the seat belt is released while driving, the
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip- child restraint system will no longer be
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of secured properly. The special seat belt retrac-
an accident and injury. tor is disabled and the inertia real draws in a
portion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannot
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
be immediately refastened. There is an
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten-
G WARNING tion to road and traffic conditions. Reactivate
the special seat belt retractor and secure the
If persons, particularly children are subjected
child restraint system properly.
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even All seat belts in the vehicle, except the driver's
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the seat belt, are equipped with a special seat belt
vehicle. retractor. When activated, the special seat belt
retractor ensures that the seat belt cannot
G WARNING slacken once the child seat is secured.
If the child restraint system is subjected to Installing a child restraint system:
direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil- X Make sure you observe the child restraint
dren may burn themselves on these parts, system manufacturer's installation instruc-
particularly on the metal parts of the child tions.
X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt out-
restraint system. There is a risk of injury.
let.
If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with X Engage seat belt tongue in belt buckle.
you, always ensure that the child restraint
system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro- Activating the special seat belt retractor:
tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia
restraint system has been exposed to direct reel retract it again.
sunlight, let it cool down before securing the While the seat belt is retracting, you should
hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat belt
child in it. Never leave children unattended in
retractor is enabled.
the vehicle.
X Push the child restraint system down so that
Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have the seat belt is tight and does not loosen.
their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting
properly. Particular attention must be paid to
children.
Z
Removing the child restraint system and deac- restraint system could be thrown about, strik-
tivating the special seat belt retractor: ing vehicle occupants. There is an increased
X Make sure you observe the child restraint risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
system manufacturer's installation instruc-
tions. Always install child restraint systems prop-
X Press the release button of the seat belt
erly, even if they are not being used. Make
buckle and guide the seat belt tongue back sure that you observe the child restraint sys-
towards the belt sash guide. tem manufacturer's installation instructions.
The special seat belt retractor is deactivated.
Safety
You will find further information on stowing

objects, luggage or loads under "Loading guide-
lines" (Y page 221).
Child restraint system
G WARNING
The use of seat belts and child restraint systems
is required by law in: Child restraint systems or their securing sys-
tems which have been damaged or subjected
Rall 50 states
to a load in an accident can no longer protect
Rthe U.S. territories
as intended. The child cannot then be
Rthe District of Columbia
restrained in the event of an accident, heavy
Rall Canadian provinces
braking or sudden changes of direction. There
If you install a rearward-facing child restraint is an increased risk of injury, possibly even
system on the center rear seat, the rear arm rest
must be folded back as far as possible. fatal.
You can obtain further information about the Replace child restraint systems which have
correct child restraint system from any author- been damaged or subjected to a load in an
ized Mercedes-Benz Center. accident as soon as possible. Have the secur-
ing systems on the child restraint system
G WARNING
checked at a qualified specialist workshop,
If the child restraint system is installed incor- before you install a child restraint system
rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect as again.
intended. The child cannot then be restrained
in the event of an accident, heavy braking or The securing systems of child restraint systems
sudden changes of direction. There is an are:
increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Rthe seat belt system
Make sure that you observe the child restraint Rthe LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings
system manufacturer's installation instruc- Rthe Top Tether anchorages
tions and the notes on use. Please ensure, If it is absolutely necessary to carry a child on
that the base of the child restraint system is the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the
always resting completely on the seat cush- information on the "Occupant Classification
ion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under System (OCS)" (Y page 44). There you will also
or behind the child restraint system. Only use find information on deactivating the front-
passenger front air bag.
child restraint systems with the original cover
All child restraint systems must meet the fol-
designed for them. Only replace damaged lowing standards:
covers with genuine covers.
RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 225
G WARNING
RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
If the child restraint system is installed incor- 213 and 210.2
rectly or is not secured, it can come loose in Confirmation that the child restraint system cor-
the event of an accident, heavy braking or a responds to the standards can be found on an
sudden change in direction. The child instruction label on the child restraint system.
This confirmation can also be found in the instal-

lation instructions that are included with the
child restraint system.
Observe the warning labels in the vehicle inte-
rior and on the child restraint system.
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat secur-

ing system
Safety
G WARNING
For LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint sys-
X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
tems in which the child is secured using the system on both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing
safety belt integrated in the child restraint rings :.
system, the maximum permissible weight of
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) is a standardized securing
the child and child restraint system together system for specially designed child restraint
is 73 lbs (33 kg). systems on the rear seats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX)
If the child and the child restraint system securing rings for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
together weigh more than 73 lbs (33 kg), the restraint systems are installed on the left and
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system right of the rear seats.
with integrated safety belt no longer offers Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may also
be used and can be installed using the vehicle's
sufficient protection. The LATCH-type (ISO- seat belt system. Install the child seat according
FIX) child seat securing system may be over- to the manufacturer's instructions.
loaded, and the child may not be restrained in
an accident, for example. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Top Tether
If the child and the child restraint system
together weigh more than 73 lbs (33 kg), use Introduction
only a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint sys- Top Tether provides an additional connection
tem in which the child is also secured with the between the child restraint system secured with
vehicle seat belt. Also secure the child a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) system and the vehicle.
restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if This helps reduce the risk of injury even further.
If the child restraint system is equipped with a
available. Top Tether belt, this should always be used.
Regularly check that the permissible gross
weight of the child together with the child Important safety notes
restraint system is still maintained.
Always comply with the manufacturer's instal-
G WARNING
lation and operating instructions for the child If the rear seat backrests are not locked, they
restraint system used. could fold forwards in the event of an acci-
Before every trip, make sure that the LATCH- dent, heavy braking or sudden changes of
type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engaged direction. As a result, child restraint systems
correctly in both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing cannot perform their intended protective
rings function. Rear seat backrests that are not
! When installing the child restraint system, locked can also cause additional injuries, e.g.
make sure that the seat belt for the middle in the event of an accident. This poses an
seat does not get trapped. The seat belt could increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
otherwise be damaged.
Z
Always lock rear seat backrests after instal- cover ; if cargo compartment cover ; is
ling a Top Tether belt. Observe the lock veri- installed
RTop Tether belt B is routed between seat
fication indicator. Adjust the rear seat backr-
backrest = and the cargo net if the cargo
ests so that they are in an upright position. net is installed
X Swing back seat backrest = until it engages.
If the rear backrest is not engaged and locked,
the red lock verification indicator will be visible The red lock verification indicator is no longer
(Y page 225). visible.
X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
Safety
Top Tether anchorages system with Top Tether. Always comply with
the child restraint system manufacturer's
installation instructions when doing so.
X Tension Top Tether belt B. Always comply
with the child restraint system manufactur-
er's installation instructions when doing so.
X Move head restraint : back down again
slightly if necessary (Y page 86). Make sure
that you do not interfere with the correct rout-
ing of Top Tether belt B.
Child restraint system on the front-

passenger seat
General notes
Accident statistics show that children secured
in the rear seats are safer than children secured
in the front-passenger seat. For this reason,
Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install
the child restraint system on a rear seat.
If it is absolutely necessary to install a child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat,
always observe the instructions and safety
notes on the "Occupant Classification System
The Top Tether anchorages are located on the (OCS)" (Y page 44).
rear side of the seat backrests. You can thus avoid the risks that could arise as
a result of:
X Move head restraint : up.
X Release seat backrest = and fold it forward Ran incorrectly categorized person in the front-
(Y page 224). passenger seat
X Route Top Tether belt B under head Rthe unintentional deactivation of the front-
restraint : between the two head restraint passenger front air bag
bars. Rthe unsuitable positioning of the child
X Hook Top Tether hook A of Top Tether belt restraint system, e.g. too close to the dash-
B into Top Tether anchorage ?. board
Make sure that:
Rearward-facing child restraint system
RTop Tether hook A is hooked into Top
Tether anchorage ? as shown If it is absolutely necessary to install a rearward-
RTop Tether belt B is not twisted facing child restraint system on the front-
RTop Tether belt B is routed between seat passenger seat, always make sure that the
backrest = and cargo compartment front-passenger front air bag is deactivated.
Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is permanently lit (Y page 38) is the front- the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never
passenger front air bag deactivated. leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Always observe the child restraint system man-
ufacturer's installation and operating instruc- Override feature for:
tions.
Rthe rear doors (Y page 56)
Rthe rear side windows (Y page 56)
Forward-facing child restraint system
If it is absolutely necessary to install a forward- G WARNING
Safety
facing child restraint system on the front- If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
passenger seat, always move the front- cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
passenger seat as far back as possible. Fully
retract the seat cushion length. The entire base Rrelease the parking brake.
of the child restraint system must always rest on Rshift the automatic transmission out of the
the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. parking position P.
The backrest of the child restraint system must
Rstart the engine.
lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the
front-passenger seat. The child restraint system In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
must not touch the roof or be subjected to a load ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the an accident and injury.
seat backrest and the head restraint position
accordingly. Always make sure that the shoul- When leaving the vehicle, always take the
der belt strap is correctly routed from the vehi- SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
cle belt outlet to the shoulder belt guide on the leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap
must be routed forward and down from the vehi- G WARNING
cle belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the vehicle
belt outlet and the front-passenger seat accord- If persons, particularly children are subjected
ingly. to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
Always observe the child restraint system man- cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
ufacturer's installation and operating instruc- fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
tions. vehicle.
G WARNING
Child-proof locks If the child restraint system is subjected to
Important safety notes direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-
dren may burn themselves on these parts,
G WARNING particularly on the metal parts of the child
If children are traveling in the vehicle, they restraint system. There is a risk of injury.
could: If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with
Ropen doors, thus endangering other people you, always ensure that the child restraint
or road users system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-
tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child
Rexit the vehicle and be caught by oncoming
restraint system has been exposed to direct
traffic
sunlight, let it cool down before securing the
Roperate vehicle equipment and become child in it. Never leave children unattended in
trapped the vehicle.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Always activate the child-proof locks and
override feature if children are traveling in the
vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take
Z
56 Driving safety systems
Child-proof locks for the rear doors Pets in the vehicle
G WARNING
If you leave animals unattended or unsecured
in the vehicle, they could press buttons or
switches, for example.
As a result, they could:
Safety
Ractivate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for example
Ractivate or deactivate systems, thereby
endangering other road users
You secure each door individually with the child- Unsecured animals could also be flung around
proof locks on the rear doors. A door secured the vehicle in the event of an accident or sud-
with a child-proof lock cannot be opened from den steering or braking, thereby injuring vehi-
inside the vehicle. When the vehicle is unlocked,
the door can be opened from the outside. cle occupants. There is a risk of an accident
and injury.
X To activate: press the child-proof lock lever
up in the direction of arrow :. Never leave animals unattended in the vehi-
X Make sure that the child-proof locks are work- cle. Always secure animals properly during
ing properly. the journey, e.g. use a suitable animal trans-
X To deactivate: press the child-proof lock port box.
lever down in the direction of arrow ;.
Override feature for the rear side win- Driving safety systems
dows
Overview of driving safety systems
In this section, you will find information about
the following driving safety systems:
RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
(Y page 57)
RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 57)
RActive Brake Assist (Y page 58)
RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
(Y page 60)
REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)
(Y page 62)
X To activate/deactivate: press button :. RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 62)
If indicator lamp ; is lit, operation of the rear RSTEER CONTROL (Y page 62)
side windows is disabled. Operation is only
possible using the switches in the driver's
door. If indicator lamp ; is off, operation is Important safety notes
possible using the switches in the rear com-
partment. If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are
inattentive, the driving safety systems can nei-
ther reduce the risk of an accident nor override
the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are
merely aids designed to assist driving.
Driving safety systems 57
You are responsible for maintaining the distance on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 206) and dis-
to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for play messages which may be shown in the
braking in good time, and for staying in lane. instrument cluster (Y page 179).
Always adapt your driving style to suit the pre-
vailing road and weather conditions and main- Braking
tain a safe distance from the vehicle in front.
Drive carefully. X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the
The driving safety systems described only work brake pedal vigorously until the braking sit-
as effectively as possible when there is ade- uation is over.
Safety
quate contact between the tires and the road X To make a full brake application: depress
surface. Please pay special attention to the the brake pedal with full force.
notes on tires, recommended minimum tire
tread depths, etc. (Y page 270). If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a
pulsing in the brake pedal.
In wintry driving conditions, always use winter
tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication
Only in this way will the driving safety systems of hazardous road conditions, and functions as a
described in this section work as effectively as reminder to take extra care while driving.
possible.
BAS (Brake Assist System)
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) General information
General information BAS operates in emergency braking situations.
ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS
the wheels do not lock when you brake. This automatically boosts the braking force, thus
allows you to continue steering the vehicle when shortening the stopping distance.
braking.
The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrument Important safety notes
cluster lights up when the ignition is switched i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
on. It goes out when the engine is running. tion (Y page 56).
ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph
(8 km/h), regardless of road-surface conditions. G WARNING
ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when you If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance
only brake gently.
in an emergency braking situation is
increased. There is a risk of an accident.
Important safety notes
In an emergency braking situation, depress
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents
tion (Y page 56). the wheels from locking.
G WARNING
If ABS is malfunctioning, the wheels could Braking
lock when braking. The steerability and brak- X Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until
ing characteristics would be severely affec- the emergency braking situation is over.
ted. There is an increased danger of skidding ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
and accidents. The brakes will function as usual once you
Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme- release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.
diately at a qualified specialist workshop.
When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,

including driving safety systems, will also
become inoperative. Observe the information
Z
Active Brake Assist You can activate or deactivate Active Brake

Assist (Y page 174) in the on-board computer.
General information When deactivated, the distance warning func-
tion and the autonomous braking function are
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- also deactivated.
tion (Y page 56). Vehicles with a black and white multifunc-
Active Brake Assist consists of a distance warn- tion display: when Active Brake Assist is acti-
ing function with an autonomous braking func- vated, the Ä symbol appears in the status
tion and situation-dependent braking assis- overview of the multifunction display.
Safety
tance Vehicles with a color multifunction display:

Active Brake Assist can help you to minimize the when Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the
risk of a collision with the vehicle traveling in æ symbol appears in the assistance graphic
front or reduce the effects of such a collision. display of the multifunction display.
If Active Brake Assist detects that there is a risk
of collision, you will be warned visually and Distance warning function
acoustically. If you do not react to the visual and
audible collision warning, autonomous braking General information
can be initiated in critical situations. If you apply The distance warning function can help you to
the brake yourself in a critical situation, Active minimize the risk of a front-end collision with a
Brake Assist supports you with situation- vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a
dependent braking assistance. collision. If the distance warning function
detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will
Important safety notes be warned visually and acoustically.
Detection of hazardous situations can be par- Important safety notes
ticularly impaired if:
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else tion for driving safety systems (Y page 56).
covering the sensors
Rthere is snow or heavy rain G WARNING
Rthere is interference by other radar sources The distance warning function does not react:
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for exam- Rto people or animals
ple in parking garages
Rto oncoming vehicles
Ra narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a
motorbike Rto crossing traffic
Ra vehicle is traveling in front on a different line Rwhen cornering

Ryou are driving a new vehicle or servicing on The distance warning function may not give
the Active Brake Assist system has just been warnings in all critical situations. There is a
carried out risk of an accident.
Observe the important safety notes in the
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
"Breaking-in notes" section (Y page 113).
uation and be ready to brake.
Following damage to the front end of the vehicle,
have the configuration and operation of the Always adapt your speed to suit the prevailing
radar sensor checked at a qualified specialist road and traffic conditions.
workshop. This also applies to collisions at low
speeds where no visible damage to the front of G WARNING
the vehicle is apparent.
The distance warning function cannot always
clearly identify objects and complex traffic
Activating/deactivating
situations.
Active Brake Assist is active after every ignition
cycle.
In such cases, the distance warning function Vehicles without Distance Pilot DISTRONIC:
may: the autonomous braking function is available in
the following speed ranges:
Rgive an unnecessary warning R4 - 65 mph (7 - 105 km/h) for moving objects
Rnot give a warning R4 - 31 mph (7 - 50 km/h) for stationary
There is a risk of an accident. objects
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- Vehicles with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC: the
uation and do not rely solely on the distance autonomous braking function is available in the
following speed ranges:
Safety
warning function.
R4 - 124 mph (7 - 200 km/h) for moving
Function objects
R4 - 31 mph (7 - 50 km/h) for stationary
Starting at a speed of approximately 4 mph
(7 km/h), the distance warning function warns objects
you if you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An Due to the nature of the system, particularly
intermittent warning tone will then sound, and complicated but non-critical driving conditions
the · distance warning lamp will light up in may also cause the Autonomous Braking Func-
the instrument cluster. tion to intervene.
X Brake immediately in order to increase the
distance from the vehicle in front. Situation-dependent braking assis-
or tance
X Take evasive action, provided it is safe to do
so. General information
Due to the nature of the system, particularly i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
complicated but non-critical driving conditions tion (Y page 56).
may also cause the system to display a warning. With the help of the radar sensor system, Active
With the help of the radar sensor system, the Brake Assist can detect obstacles that are in the
distance warning function can detect obstacles path of your vehicle for an extended period of
that are in the path of your vehicle for an exten- time.
ded period of time. If Active Brake Assist detects a risk of collision
Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph with the vehicle in front, it calculates the brake
(70 km/h), the distance warning function can pressure necessary to avoid a collision. If you
also react to stationary obstacles, such as stop- apply the brakes forcefully, situation-dependent
ped or parked vehicles. braking assistance adapts to the situation and
automatically increases the brake pressure to a
Autonomous braking function degree appropriate to the traffic situation.
Situation-dependent braking assistance pro-
If the driver does not react to the distance warn- vides braking assistance in hazardous situations
ing signal in a critical situation, Active Brake at speeds above 4 mph (7 km/h). It uses radar
Assist can assist the driver with the autonomous sensor technology to assess the traffic situa-
braking function. tion.
The autonomous braking function: Situation-dependent braking assistance is capa-
Rgives the driver more time to react to critical ble of reacting to moving objects that have
driving situations already been detected as such at least once
Rcan help the driver to avoid an accident or
over the period of observation, up to vehicle
speeds of around 155 mph (250 km/h).
Rreduces the effects of an accident
Situation-dependent braking assistance can
also detect stationary objects, up to vehicle
speeds of around 44 mph (70 km/h).
X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the
emergency braking situation is over.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
Z
The brakes will work normally again if: ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Ryou release the brake pedal.
Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision. General notes
Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehi- i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
cle. tion (Y page 56).
Situation-dependent braking assistance is then
deactivated. ESP® monitors driving stability and traction, i.e.
power transmission between the tires and the
Important safety notes road surface.
Safety
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating from
tion for driving safety systems (Y page 56). the direction desired by the driver, one or more
wheels are braked to stabilize the vehicle. The
G WARNING engine output is also modified to keep the vehi-
Active Brake Assist does not react: cle on the desired course within physical limits.
ESP® assists the driver when pulling away on
Rto persons, bicycles, motorcycles or ani- wet or slippery roads. ESP® can also stabilize
mals the vehicle during braking.
Rto approaching vehicles
Rto cross traffic ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
Ron bends i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
As a result, Active Brake Assist cannot inter- tion (Y page 56).
vene in all critical situations. There is a risk of ETS traction control is part of ESP®. On vehicles
an accident. with 4MATIC, 4ETS is part of ESP®.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi-
uation and be prepared to brake. vidually if they spin. This enables you to pull
away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for
example if the road surface is slippery on one
G WARNING side. In addition, more drive torque is transfer-
Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly red to the wheel or wheels with traction.
identify objects and complex traffic situa- Traction control remains active, even if you
tions. deactivate ESP®.
In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist might:
Rintervene unnecessarily
Rnot intervene i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 56).
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- G WARNING
uation and be ready to brake. Terminate the If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to
intervention in a non-critical driving situation. stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driv-
ing safety systems are deactivated. This
Due to the nature of the system, complex but increases the risk of skidding and an accident.
non-critical driving conditions may also cause
Active Brake Assist to intervene. Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a
Even if Active Brake Assist is not available due to qualified specialist workshop.
a malfunction in the radar sensor system, the
brake system is still available with full brake If the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up
boosting effect and BAS. continuously, ESP® is deactivated.
If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp and the å
warning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not
available due to a malfunction.
Observe the information on warning lamps Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-
(Y page 207) and display messages which may
be shown in the instrument cluster bed in the following.
(Y page 179).
The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting
Only use wheels with the recommended tire action for better traction on loose surfaces.
sizes. Only then will ESP® function properly.
It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the follow-
ing situations:
Characteristics of ESP® Rwhen using snow chains
Safety
General information Rin deep snow
Ron sand or gravel
If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp goes out before
beginning the journey, ESP® is automatically i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations
active. described above no longer apply. ESP® will
If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if
flashes in the instrument cluster. the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to
spin.
If ESP® intervenes:
X Do not deactivate ESP® under any circum-
! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an
stances. extended period with ESP® deactivated. You
could otherwise damage the drivetrain.
X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as
necessary when pulling away. Deactivating/activating ESP®
X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing
You can deactivate or activate ESP® via the on-
road and weather conditions.
board computer (Y page 173).
ECO start/stop function ESP® deactivated:
The ECO start/stop function switches the The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instru-
engine off automatically when the vehicle stops ment cluster lights up.
moving. The engine starts automatically when ESP® activated:
the driver wants to pull away again. ESP® The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instru-
remains in its previously selected status. Exam- ment cluster goes out.
ple: if ESP® was deactivated before the engine
was switched off, ESP® remains deactivated Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated
when the engine is switched on again. If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels
start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the
Deactivating/activating ESP® instrument cluster flashes. In such situations,
ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.
Important safety notes If you deactivate ESP®:
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- RESP® no longer improves driving stability.
tion (Y page 56).
REngine torque is no longer limited and the
You can select between the following states of drive wheels are able to spin.
ESP®: RTraction control is still activated.
RESP® is activated. RActive Brake Assist is no longer available; nor
RESP® is deactivated. is it activated if you brake firmly with assis-
tance from ESP®.
G WARNING RSTEER CONTROL is no longer active.
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta- RESP® still provides support when you brake
bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk firmly.
of skidding and an accident.
Z
62 Protection against theft
ESP® trailer stabilization You should therefore adapt your driving style
to the different handling characteristics. Have
General information the brake system checked at a qualified spe-
If your vehicle/trailer combination begins to cialist workshop.
swerve, ESP® assists you in this situation. ESP®
slows the vehicle down by braking and limiting Please observe the information on warning and
the engine output until the vehicle/trailer com- indicator lamps (Y page 206)
bination has stabilized. (Y page 206) as well as on display messages
(Y page 181).
Safety

G WARNING
If road and weather conditions are poor, ADAPTIVE BRAKE
trailer stabilization will not be able to prevent ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety and
the vehicle/trailer combination from swerv- offers increased braking comfort. In addition to
ing. Trailers with a high center of gravity can the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also has
tip over before ESP® can detect this. There is the HOLD function (Y page 146) and hill start
a risk of an accident. assist (Y page 117).
Always adapt your driving style to the prevail-
ing road and weather conditions.
STEER CONTROL
If your vehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailer com- General information
bination) begins to lurch, you can only stabilize
the vehicle/trailer combination by depressing STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a
the brake firmly. noticeable steering force to the steering wheel
ESP® trailer stabilization is active above speeds in the direction required for vehicle stabilization.
of about 65 km/h. This steering assistance is provided in particular
ESP® trailer stabilization does not work if ESP® if:
is deactivated or disabled because of a malfunc- Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are on a
tion. wet or slippery road surface when you brake
Rthe vehicle begins to skid
EBD (electronic brake force distribu- Important safety notes

tion)
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
General information tion (Y page 56).
EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure No steering assistance is provided from STEER
on the rear wheels to improve driving stability CONTROL, if:
while braking. RESP® is malfunctioning
Rthe steering is malfunctioning
Important safety notes If ESP® is malfunctioning, you will be assisted
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- further by the electrical power steering.
tion (Y page 56).
G WARNING Protection against theft
If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can
lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the Immobilizer
risk of skidding and an accident. The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from
being started without the correct SmartKey.
Protection against theft 63
X To activate with the SmartKey: remove the X To turn the alarm off with the SmartKey:
SmartKey from the ignition lock. press the % or & button on the Smart-
X To activate with KEYLESS-GO start-func- Key.
tion or KEYLESS-GO: switch the ignition off The alarm is stopped.
and open the driver's door. or
X To deactivate: switch on the ignition. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function
or KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop but-
ton from the ignition lock (Y page 114).
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone
can start the engine if a valid SmartKey has been X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
Safety
left inside the vehicle. The alarm is stopped.
i The immobilizer is always deactivated when X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:
you start the engine. grasp the outside door handle. The SmartKey
must be outside the vehicle.
In the event that the engine cannot be started The alarm is stopped.
(yet the vehicle's battery is charged), the sys-
tem is not operational. Contact an authorized or
Mercedes-Benz Center or call X Press the Start/Stop button on the dash-
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or board. The SmartKey must be inside the vehi-
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). cle.
The alarm is stopped.
The alarm is not switched off, even if you close
ATA (anti-theft alarm system) the open door that triggered it, for example.
X To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or

KEYLESS-GO.
Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm system
is armed after approximately 15 seconds.
X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with the Smart-
Key or KEYLESS-GO.
or
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the

alarm system is armed and you open:
Ra door
Rthe vehicle with the mechanical key
Rthe tailgate
Rthe hood
Z
64 SmartKey
SmartKey detected, e.g. when starting the engine using

the Start/Stop button.
G WARNING SmartKey functions
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
Opening and closing
Rrelease the parking brake

Rshift the automatic transmission out of park
position P
Rstart the engine
: & To lock the vehicle
Never leave children or animals unattended in
; % To unlock the vehicle
the vehicle.
X To unlock centrally: press the % button.
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. This If you do not open the vehicle within approx-
imately 40 seconds of unlocking:
also applies to mobile phones if the "Digital
Rthe vehicle is locked again
Car Key in smartphone" function is activated
via the Mercedes me connect web app. Ranti-theft protection is reactivated
X To lock: press the & button.

G WARNING The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:
If you attach heavy or large objects to the
Rthe doors
SmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten-
Rthe tailgate
tionally turned in the ignition lock. This could
Rthe fuel filler flap
cause the engine to be switched off. There is a
risk of an accident. The turn signals flash once when unlocking and
three times when locking.
Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the When the locator lighting is activated via the
SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings before multimedia system, it lights up when it is dark
inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock. after the vehicle is unlocked with the remote
control; see Digital Operator's Manual.
! Keep the SmartKey away from strong mag- You can also set an audible signal to confirm
netic fields. Otherwise, the remote control that the vehicle has been locked. The audible
function could be affected. signal can be activated and deactivated using
Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicin- the on-board computer (Y page 176).
ity of powerful electrical installations.
Do not keep the SmartKey:
Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone
KEYLESS-GO
or another SmartKey General notes
Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil
Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case Bear in mind that the engine can be started by
any of the vehicle occupants if there is a Smart-
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function: do Key in the vehicle.
not keep the SmartKey in the cargo compart-
ment. Otherwise, the SmartKey may not be
SmartKey 65
Locking and unlocking

You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using
KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry the
SmartKey with you. You can combine the func-
tions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a conven-
tional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by using
KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using the
& button on the SmartKey.
The driver's door and the door at which the han-
dle is used, must both be closed. The SmartKey
must be outside the vehicle. When locking or
unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distance
Opening and closing

between the SmartKey and the corresponding X To unlock the tailgate: pull tailgate han-
door handle must not be greater than three feet dle :.
(one meter).
A check which periodically establishes a radio Deactivating and activating
connection between the vehicle and the Smart-
Key determines whether a valid SmartKey is in If you do not intend to use the vehicle for a lon-
the vehicle. This occurs, for example: ger period of time, you can deactivate KEYLESS-
GO. The SmartKey will then use very little power,
Rwhen starting the engine thereby conserving battery power. For the pur-
Rwhile driving poses of activation/deactivation, the vehicle
Rwhen the external door handles are touched must not be nearby.
Rduring convenience closing X To deactivate: press the & button on the
SmartKey twice in rapid succession.
The indicator light on the SmartKey flashes
twice briefly then one long flash, then KEY-
LESS-GO is deactivated (Y page 67).
X To activate: press any button on the Smart-
Key.
or
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated features
are available again.
X To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner sur- KEYLESS-GO start function
face of the door handle.
X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface : General notes
or ;. Bear in mind that the engine can be started by
Make sure that you do not touch the inner any of the vehicle occupants if there is a Smart-
surface of the door handle. Key in the vehicle.
X Convenience closing feature: touch
recessed sensor surface ; for an extended
period.
Further information on the convenience clos-
ing feature (Y page 76).
Z
66 SmartKey
Changing the settings of the locking There are several ways to turn off the alarm:
system X To deactivate the alarm with the key: press
the % or & button on the key.
You can change the settings of the locking sys-
tem. This means that only the driver's door and or
the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the vehicle X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
is unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travel or
on your own. X To deactivate the alarm with KEYLESS-GO:
X To change the setting: press and hold the press the Start/Stop button in the ignition
% and & buttons simultaneously for lock. The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.
approximately six seconds until the battery or
indicator lamp flashes twice (Y page 67). X Lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-
Opening and closing
If the setting of the locking system is changed GO. The SmartKey must be outside the vehi-
within the signal range of the vehicle, pressing cle.
the & or % button: If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanical
Rlocks or key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked auto-
Runlocks the vehicle matically.
The SmartKey now functions as follows: X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the
SmartKey into the ignition lock.
X To unlock: press the % button once.
X To unlock centrally: press the % button
twice. Removing the mechanical key
X To lock centrally: press the & button.
The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as fol-

lows:
X To unlock the driver's door: touch the inner
surface of the door handle on the driver's
door.
X To unlock centrally: touch the inner surface
of the door handle on the front-passenger
door or the rear door.
X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor
surface on one of the door handles.
X To restore the factory settings: press and X Push release catch : in the direction of the
hold the % and & buttons simultane- arrow and at the same time remove mechan-
ously for approximately six seconds until the ical key ; from the SmartKey.
battery check lamp flashes twice For further information about:
(Y page 67). RUnlocking the driver's door (Y page 71)
RLocking the vehicle (Y page 71)
Mechanical key Inserting the mechanical key

General notes X Push mechanical key ; completely into the
SmartKey until it engages and release
If the vehicle can no longer be locked or catch : is back in its basic position.
unlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO,
use the mechanical key.
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door or the trunk lid, the anti-
theft alarm system will be triggered (Y page 63).
SmartKey 67
SmartKey battery Replacing the battery
Important safety notes You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.

X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey
G WARNING (Y page 66).
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-
ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in
severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal
injury.
Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If
a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention
Opening and closing

immediately.
The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate

material, which may require special handling
and regard for the environment. National guide-
lines must be observed during disposal. In Cal-
ifornia, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/ X Press mechanical key ; into the opening in
HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm. the SmartKey in the direction of the arrow
until battery tray cover : opens. When doing
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the so, do not hold cover : shut.
battery replaced at a qualified specialist work- X Remove battery tray cover :.
shop.
Checking the battery
X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your

palm until battery = falls out.
X Insert the new battery with the positive ter-
X Press the & or % button. minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to
The battery is working properly if battery do so.
check lamp : lights up briefly.
X Make sure that the surface of the battery is
The battery is discharged if battery check free of lint, grease and other contaminants.
lamp : does not light up briefly.
X Insert the front tabs of battery tray cover :
X Change the battery (Y page 67).
and then press to close it.
i If the SmartKey battery is checked within X Insert mechanical key into the SmartKey
the signal reception range of the vehicle, (Y page 66).
pressing the & or % button: X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons on
Rlocks or the vehicle.
Runlocks the vehicle
i You can get a battery at any qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Z
68 SmartKey
Problems with the SmartKey

You cannot lock or The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
unlock the vehicle using X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start function:
the SmartKey. try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control func-
tion of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's
door handle from close range and press the % or & button.
If this does not work:
X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 67) and replace it if necessary
Opening and closing
(Y page 67).
X Unlock (Y page 71) or lock (Y page 71) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.

X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start function:
try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control func-
tion of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's
door handle from close range and press the % or & button.
mechanical key.
The SmartKey is faulty.

mechanical key.
X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
You can no longer lock or The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
unlock the vehicle using X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 67) and replace it if necessary
KEYLESS-GO. (Y page 67).
mechanical key.
mechanical key.
SmartKey 69

KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning.
X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the
SmartKey.
X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote con-
trol function:
mechanical key.
Opening and closing

X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
The engine cannot be The on-board voltage is too low.
started using the Smart- X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior
Key. lighting, and try to start the engine again.
X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 260).
or
X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 260).
or
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine cannot be The vehicle is locked.

started using the Start/ X Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again.
Stop button. The Smart-
Key is in the vehicle. The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 67) and replace it if necessary
(Y page 67).
X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
You have lost a Smart- X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.
Key. X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
You have lost the X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
mechanical key. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
Z
70 Doors
Doors X To unlock and open a front door: pull door

handle ;.
Important safety notes If the door is locked, locking knob : pops up.
The door is unlocked and opens.
G WARNING X To unlock a rear door: pull up locking
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, knob :.
they could: The door is unlocked and can be opened.
X To open a rear door: pull door handle ;.
You can open a door from inside the vehicle
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in even if it has been locked. You can only open the
motion if, for example, they: rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not
secured by the child-proof locks (Y page 56).
Opening and closing

Rshift the automatic transmission out of park
If the vehicle has previously been locked with
the SmartKey from the outside, opening a door
position P from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm
Rstart the engine system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 63).
Centrally locking and unlocking the
the vehicle.
vehicle from the inside
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. This You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle from
also applies to mobile phones if the "Digital the inside. This can be useful if you wish to lock
the vehicle before pulling away, for example.
via the Mercedes me connect web app.
You should preferably place luggage or loads in

the cargo compartment. Observe the loading
guidelines (Y page 221).
Unlocking and opening doors from

the inside
X To unlock: press button :.

X To lock: press button ;.
If all the doors and the tailgate are closed, the
vehicle locks.
Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not be locked
or unlocked.
You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from the
inside if the vehicle has been locked with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.
You can open a door from inside the vehicle
even if it has been locked. You can open the rear
doors from inside the vehicle unless they are
secured by the child-proof lock (Y page 56).
If the vehicle has previously been locked with
the SmartKey from the outside, opening a door
Doors 71
from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm Unlocking the driver's door (mechan-
system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 63). ical key)
If a locked door is opened from the inside, the
previous unlock status of the vehicle will be If the vehicle can no longer be locked or
taken into consideration if: unlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO,
use the mechanical key.
Rthe vehicle was locked using the locking but-
ton for the central locking, or If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm sys-
Rif the vehicle was locked automatically
tem will be triggered. Switch off the alarm
The vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previ- (Y page 63).
ously been fully unlocked. If only the driver's
X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey
door had been previously unlocked, only the
(Y page 66).
door which has been opened from the inside is
Opening and closing

unlocked. X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of the
driver's door as far as it will go.
Automatic locking feature
X Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise

as far as it will go to position 1.
The door is unlocked.
X To deactivate: press and hold button : for
X Turn the mechanical key back and remove it.
approximately five seconds until a tone
sounds. X Insert mechanical key into the SmartKey
X To activate: press and hold button ; for
(Y page 66).
approximately five seconds until a tone
sounds.
If you press one of the two buttons and do not Locking the vehicle (mechanical key)
hear a tone, the relevant setting has already If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the
been selected. SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechanical
The vehicle is locked automatically when the key.
ignition is switched on and the wheels are turn- X Open the driver's door.
ing.
X Close the front-passenger door, the rear
You could therefore lock yourself out if: doors and the tailgate.
Rthe vehicle is being pushed X Press the locking button on the driver’s door
Rthe vehicle is being towed (Y page 70).
Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer X Check whether the locking knobs on the
You can also switch the automatic locking func- front-passenger door and the rear doors are
tion on and off using the on-board computer still visible. Press down the locking knobs by
(Y page 176). hand, if necessary.
X Close the driver's door.
Z
72 Cargo compartment
X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey Always store objects so that they cannot be
(Y page 66). flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of the
loads against slipping or tipping before the
driver's door as far as it will go.
journey.
! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear

when opened. Therefore, make sure that
there is sufficient clearance above and behind
the tailgate.
The opening dimensions of the tailgate can be
found in the "Vehicle data" section
Opening and closing
(Y page 300).
You should preferably place luggage or loads in
the cargo compartment. Observe the loading
guidelines (Y page 221).
Do not leave the SmartKey in the cargo com-
X Turn the mechanical key clockwise as far as it partment. You could otherwise lock yourself
will go to position 1. out.
X Turn the mechanical key back and remove it. The tailgate can be:
X Make sure that the doors and the tailgate are
Ropened and closed manually from outside
locked.
Rreleased with the emergency release from the
X Insert mechanical key into the SmartKey
inside
(Y page 66).
i If you lock the vehicle as described above,
the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-theft Tailgate obstruction detection with
alarm system is not armed. reversing feature
On vehicles with an EASY-PACK tailgate, the
tailgate is equipped with automatic obstacle
Cargo compartment recognition with a reversing feature. If a solid
Important safety notes object blocks or restricts the tailgate when auto-
matically opening or closing, this procedure is
G WARNING stopped. If the tailgate is stopped during the
closing process, the tailgate automatically
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust opens again slightly. The automatic obstruction
gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate detection with reversing feature is only an aid. It
is open when the engine is running, particu- is not a substitute for your attentiveness when
larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes opening and closing the tailgate.
could enter the passenger compartment. G WARNING
There is a risk of poisoning.
The reversing feature does not respond:
Turn off the engine before opening the tail-
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers
gate. Never drive with the tailgate open.
Rover the last 1/3 in (8 mm) of the closing
G WARNING movement
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or The reversing feature cannot prevent some-
not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip one from becoming trapped in these situa-
over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle tions in particular. There is a risk of injury.
occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu- Make sure that no body parts are in close
larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud- proximity during the closing procedure.
den change in direction.
Cargo compartment 73
If somebody becomes trapped: Opening/closing automatically from

Rpress the F button on the SmartKey, or
inside
Rpull or press the remote operating switch Important safety notes
on the driver's door or
Rpress the closing button/STOP button in
G WARNING
the tailgate or Parts of the body could become trapped dur-
Rpull the handle on the tailgate
ing automatic closing of the tailgate. More-
over, people, e.g. children, may be standing in
the closing area or may enter the closing area
during the closing process. There is a risk of
Opening and closing manually
Opening and closing

injury.
Opening Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
closing area during the closing process.
Use one of the following options to stop the
closing process:
Rpress the F button on the SmartKey.
Rpull or press the remote operating switch
on the driver's door.
Rpress the closing or locking button on the
tailgate.
Rpull the handle on the tailgate
X Press the % button on the SmartKey. G WARNING

X Pull handle :. Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
X Raise the tailgate. gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate
is open when the engine is running, particu-
Closing larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes
could enter the passenger compartment.
Turn off the engine before opening the tail-

there is sufficient clearance above and behind
the tailgate.
(Y page 300).
X Pull the tailgate down using handle :.
X Allow the tailgate to drop into the lock. Opening and closing automatically
X If necessary, lock the vehicle with the & You can open the tailgate from the driver's seat
button on the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO. when the vehicle is stationary and unlocked.
It is only possible to close the tailgate from the
driver's seat on vehicles with the EASY-PACK
tailgate.
Z
74 Cargo compartment
X To open: pull remote operating switch for the Tailgate emergency release
tailgate : until the tailgate opens.
X To close: turn the SmartKey to position 1 or General notes
2 in the ignition lock (Y page 114).
X Press and hold the remote operating switch
for tailgate : until the tailgate is completely there is sufficient clearance above and behind
closed. the tailgate.
Limiting the opening angle of the tail- (Y page 300).
gate If the tailgate can no longer be unlocked:
Opening and closing
General notes Rusing the SmartKey, or

Rusing the remote operating switch in the door
! Make sure there is sufficient clearance to control panel:
open the tailgate fully when setting the open- Use the emergency release on the inside of the
ing angle. The tailgate could otherwise be tailgate.
damaged. Ideally, set the opening angle out-
side. You can reach the emergency release via the
cargo compartment.
You can limit the opening angle of the tailgate.
This could be useful, for example, if there is
insufficient space above the tailgate. It is pos- Opening
sible to limit the tailgate in the top half of its
opening range.
To open the tailgate fully, pull the handle on the
outside of the tailgate again after it has stopped
automatically. This does not delete the stored
position.
Activating
X To open the tailgate: pull the handle on the
tailgate.
X To stop the opening process at the
desired position: X Remove cargo compartment cover
Rpress the closing button in the tailgate, or (Y page 228).
Rpull the handle on the outside of the tailgate X Fold the rear seat backrest forwards
again, or (Y page 225).
Rpress the tailgate button on the SmartKey. X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey
X To store the position: press and hold the (Y page 66).
closing button on the tailgate until you hear a X Insert mechanical key ; into opening : in
short tone. the trim and push it in.
The opening angle limiter is activated. The X Open the tailgate.
tailgate will now stop in the stored position
X Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey
when opening.
(Y page 66).
Deactivating
X Press and hold the closing button on the tail- Emergency release button
gate until two short tones sound.
You can open the trunk lid from inside the vehi-
cle with the emergency release button.
Side windows 75
G WARNING
If children operate the side windows they
could become trapped, particularly if they are
left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.
Activate the override feature for the rear side
windows. When leaving the vehicle, always
take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehi-
cle. Never leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle.
Opening and closing

X Press emergency release button : briefly.
The trunk lid unlocks and opens. Side window reversing feature
The trunk lid can be unlocked and opened with The side windows are equipped with an auto-
the trunk lid emergency release when the vehi- matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks
cle is stationary or while driving. or restricts a side window from traveling
The trunk lid emergency release does not open upwards during the automatic closing process,
the trunk lid if the battery is disconnected or the side window opens again automatically. Dur-
discharged. ing the manual closing process, the side window
Trunk lid emergency release light: only opens again automatically after the corre-
sponding switch is released. The automatic
REmergency release button : flashes for
reversing feature is only an aid and is no substi-
30 minutes after the trunk lid is opened. tute for your attention when closing a side win-
REmergency release button : flashes for dow.
60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed.
G WARNING
The reversing feature does not react:
Side windows Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-
Important safety notes gers
Rwhile resetting
G WARNING
This means that the reversing feature cannot
While opening the side windows, body parts prevent someone being trapped in these sit-
could become trapped between the side win- uations. There is a risk of injury.
dow and the door frame as the side window
Make sure that no body parts are in close
moves. There is a risk of injury.
proximity during the closing procedure. If
Make sure that nobody touches the side win- someone becomes trapped, press the switch
dow during the opening procedure. If some- to open the side window again.
body becomes trapped, release the switch or
pull the switch to close the side window again.
Opening and closing the side win-
G WARNING dows
While closing the side windows, body parts in
the closing area could become trapped. There The switches for all side windows are located on
the driver's door. There is also a switch on each
is a risk of injury. door for the corresponding side window.
When closing make sure that no parts of the The switches on the driver's door take prece-
body are in the closing area. If somebody dence.
becomes trapped, release the switch or press
the switch to open the side window again.
Z
76 Side windows
The SmartKey can also be used to carry out the

following functions simultaneously:
Runlock the vehicle
Ropen the side windows
Ropen the panorama roof with power tilt/slid-
ing panel and the roller sunblind
The convenience opening feature can only be
operated using the SmartKey.
The "convenience opening" feature is also avail-
able when the vehicle is unlocked.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-
Opening and closing
: Front left GO start function: for the following opera-

; Front right tions, point the tip of the SmartKey at the
= Rear right handle on the driver's door. The SmartKey
? Rear left must be close to the driver's door handle.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-
ignition lock (Y page 114). GO start function: the SmartKey must be in
X To open manually: press and hold the cor- close proximity to the vehicle.
responding switch. X Press and hold the % button until the side
X To open fully: press the switch beyond the windows and the panorama sunroof are in the
pressure point and release it. desired position.
Automatic operation is started. If the roller sunblind of the panorama roof
X To close manually: pull the corresponding
with power tilt/sliding panel is closed, the
roller sunblind is opened first.
switch and hold it.
X Press and hold the % button once more
X To close fully: pull the switch beyond the
until the panorama roof with power tilt/slid-
pressure point and release it. ing panel reaches the desired position.
Automatic operation is started.
X To interrupt convenience opening: release
X To interrupt automatic operation: press/
the % button.
pull the corresponding switch again.
i If you press/pull the switch beyond the
point of resistance, automatic operation is
started in the corresponding direction. You Convenience closing feature
can stop automatic operation by pressing/
pulling the switch again. Important safety notes
i You can continue to operate the side win- G WARNING
dows after you switch off the engine or When the convenience closing feature is oper-
remove the SmartKey. This function remains ating, parts of the body could become trapped
active for five minutes or until the driver's or
front-passenger door is opened. in the closing area of the side window and the
sliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
i When the override feature for the side win- Observe the complete closing procedure
dows is activated (Y page 56), the side win-
dows cannot be operated from the rear. when the convenience closing feature is oper-
ating. Make sure that no body parts are in
close proximity during the closing procedure.
Convenience opening
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO
start function: you can ventilate the vehicle
before you start driving.
Side windows 77
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO

start function: you can do the following at the
same time:
Rlock the vehicle
Rclose the side windows
Rclose the panorama roof with power tilt/slid-
ing panel
On vehicles with a panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel, you can then close the roller
sunblind.
i Notes on the automatic reversing feature
Opening and closing

for: XTouch recessed sensor surface : on the
door handle until the side windows and the
Rthe side window (Y page 75)
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
Rthe panorama roof with power tilt/sliding are fully closed.
panel (Y page 79)
i Make sure you only touch recessed sensor
Rthe roller sunblind (Y page 81)
surface :.
X Make sure that all the side windows are
Using the SmartKey closed.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS- X Make sure that all the side windows and the
GO start function: for the following opera- panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
tions, point the tip of the SmartKey at the are closed.
handle on the driver's door. The SmartKey On vehicles with a panorama roof with power
must be close to the driver's door handle. tilt/sliding panel:
i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS- X Touch recessed sensor surface : on the
GO start function: the SmartKey must be in
door handle again until the roller sunblind of
close proximity to the vehicle. the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
X Press and hold the & button until the side panel closes.
windows and the panorama sliding sunroof
are fully closed.
X To interrupt convenience closing: release
recessed sensor surface : on the door han-
X Make sure that all the side windows and the
dle.
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
are closed.
On vehicles with a panorama roof with power Resetting the side windows
tilt/sliding panel:
X Press and hold the & button again until the If a side window can no longer be closed fully,
roller sunblind of the panorama sliding sun- you must reset it.
roof closes. X Close all the doors.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
X To interrupt convenience closing: release
the & button. ignition lock (Y page 114).
X Pull the corresponding switch on the door
control panel until the side window is com-
Using KEYLESS-GO pletely closed (Y page 75).
The driver's door and the door at which the han- X Hold the switch for an additional second.
dle is used, must both be closed. The SmartKey
must be outside the vehicle. The gap between
the SmartKey and the corresponding door han-
dle should not be greater than 3 ft (1 m).
Z
78 Side windows
If the side window opens again slightly:

X Immediately pull the corresponding switch on
the door control panel until the side window is
completely closed (Y page 75).
X Hold the switch for an additional second.
X If the respective side window remains closed
after the button is released, then it has been
set correctly. If this is not the case, repeat the
steps above.
Opening and closing
Problems with the side windows

G WARNING
If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window
closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the
body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or
even fatal injury.
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release
the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.

A side window cannot be X Remove the objects.
closed because it is X Close the side window.
blocked by objects, e.g.
leaves in the window
guide.
A side window cannot be If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again
closed and you cannot slightly:
see the cause. X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch
again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed with increased force.
If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again
slightly:
X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch
again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed without the automatic reversing feature.
The side windows cannot The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
be opened or closed X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 67) and replace it if necessary
using the convenience (Y page 67).
opening/closing fea-
ture.
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 79
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding Sliding sunroof reversing feature

panel In the following section, the term "sliding sun-
Important safety notes roof" refers to the panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel.
In the following section, the term "sliding sun- The sliding sunroof is equipped with an auto-
roof" refers to the panorama roof with power matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks
tilt/sliding panel. or restricts the sliding sunroof during the closing
process, the sliding sunroof opens again auto-
G WARNING matically. However, the automatic reversing
While opening and closing the sliding sunroof, feature is only an aid and does not relieve you of
body parts in close proximity could become the responsibility of paying attention when clos-
Opening and closing

trapped. There is a risk of injury. ing the sliding sunroof.
Make sure that no body parts are in close G WARNING
proximity during the opening and closing pro- The reversing feature does not react:
cedures.
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-
If somebody becomes trapped:
gers
Rrelease the switch immediately, or Rover the last 1/6 in (4 mm) of the closing
Rduring automatic operation, push the movement
switch briefly in any direction Rduring resetting
The opening or closing procedure will be stop- Rwhen closing the sliding sunroof again man-
ped. ually immediately after automatic reversing
G WARNING
prevent someone being trapped in these sit-
If children operate the sliding sunroof they uations. There is a risk of injury.
could become trapped, particularly if they are
Make sure that no body parts are in close
left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.
proximity during the closing procedure.
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Rrelease the switch immediately, or
Rpress the switch in any direction during the
! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free of automatic closing process
snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions may
occur. The closing process is stopped.
Do not allow anything to protrude from the
sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could be
damaged.
! The weather can change abruptly. It could
start to rain or snow. Make sure that the slid-
ing sunroof is closed when you leave the vehi-
cle. The vehicle electronics can be damaged if
water enters the vehicle interior.
i Resonance noises can occur in addition to
the usual airflow noises when the sliding sun-
roof is open. They are caused by minor pres-
sure fluctuations in the vehicle interior.
Change the position of the sliding sunroof or
open a side window slightly to reduce or elim-
inate these noises.
Z
80 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
Operating the panorama roof with When the SmartKey is in position g in the igni-
power tilt/sliding panel tion lock or is removed, the sliding sunroof
closes automatically:
Opening and closing Rif it starts to rain.
Rat extreme outside temperatures.
Rafter six hours.
Rif there is a malfunction in the power supply.
The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
remains raised at the rear in order to allow ven-
tilation of the vehicle interior.
If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
Opening and closing
panel is obstructed while being closed by the

rain-closing feature, it opens again slightly. The
rain-closing feature is then deactivated.
The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
does not close if:
: To raise
Rit is raised at the rear.
; To open
Rit is blocked.
= To close/lower
Rno rain is falling on the area of the windshield
The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel being monitored by the rain sensor. If the
can only be operated when the roller sunblind is vehicle, for example, is under a bridge or in a
open. carport, the field of the sensor may be cov-
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ered.
ignition lock (Y page 114).
X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corre-
sponding direction. Operating the roller sunblind for the
If you press/pull the 3 switch beyond the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
point of resistance, automatic operation is star- panel
ted in the corresponding direction. You can stop
automatic operation by pressing/pulling the Important safety notes
switch again.
You can continue to operate the sliding sunroof G WARNING
after switching off the engine or removing the Parts of the body could become trapped
SmartKey from the ignition lock. This function between the roller sunblind and frame or slid-
remains active for five minutes or until you open
ing sunroof during automatic opening or clos-
a front door.
ing. There is a risk of injury.
The sliding sunroof cannot be opened if a roof
carrier is installed. In order to allow ventilation When opening or closing, make sure that no
of the vehicle interior, you can raise the sliding body parts are in the sweep of the roller sun-
sunroof. blind.
If contact is made with a roof carrier approved If somebody becomes trapped:
by Mercedes-Benz, the sliding sunroof lowers
slightly but remains raised at the rear. Rrelease the switch immediately, or
Rduring automatic operation, push the
Rain-closing feature switch briefly in any direction
The rain-closing feature is only available for vehi- The opening or closing procedure will be stop-
cles with a rain sensor. ped.
The roller sunblind shields the vehicle interior

from sunlight. The roller sunblind can only be
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 81
opened and closed when the panorama roof X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
with power tilt/sliding panel is closed. ignition lock (Y page 114).
X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corre-
Roller sunblind reversing feature sponding direction.
The roller sunblind is equipped with an auto- If you press/pull the 3 switch beyond the
matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks point of resistance, automatic operation is star-
or restricts the roller sunblind during the closing ted in the corresponding direction. You can stop
process, the roller sunblind opens again auto- automatic operation by pressing/pulling the
matically. The automatic reversing feature is switch again.
only an aid and is not a substitute for your atten- After opening the panorama roof with power
tiveness when closing the roller sunblind. tilt/sliding panel, the roller sunblind automati-
cally closes slightly. This reduces drafts in the
Opening and closing

G WARNING vehicle interior.
The reversing feature does not react:
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-
Resetting the panorama roof with
gers
power tilt/sliding panel or the roller
sunblind
Rwhen closing the roller sunblind again man-
ually immediately after automatic reversal
prevent someone being trapped in these sit-
uations. There is a risk of injury.
When closing the roller sunblind, make sure
that no body parts are in the sweep area.
Rrelease the switch immediately, or
Rpress the switch in any direction during the
automatic closing process
Reset the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
The closing process is stopped. panel or the roller sunblind if the panorama roof
with power tilt/sliding panel or the roller sun-
Opening and closing blind does not move smoothly.
X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point of
resistance in the direction of arrow : until
the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel is fully closed.
X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an additional
second.
X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point of
resistance in the direction of arrow : until
the roller sunblind is fully closed.
X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an additional
: Opens second.
; Opens X Make sure that the panorama roof with power
= Closes tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblind can
be fully opened and closed again.
X If this is not the case, repeat the steps above.
Z
82 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
Problems with the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

G WARNING
If you do not reset the sliding sunroof after a malfunction or voltage supply interruption, then the
backing up function will malfunction or not work. The sliding sunroof closes with increased or
maximum force. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses
an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
In such or similar situations always make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
Always reset the sliding sunroof after a malfunction or voltage supply interruption.
! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as a result of a malfunction, contact a
Opening and closing
qualified specialist workshop.

The panorama roof with If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is obstructed during
power tilt/sliding panel closing and reopens again slightly:
cannot be closed and X Immediately after it blocks, pull the 3 switch down again to the
you cannot see the point of resistance until the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
cause. panel is closed.
The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed with more
force.
If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is obstructed again
during closing and reopens again slightly:
X Immediately after it blocks, pull the 3 switch down again to the
point of resistance until the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel is closed.
The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed without
the automatic reversing feature.
The panorama sliding The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.

sunroof cannot be X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 67) and replace it if necessary
opened or closed using (Y page 67).
the convenience open-
ing/closing feature.
Seats 83
Correct driver's seat position Ryou should have a good overview of traffic
conditions
Rthe seat belt is pulled snugly against the body
G WARNING and is routed across the center of your shoul-
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do der and across your hips in the pelvic area
the following while driving:
i Further related subjects:
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, RAdjusting the seats manually
steering wheel or mirrors (Y page 84)
Rfasten the seat belt RAdjusting the seats electrically
There is a risk of an accident. (Y page 85)
RAdjusting the steering wheel manually
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
(Y page 88)
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
RFastening the seat belt correctly
before starting the engine. (Y page 41)
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

RAdjusting the rear-view mirror and exterior
mirrors (Y page 89)
RVehicles with a memory function: saving
the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror
settings using the memory function
(Y page 91)
Seats
G WARNING
Children could become trapped if they adjust
the seats, particularly when unattended.
There is a risk of injury.
Observe the following when adjusting steering SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
wheel :, seat belt ; and driver's seat =: leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag as
The seats can still be adjusted when there is no
possible SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position
Ryour thighs are slightly supported by the seat G WARNING
cushion When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle
Ryour legs are not entirely stretched and you occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the
can depress the pedals properly seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.
Rthe back of your head is supported at eye level
Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one
by the center of the head restraint
has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent
G WARNING
Ryou can move your legs freely
Ryou can see all the displays in the instrument
If the driver's seat is not engaged, it could
cluster clearly move forwards as far as the next catch during
movement such as braking or abrupt changes
of direction. As a result, you would be pushed
Z
84 Seats
against your seat belt by the unsecured driv- ! To prevent damage to the seats and the seat
er's seat. heating, observe the following notes:
This could cause you to lose control of the RDo not spill liquids onto the seats. Dry the
vehicle. The seat belt cannot protect as inten- seats as soon as possible if liquid does get
spilled on the seats.
ded and could result in additional injury.
RIf the seat covers are damp or wet, do not
There is a risk of an accident and injury. switch on the seat heating. Also, do not use
Before every journey, make sure that the driv- the seat heating to dry the seats.
er's seat is fully engaged. RClean the seat covers as recommended;
see the "Interior care" section.
Observe the safety notes on "Air bags" RDo not transport heavy loads on the seats.
(Y page 42) and "Children in the vehicle" Do not place pointed objects on the seat
(Y page 50). cushions such as knives, nails or tools.
Where possible, use the seats only for car-
G WARNING
rying passengers.
If the driver's seat is not engaged, it could RWhen operating the seat heating, do not
move unexpectedly while the vehicle is in cover the seats with insulating materials,
motion. This could cause you to lose control of e.g. blankets, coats, bags, protective cov-
the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. ers, child seats or booster seats.
RWhen the seat heating is switched on, the
Always make sure that the driver's seat is
seat surface can be damaged as a result of
engaged before starting the vehicle. objects being placed on the seats; for
example, seat cushions, child seats and
G WARNING protective covers not approved by
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do Mercedes-Benz.
the following while driving: ! Make sure that there are no objects in the
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, footwell under or behind the seats when mov-
ing the seats back. There is a risk that the
steering wheel or mirrors
seats and/or the objects could be damaged.
Rfasten the seat belt
i Further related subjects:
RCargo compartment enlargement (folding
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- down the rear seats) (Y page 224)
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine.
Adjusting the seats manually
G WARNING
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or Vehicles without the seating comfort
other vehicle occupants could be trapped and package
thereby injured. Children in particular could
accidentally press the electrical seat adjust-
ment buttons and become trapped. There is a
risk of injury.
While moving the seats, make sure that your
hands or other body parts do not get under the
lever assembly of the seat adjustment sys-
tem.
Seats 85
Seat fore-and-aft adjustment: Seat cushion length:

X Lift handle : and slide the seat forwards or X Lift handle ; and slide the front part of the
backwards. seat cushion forwards or backwards.
X Release lever : again. X Release lever ; again.
Make sure that you hear the seat engage in The seat cushion engages.
position.
Backrest angle:
X Relieve the pressure on the backrest. Adjusting the seats electrically
X Turn handwheel = forwards or backwards.
Seat height:
X Pull handle ; upwards or push it down
repeatedly until the seat has reached the
desired height.

Vehicles with the seating comfort pack-
age
: Seat height
; Seat cushion angle
= Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
? Backrest angle
i You can store the seat settings using the
memory function (Y page 91).
Adjusting the head restraints

Seat fore-and-aft adjustment: Important safety notes
X Lift handle : and slide the seat forwards or
rearwards. G WARNING
X Release lever : again. You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
Make sure that you hear the seat engage in the following while driving:
position.
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
Backrest angle:
X Relieve the pressure on the backrest.
X Turn handwheel A forwards or backwards.
Seat height: Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
X Pull handle ? upwards or push it down ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
repeatedly until the seat has reached the before starting the engine.
desired height.
Seat cushion angle: G WARNING
X Adjust the angle so that your thighs are lightly If the head restraints are not installed or not
supported. adjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-
X Turn handwheel = forwards or backwards. tection as intended. There is an increased risk
Z
86 Seats
of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the With this function you can adjust the distance
event of an accident or when braking. between the head restraint and the back of the
seat occupant's head.
Always drive with the head restraints instal-
X To move forwards: pull the head restraint
led. Before driving off, make sure for every
forwards in the direction of the arrow until it
vehicle occupant that the center of the head engages.
restraint supports the back of the head at There are several notches.
about eye level. X To move backwards: press and hold release
button : and push the head restraint back-
Using the fore-and-aft adjustment, adjust the wards.
head restraint so that it is as close as possible to X When the head restraint is in the desired posi-
your head.
tion, release the button and make sure that
the head restraint is engaged in position.
Adjusting the head restraints manually
Adjusting the head restraint height Rear seat head restraints

Adjusting the rear seat head restraint
height
X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the

desired position.
X To lower: press release catch : in the direc-
tion of the arrow and push the head restraint
X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the
down to the desired position. desired position.
X To lower: press release catch : and push
Adjusting the fore/aft position of the the head restraint down until it is in the
head restraint desired position.
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support

You can adjust the contour of the front seat
backrests individually to provide optimum sup-
port for your back.
Seats 87
ple, seat cushions, child seats and protective

covers not approved by Mercedes-Benz.
When the seat heating is switched on, ensure
that there are no objects on the seats.
: Raises the backrest contour

; Softens the backrest contour
= Lowers the backrest contour

? Hardens the backrest contour
The three red indicator lamps in the button indi-
cate the heating level you have selected.
Switching the seat heating on/off The system automatically switches down from
level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight
Switching on/off minutes.
G WARNING The system automatically switches down from
level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can minutes.
cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to The system automatically switches off approx-
become very hot. The health of persons with imately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1.
limited temperature sensitivity or a limited X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ability to react to high temperatures may be ignition lock (Y page 114).
affected or they may even suffer burn-like X To switch on: press button : repeatedly
injuries. There is a risk of injury. until the desired heating level is set.
Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on X To switch off: press button : repeatedly
repeatedly. until all the indicator lamps go out.
! When the seat heating is switched on, the i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat
seat surface can be damaged as a result of heating may switch off.
objects being placed on the seats; for exam-
Problems with the seat heating

The seat heating has The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consum-
switched off prematurely ers are switched on.
or cannot be switched X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the
on. rear window defroster or interior lighting.
Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating will switch
back on automatically.
Z
88 Mirrors
Steering wheel
G WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving:
There is a risk of an accident. : Release lever
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- ; Adjusts the steering wheel height
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt = Adjusts the steering wheel position (fore-
before starting the engine. and-aft adjustment)

X Push release lever : down completely.
G WARNING The steering column is unlocked.
Children could injure themselves if they X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired posi-
adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of tion.
injury. X Push release lever : up completely.
The steering column is locked.
X Check if the steering column is locked. When
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. This doing so, try to push the steering wheel up or
also applies to mobile phones if the "Digital down or try to move it in the fore-and-aft
Car Key in smartphone" function is activated direction.
via the Mercedes me connect web app. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
Mirrors
Adjusting the steering wheel Rear-view mirror
G WARNING
If the steering wheel is unlocked while the
vehicle is in motion, it could change position
unexpectedly. This could cause you to lose
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident.
Before starting off, make sure the steering
wheel is locked. Never unlock the steering
wheel while the vehicle is in motion.
X Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever : for-

wards or back.
Mirrors 89
Exterior mirrors mirror using button = as long as the indicator

lamp is lit.
Adjusting the exterior mirrors X Press button = up, down, or to the right or
left until you have adjusted the exterior mirror
G WARNING to the correct position. You should have a
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do good overview of traffic conditions.
the following while driving: The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger field
of vision.
After the engine has been started, the exterior
steering wheel or mirrors mirrors are automatically heated at low outside
Rfasten the seat belt temperatures. Heating takes a maximum of ten
There is a risk of an accident. minutes.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- i You can also heat up the exterior mirrors
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt manually by switching on the rear window

before starting the engine. defroster.
G WARNING Folding the exterior mirrors in or out

electrically
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side reduces the size of the image. Visible
objects are actually closer than they appear.
This means that you could misjudge the dis-
tance from road users traveling behind, e.g.
when changing lane. There is a risk of an acci-
dent.
For this reason, always make sure of the
actual distance from the road users traveling
behind by glancing over your shoulder.

X Briefly press :.
Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.
i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are
always folded out fully while driving. They
could otherwise vibrate.
i If you are driving faster than 30 mph
(47 km/h), you can no longer fold in the exte-
rior mirrors.
Resetting the exterior mirrors
X Exterior mirror on the front-passenger side:
press button ;. If the battery has been disconnected or com-
Exterior mirror on the driver's side: press but- pletely discharged, the exterior mirrors must be
ton :. reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise not
The indicator lamp in the corresponding but- fold in when you select the "Fold in mirrors when
ton lights up in red. locking" function in the on-board computer
The indicator lamp goes out again after some (Y page 176).
time. You can adjust the selected exterior
Z
90 Mirrors
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni- If you come into contact with the electrolyte,
tion lock (Y page 114). observe the following:
X Briefly press :.
RRinse off the electrolyte from your skin
immediately with water.
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out
RImmediately rinse the electrolyte out of
automatically
your eyes thoroughly with clean water.
If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function is RIf the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately
activated in the on-board computer
(Y page 176): rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not
Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as induce vomiting.
soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside. RIf electrolyte comes into contact with your
Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automati- skin or hair or is swallowed, seek medical
cally as soon as you unlock the vehicle and attention immediately.
then open the driver's or front-passenger
RImmediately change out of clothing which

door.
has come into contact with electrolyte.
i If the exterior mirrors have been folded in RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical
manually, they do not fold out.
attention immediately.
Exterior mirror pushed out of position The "Automatic anti-glare mirrors" function is
only available if the vehicle is equipped with the
If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of
"Mirrors package".
position, proceed as follows:
The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror on
X Vehicles without electrically folding exte- the driver's side automatically go into anti-glare
rior mirrors: move the exterior mirror into mode if:
the correct position manually.
Rthe ignition is switched on and
X Vehicles with electrically folding exterior
Rincident light from headlamps strikes the sen-
mirrors: press and hold mirror-folding button
(Y page 89) until you hear the mirror click into sor in the rear-view mirror
place. The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if
The mirror housing is engaged again and you reverse gear is engaged or if the interior lighting
can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual is switched on.
(Y page 89).
Parking position for the exterior mir-

Automatic anti-glare mirrors ror on the front-passenger side
G WARNING Setting and storing the parking position

Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an auto- You can set the front-passenger side exterior
matic anti-glare mirror breaks. The electrolyte mirror such that you can see the rear wheel on
is harmful and causes irritation. It must not that side as soon as you engage reverse gear.
come into contact with your skin, eyes, res- You can store this position.
piratory organs or clothing or be swallowed.
Memory function 91
Memory function
G WARNING
If you use the memory function on the driver's
side while driving, you could lose control of
the vehicle as a result of the adjustments
being made. There is a risk of an accident.
Only use the memory function on the driver's
side when the vehicle is stationary.
: Button for the driver's side exterior mirror
; Button for the front-passenger side exterior G WARNING
mirror

When the memory function adjusts the seat,
= Button for the exterior mirror setting
you and other vehicle occupants – particularly
? Memory button M
children – could become trapped. There is a
X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. risk of injury.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- While the memory function is making adjust-
tion lock or start the engine (Y page 114).
ments, make sure that no one has any body
X Press button ;.
parts in the sweep of the seat. If somebody
X Engage reverse gear.
becomes trapped, immediately release the
side moves to the default parking position. memory function position button. The adjust-
X Use button = to adjust the exterior mirror to ment process is stopped.
a position that allows you to see the rear
wheel and the curb. G WARNING
The parking position is stored. Children could become trapped if they acti-
i If you shift the transmission to another posi- vate the memory function, particularly when
tion, the front-passenger side exterior mirror unattended. There is a risk of injury.
returns to the driving position.
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. This
Calling up a stored parking position set-
also applies to mobile phones if the "Digital
ting
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- via the Mercedes me connect web app. Never
tion lock (Y page 114). leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
X Adjust the front-passenger side exterior mir-
ror using the corresponding button The memory function can be used at any time,
(Y page 89). e.g. even when the SmartKey is not in the igni-
X Engage reverse gear. tion lock.
side moves to the stored parking position.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side Storing settings
moves back to its original position:
With the memory function, you can store up to
Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph three different settings, e.g. for three different
(15 km/h) people.
Rabout ten seconds after you have disengaged The following settings are stored as a single
reverse gear memory preset:
Rwhen you use button : to select the exterior
mirror on the driver's side
Z
92 Memory function
Rseat and backrest position

Rdriver's side: position of the exterior mirrors
on the driver's and front-passenger sides
X Adjust the seat (Y page 85).

X Adjust the exterior mirror on the driver's side
(Y page 89).
X Briefly press the M memory button and then
press preset position button 1, 2 or 3 within
three seconds.
The settings are stored in the selected preset
position. A tone sounds when the settings
have been completed.
Calling up a stored setting

X Press and hold the relevant preset position
button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat and exterior
mirrors are in the stored position.
i The setting procedure is interrupted as soon
as you release the storage position button.
Exterior lighting 93
Exterior lighting Automatic headlamp mode

Ã is the preferred light switch position:
General notes
RThe light setting is automatically selected
For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recom- according to the brightness of the ambient
mends that you drive with the lights switched on light (exception: poor visibility due to weather
even during the daytime. In some countries, conditions such as fog, snow or spray).
operation of the headlamps varies due to legal RWith the SmartKey in position 1 in the igni-
requirements and self-imposed obligations. tion lock: the parking lamps are switched on
or off automatically depending on the bright-
ness of the ambient light.
Setting the exterior lighting RWith the engine running: if you have activated
the Daytime Running Lights function via
Setting options the on-board computer, the daytime running
lamps or the parking lamps and the low-beam
Exterior lighting can be set using the: headlamps are switched on or off automati-
Rlight switch cally depending on the brightness of the ambi-
Rcombination switch (Y page 94) ent light.
Lights and windshield wipers

X To switch on the automatic headlamp
Light switch mode: turn the light switch to the Ã posi-
tion.
Operation
G WARNING
When the light switch is set to Ã, the low-
beam headlamps may not be switched on
automatically if there is fog, snow or other
causes of poor visibility due to the weather
conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an
accident.
In such situations, turn the light switch to
L.
The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid.

The driver is responsible for the vehicle's light-
1 W Left-hand standing lamps
ing at all times.
2 X Right-hand standing lamps
The daytime running lamps improve the visibility
3 T Parking lamps, license plate and of your vehicle during the day. The daytime run-
instrument cluster lighting ning lamps function is required by law in Can-
4 Ã Automatic headlamp mode, controlled ada. It cannot therefore be deactivated.
by the light sensor When the engine is running and the vehicle is
5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps stationary: if you move the selector lever from a
B R Rear fog lamp driving position to position j, the daytime run-
If you hear a warning tone when you leave the ning lamps/low-beam headlamps go out after
vehicle, the lights may still be switched on. three minutes.
When the engine is running, the vehicle is sta-
X Turn the light switch to the Ã position.
tionary and in bright ambient light: if you turn the
The exterior lighting (except the parking/stand- light switch to the T position, the daytime
ing lamps) switches off automatically if you: running lamps and parking lamps turn on.
Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock If the engine is running and you turn the light
Ropen the driver's door with the SmartKey in switch to the L position, the manual settings
position g take precedence over the daytime running
lamps.
Z
94 Exterior lighting
Low-beam headlamps X To switch on the standing lamps: the

Even if the light sensor does not detect that it is SmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it is in
dark, the parking lamps and low-beam head- position g in the ignition lock.
lamps switch on when the ignition is switched on X Turn the light switch to W (left-hand side of
and the light switch is set to the L position. the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of the
This is a particularly useful function in the event vehicle).
of rain and fog.
X To switch on the low-beam headlamps:
turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- Combination switch
tion lock or start the engine.
X Turn the light switch to L.
The green L indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster lights up.
Rear fog lamp

The rear fog lamp improves visibility of your
vehicle for the traffic behind in the event of thick
fog. Please take note of the country-specific

regulations for the use of rear fog lamps.
X To switch on the rear fog lamp: turn the
SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 or
start the engine. X To indicate briefly: press the combination
X Turn the light switch to L or Ã.
switch briefly to the pressure point in the
X Press the R button. direction of arrow ; or ?.
The yellow R indicator lamp in the instru- The corresponding turn signal flashes three
ment cluster lights up. times.
X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press the X To indicate: press the combination switch
R button. beyond the pressure point in the direction of
The yellow R indicator lamp in the instru- arrow ; or ?.
ment cluster goes out. X To switch on the high-beam headlamps:
turn the light switch to L or Ã.
Parking lamps
X Press the combination switch beyond the
! If the battery charge is very low, the parking pressure point in the direction of arrow :.
lamps or standing lamps are automatically The high-beam headlamps only switch on in
switched off to enable the next engine start. the Ã position if the low-beam headlamps
Always park your vehicle safely and in a well lit are on.
area, in accordance with the relevant legal The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-
stipulations. Avoid using the T parking ment cluster lights up when the high-beam
lamps over a period of several hours. If pos- headlamps are switched on.
sible, switch on the right-hand X or left-
X To switch off the high-beam headlamps:
hand W standing lamps.
move the combination switch back to its nor-
X To switch on: turn the light switch to T. mal position.
The green T indicator lamp in the instru- The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster lights up. ment cluster goes out.
X To switch on the high-beam flasher: pull
Standing lamps the combination switch in the direction of
Switching on the standing lamps ensures the arrow =.
corresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated.
Interior lighting 95
Hazard warning lamps Interior lighting

Overview of interior lighting
Front overhead control panel
X To switch on the hazard warning lamps:

press button :.
All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a
turn signal using the combination switch, only

the turn signal lamp on the corresponding : p Switches the left-hand front reading
side of the vehicle will flash. lamp on or off
X To switch off the hazard warning lamps:
; c Switches the front interior lighting on
press button :. = v Switches the rear interior lighting on or
off
The hazard warning lamps automatically switch ? | Switches the front interior lighting/
on if: automatic interior lighting control off
Ran air bag is deployed or A p Switches the right-hand front reading
Rthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a speed lamp on or off
of above 45 mph (70 km/h) and comes to a B Switches the automatic interior lighting con-
standstill trol on
The hazard warning lamps switch off automati-
cally if the vehicle reaches a speed of above Control panel in the grab handle in the
6 mph (10 km/h) again after a full brake appli- rear compartment
cation.
The hazard warning lamps still operate if the
ignition is switched off.
Headlamps fogged up on the inside

Certain climatic and physical conditions may
cause moisture to form in the headlamp. This
moisture does not affect the functionality of the
headlamp.
: To switch the reading lamp on/off
Z
96 Replacing bulbs
Interior lighting control Use bulbs only in closed lamps that have been
designed for this purpose. Only install spare
General notes bulbs of the same type and the specified volt-
age.
In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from Marks on the glass tube reduce the service life
discharging, the interior lighting functions are of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tube with
automatically deactivated after some time your bare hands. If necessary, clean the glass
except when the SmartKey is in position 2 in tube when cold with alcohol or spirit and rub it
the ignition lock. off with a lint-free cloth.
The color and brightness of the ambient lighting Protect bulbs from moisture during operation.
are set via the multimedia system (see Digital Do not allow bulbs to come into contact with
Operator's Manual). liquids.
Replace only the bulbs listed (Y page 96).
Automatic interior lighting control Have the bulbs that you cannot change yourself
X To switch on: set the switch to center posi- replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
tion B. If you require assistance replacing bulbs, con-
sult a qualified specialist workshop.
X To switch off: set the switch to the |
position. If the new bulb still does not light up, consult a
The interior lighting automatically switches on if Headlamps and lights are an important aspect of
you: vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure
Runlock the vehicle that these function correctly at all times. Have
Ropen a door the headlamp setting checked regularly.
Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock Vehicles with LED headlamps: the front and
The interior lighting is switched on for a set time rear lamp clusters of your vehicle are equipped
when the SmartKey is removed from the ignition with LED bulbs. Do not replace the bulbs your-
lock. You can set this delayed switch-off via the self. Contact a qualified specialist workshop
multimedia system (see Digital Operator's Man- which has the necessary specialist knowledge
ual). and tools to carry out the work required.
Replacing bulbs Overview of bulb types

You can replace the following bulbs. The bulb
Important safety notes type can be found in the legend.
G WARNING
Bulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hot
when operating. If you change a bulb, you
could burn yourself on these components.
Allow these components to cool down before
changing a bulb.
Do not use a bulb if it has been dropped or if its

glass tube has been scratched.
The bulb may explode if:
Vehicles with halogen headlamps
Ryou touch it
: Low-beam headlamp: H7 55 W
Rit is hot
; High-beam headlamp: H7 55 W
Ryou drop it
= Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W
Ryou scratch it
Replacing bulbs 97
You must remove the cover of the front wheel

housing before you can change the front turn
signal lamp.
X To remove: switch off the lights.
X Turn the front wheels inwards.
X Turn rotary knob : through 90°.
Cover ; is released.
X Push cover ; down.
X To install: push cover ; up.
X Turn rotary knob : through 90°.
Cover ; is locked.
Tail lamps (vehicles with halogen headlamps)
: Rear fog lamp: P 21 W
Low-beam headlamps (halogen head-
; Backup lamp: W 16 W
lamps)

License plate lamp (vehicles with halogen head-
lamps) X Remove the cover in the front wheel housing
: License plate lamp: C 5 W (Y page 97).
X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and
remove it.
Replacing front bulbs X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and
pull out.
Removing and installing the cover in the X Pull the bulb out of bulb holder ;.
front wheel housing X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.
X Insert bulb holder ; and turn it clockwise.
X Press on housing cover : and turn it to the
right.
X Replace the cover in the front wheel housing
(Y page 97).
Z
98 Replacing bulbs
High-beam headlamps (halogen head- X Remove the cover in the front wheel housing
lamps) (Y page 97).
X Turn handle extension ; counter-clockwise
and pull it out of holder :.
X Press the bulb gently, turn it counter-clock-
wise and remove it.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder :.
X Insert handle extension ; into holder : and
turn it clockwise until it engages.
Replacing rear bulbs

Tail lamps
X Switch off the lights.
X Open the hood. Backup lamp and rear fog lamp
X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and Due to their location, have the bulbs in the
remove it. backup lamp and the fog lamp in the tailgate
X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and
replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
pull out.
X Insert the new bulb and engage it to the stop.
X Press on housing cover : and turn it to the
right.
Turn signals (halogen headlamps)
X Switch off the lights.

X Open the tailgate.
X In recess ? on the inside of the closing han-
dle, pry off and unclip ; the upper section of
handle = with a flat smooth object, e.g. a
screwdriver, and remove.
X Pull the lower section of handle : using a
sharp, sudden movement to remove it from
the paneling and then place it to one side.
Replacing bulbs 99
X Reach under the right-hand side of trim B Bulb holder

and lightly tug along the entire length of the X Backup lamp G: pull the bulb out of bulb
trim in order to unclip A it. holder E.
X Pull out connector C of the surround lighting X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder.
by releasing the latches.
X Rear fog lamp H: press the bulb gently into
X Place paneling B to one side.

bulb holder E, turn it counter-clockwise and
remove it from the bulb holder.
X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder and
turn it clockwise.
X Reinsert the bulb holder until you hear it
engage audibly.
X Position paneling D and engage it in place by
tapping it with your hand.
X Before continuing with the installation, check
that all the metal clips are inserted in the parts
placed to one side: 2 clips ; in the upper part
of handle = and 5 clips A in paneling B.
X On the side where the bulb is to be replaced, X If not, remove the missing metal clips from
unclip the remaining part of trim D from the the metal openings in the tailgate and insert
assembly with a strong tug, until the bulb them in the appropriate places.
holder is accessible. X Take paneling B and connect plug connector
C to the surround lighting.
i The surround lighting only illuminates when
the tailgate has been shut and reopened.
X Position paneling B and engage it in place by
tapping it with your hand, starting from the
outside.
X Clip in the lower section of handle : at posi-
tion ; again.
X Insert the upper section of handle = into
lower section : and engage with recess ?
again.
X Remove bulb holder E using both side levers
F.
Z
100 Windshield wipers
License plate lamp
Combination switch
1 $ Windshield wiper off
X Switch off the lights. 2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor set
X Open the tailgate. to low sensitivity)
X Apply a screwdriver to lamp lens : from the 3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor
outside. set to high sensitivity)
X Lever out lamp lens : and remove it. 4 ° Continuous wipe, slow
X Replace the bulb. 5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast
X Insert lamp lens : into the license plate lamp B í Single wipe/î Wipes the wind-
and press it in until it engages. shield using washer fluid
X Switch on the ignition.
X Turn the combination switch to the corre-
Windshield wipers sponding position.
Switching the windshield wipers ! Vehicles with a rain sensor: if the windshield
on/off becomes dirty in dry weather conditions, the
windshield wipers may be activated inadver-
! Do not operate the windshield wipers when tently. This could then damage the windshield
the windshield is dry, as this could damage wiper blades or scratch the windshield.
the wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has col- For this reason, you should always switch off
lected on the windshield can scratch the glass the windshield wipers in dry weather.
if wiping takes place when the windshield is
dry. Vehicles with a rain sensor: in the Ä or Å
position, the appropriate wiping frequency is
If it is necessary to switch on the windshield
automatically set according to the intensity of
wipers in dry weather conditions, always use
the rain. In the Å position, the rain sensor is
washer fluid when operating the windshield
more sensitive than in the Ä position, caus-
wipers.
ing the windshield wiper to wipe more fre-
! If the windshield wipers leave smears on the quently.
windshield after the vehicle has been washed If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield will
in an automatic car wash, wax or other resi- no longer be wiped properly. This could prevent
dues may be the reason for this. Clean the you from observing the traffic conditions.
windshield using washer fluid after washing
the vehicle in an automatic car wash.
Windshield wipers 101
Switching the rear window wiper on/ ! To avoid damaging the wiper blades, make
off sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the
wiper.
! Never open the hood/tailgate if a wiper arm
has been folded away from the windshield/
rear window.
Never fold a windshield wiper arm without a
wiper blade back onto the windshield/rear
window.
Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when
you change the wiper blade. If you release the
wiper arm without a wiper blade and it falls
onto the windshield/rear window, the wind-
shield/rear window may be damaged by the
Combination switch force of the impact.
: è Switch Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
2 ô Wipes with washer fluid the wiper blades changed at a qualified spe-

cialist workshop.
3 I Switches on intermittent wiping
4 0 Switches off intermittent wiping
Changing the windshield wiper blades
5 ô Wipes with washer fluid
X Switch on the ignition. Removing the wiper blades
X Slide switch : on the combination switch to X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO or KEY-
the corresponding position. LESS-GO start function: remove the Smart-
Vehicles with black and white multifunc- Key from the ignition lock.
tion display: when the rear window wiper is X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-
switched on, the è symbol appears in the GO start function: switch off the engine.
status overview in the instrument cluster. Fur- X Fold the wiper arm away from the windshield.
ther information on the status overview
(Y page 173).
Vehicles with color multifunction display:
when the rear window wiper is switched on,
the è symbol appears in the assistance
graphic in the instrument cluster. Further
information on the assistance graphic
(Y page 173).
Replacing the wiper blades

X Hold on to the wiper arm with one hand. With
G WARNING the other hand, turn wiper blade in direction
If the windshield wipers begin to move while of arrow : away from the wiper arm as far as
you are changing the wiper blades, you could it will go.
X Slide catch ; in the direction of arrow =
be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of
until it engages in the removal position with a
injury. noticeable click.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
ignition before changing the wiper blades.
Z
102 Windshield wipers
X Remove the wiper blade in the direction of X Remove protective film : of the service indi-
arrow ? away from the wiper arm. cator on the tip of the wiper blade.
If the color of the service indicator changes from
Installing the wiper blades black to yellow, the wiper blades should be
replaced.
i The duration of the color change varies

depending on the usage conditions.
Replacing the rear window wiper blade

Removing a wiper blade
X Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper arm

in the direction of arrow :.
X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO or KEY-

LESS-GO start function: remove the Smart-
Key from the ignition lock.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-
GO start function: switch off the engine.
X Fold wiper arm : away from the rear window
X Slide catch ; in the direction of arrow = until you feel it engage.
until it engages in the locking position with a X Position wiper blade ; at a right angle to
noticeable click. wiper arm :.
X Make sure that the wiper blade is seated cor- X Hold wiper arm : and press wiper blade ;
rectly. in the direction of the arrow until it releases.
X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield. X Remove wiper blade ;.
Windshield wipers 103
Installing a wiper blade X Make sure that wiper blade ; is seated cor-
rectly.
X Place new wiper blade ; onto wiper arm :. X Position wiper blade ; parallel to wiper
X Hold wiper arm : and press wiper blade ; arm :.
in the opposite direction to the arrow until it X Fold wiper arm : back onto the rear window.
engages.
Problems with the windshield wipers

The windshield wipers Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield wiper
are jammed. movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.
X For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from the igni-
tion lock.
X Remove the cause of the obstruction.

X Switch the windshield wipers back on.
The windshield wipers The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.

fail completely. X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.
X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
The windshield washer The spray nozzles are misaligned.

fluid from the spray noz- X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist workshop.
zles no longer hits the
center of the windshield.
Z
104 Overview of climate control systems
Overview of climate control systems Always keep the ventilation flaps behind the
side paneling in the cargo compartment clear.
General notes Otherwise the vehicle will not be ventilated cor-
rectly.
Observe the settings recommended on the fol-
lowing pages. The windows could otherwise fog i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during
up. warm weather, e.g. using the convenience
To prevent the windows from fogging up: opening feature (Y page 76). This will speed
up the cooling process and the desired inte-
Climate control
Rswitch off climate control only briefly rior temperature will be reached more
Rswitch on air-recirculation mode only briefly quickly.
Rswitch on the cooling with air dehumidifica-
i The integrated filter filters out most parti-
tion function cles of dust and soot and completely filters
Rswitch on the defrost windshield function out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pollutants
briefly, if required and odors. A clogged filter reduces the
The air-conditioning system or dual-zone auto- amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior.
matic climate control regulates the temperature For this reason, you should always observe
and the humidity of the vehicle interior and fil- the interval for replacing the filter, which is
ters undesirable substances from the air. specified in the Maintenance Booklet. As it
The air-conditioning system or dual-zone auto- depends on environmental conditions, e.g.
matic climate control can only be operated heavy air pollution, the interval may be
when the engine is running. Optimum operation shorter than stated in the Maintenance Book-
is only achieved with the side windows and pan- let.
orama roof with power tilt/sliding panel closed. i It is possible that under certain circumstan-
If you start the engine using your smartphone, ces the residual heat function may be activa-
the last selected climate control setting is reac- ted automatically an hour after the SmartKey
tivated (Y page 76). has been removed in order to dry the auto-
The residual heat function can only be activated matic climate control. The vehicle is then ven-
or deactivated with the ignition switched off tilated for 30 minutes.
(Y page 111).
Air-conditioning system control panel
: Sets the temperature (Y page 108)

; Defrosts the windshield (Y page 109)
Overview of climate control systems 105
= Sets the air distribution (Y page 108)

? Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 111)
A Sets the airflow (Y page 109)
B Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 107)
C Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 110)
Notes on using the air-conditioning ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if
Climate control
system there are unpleasant outside odors or when in
a tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog up,
Air-conditioning system since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in
air-recirculation mode.
Below, you can find a number of notes and rec- RIf you change the settings of the climate con-
ommendations to help you use the air-condi- trol system, the climate status display
tioning system optimally. appears for approximately three seconds at
RSwitch on the air-conditioning system by turn- the bottom of the screen on the multimedia
ing control knob A clockwise to the desired system display; see Digital Operator's Man-
position (except position 0). ual. You will see the current settings of the
RSet the temperature to 22 †. various climate control functions.
RRecommendation for avoiding misted
windows at low exterior temperatures or DYNAMIC SELECT button
in rain: switch on the ¿ cooling with dehu- You can choose between various drive programs
midification function (Y page 107). with the DYNAMIC SELECT button
Set air distribution to ¯ and if possible (Y page 120).
switch off P and O (Y page 108). If you have selected drive program E:
Deactivate air-recirculation mode e
Rwhen heating, the electrical heater booster is
(Y page 111).
deactivated and in the warming-up phase
Set airflow control A to a setting between 3 heat output is reduced
and 6 (Y page 109).
Rthe rear window defroster running time is
RRecommendation for rapid cooling or reduced
heating of the vehicle interior: briefly set
Depending on the configuration, climate set-
airflow control A to a setting between 3 and tings may also be influenced in the drive pro-
6 (Y page 109). gram I.
RRecommendation for a constant vehicle
If you have selected drive program C or S, cli-
interior temperature: set airflow control A mate settings are not influenced.
to a setting between 1 and 3 (Y page 109).
RRecommendation for air distribution in
ECO start/stop function
winter: select the O and ¯ settings
(Y page 108). During automatic engine switch-off, the climate
Recommendation for air distribution in control system only operates at a reduced capa-
summer: select the P or P and ¯ city. If you require the full climate control output,
settings (Y page 108). you can switch off the ECO start/stop function
ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" function by pressing the ECO button (Y page 118).
briefly until the windshield is clear again.
106 Overview of climate control systems
Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control

Climate control
: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 108)

; Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 108)
= Defrosts the windshield (Y page 109)
? Increases the airflow (Y page 109)
A Sets the air distribution (Y page 108)
B Display
C Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 111)
D Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 107)
E Sets the temperature, right (Y page 108)
F Switches the residual heat on or off (Y page 111)
G Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 107)
H Reduces the airflow (Y page 109)
I Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 110)
J Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 109)
Optimum use of dual-zone automatic a tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog up,
climate control since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in
air-recirculation mode.
Climate control system RUse the ZONE function to adopt the temper-
ature settings on the driver's side for the
The following contains instructions and recom- front-passenger side as well. The indicator
mendations to enable you to get the most out of lamp in the á button goes out.
your dual-zone automatic climate control. RUse the residual heat function if you want to
RActivate climate control using the Ã and heat or ventilate the vehicle interior when the
¿ buttons. The indicator lamps in the ignition is switched off. The residual heat
Ã and ¿ buttons light up. function can only be activated or deactivated
RSet the temperature to 22 †. with the ignition switched off.
ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" function RIf you change the settings of the climate con-
briefly until the windshield is clear again. trol system, the climate status display
ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if appears for approximately three seconds at
there are unpleasant outside odors or when in the bottom of the screen on the multimedia
Operating the climate control systems 107
system display; see Digital Operator's Man- Dual-zone automatic climate control
ual. You will see the current settings of the
various climate control functions. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 114).
X To activate: press the Ã button.
DYNAMIC SELECT button
The indicator lamp in the Ã button lights
You can choose between various drive programs up. Airflow and air distribution are set to auto-
with the DYNAMIC SELECT button matic mode.
(Y page 120). or
Climate control
If you have selected drive program E: X Press the ^ button.
Rwhen heating, the electrical heater booster is The indicator lamp in the ^ button goes
deactivated and in the warming-up phase out. The previously selected settings are
heat output is reduced restored.
Rthe rear window defroster running time is X To deactivate: press the ^ button.
reduced The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights
Depending on the configuration, climate set- up.
tings may also be influenced in the drive pro- i Dual-zone automatic climate control: switch
gram I. on climate control primarily using the Ã
If you have selected drive program C or S, cli- button.
mate settings are not influenced.
ECO start/stop function Switching cooling with air dehumidi-

During automatic engine switch-off, the climate fication on/off
control system only operates at a reduced capa-
city. If you require the full climate control output,
General notes
you can switch off the ECO start/stop function If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumid-
by pressing the ECO button (Y page 118). ification" function, the air inside the vehicle will
not be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also
not be dehumidified. The windows can fog up
Operating the climate control sys- more quickly. Therefore, only deactivate the
tems "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function
briefly.
Activating/deactivating climate con- The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function
trol is only available when the engine is running. The
air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified
General notes according to the temperature selected.
Condensation may drip from the underside of
When the climate control is switched off, the air the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is
supply and air circulation are also switched off. normal and not a sign that there is a malfunc-
The windows could fog up. Therefore, switch off tion.
climate control only briefly
Activating/deactivating
X Press the ¿ button.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- The indicator lamp in the ¿ button lights
tion lock (Y page 114). up or goes out.
X To switch on: turn control A clockwise to
The indicator lamp in the button indicates that
the desired position (except position 0) the respective function is activated. The
(Y page 104). "Cooling with air dehumidification" function
X To switch off: turn control A counter-clock- has a delayed switch-off feature.
wise to position 0 (Y page 104).
108 Operating the climate control systems
Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

The indicator lamp in the Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a mal-
¿ button flashes function.
three times or remains X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
off. The "Cooling with air
dehumidification" func-
Climate control
tion cannot be switched

on.
Setting climate control to automatic Setting the temperature

General notes Air-conditioning system
The automatic climate control function is only You can set the temperature for the entire vehi-
available in conjunction with dual-zone auto- cle. The set temperature is automatically main-
matic climate control. tained at a constant level.
In automatic mode, the set temperature is main- X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
tained automatically at a constant level. The lock (Y page 114).
system automatically regulates the temperature X To increase or reduce: turn control : coun-
of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air dis-
ter-clockwise or clockwise (Y page 104). Only
tribution.
change the temperature setting in small
The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function increments. Start at 22 †.
is activated automatically in automatic mode.
Setting climate control to automatic Dual-zone automatic climate control

Different temperatures can be set for the driv-
X Turn the SmartKey to position ; in the igni-
er's and front-passenger sides. The set temper-
ature is automatically maintained at a constant
X Set the desired temperature. level.
X To activate: press the Ã button.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
The indicator lamp in the Ã button lights
lock (Y page 114).
up. Automatic air distribution and airflow are
activated. X To increase or decrease: turn control : or
X To switch to manual mode: press the É

E counter-clockwise or clockwise
(Y page 106). Only change the temperature
or Ë button.
setting in small increments. Start at 22 †.
or
X Press the K or I button.
The indicator lamp in the Ã button goes
out. Automatic air distribution and airflow are Setting the air distribution
deactivated.
Air distribution settings
¯ Directs air through the defroster vents
P Directs air through the center and side air
vents
O Directs air through the footwell air vents
i You can also activate several air distribution Setting the airflow
settings simultaneously. To do this, press
multiple air distribution buttons. The air is Air-conditioning system
then directed through various vents.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
i Regardless of the air distribution setting, tion lock (Y page 114).
airflow is always directed through the side air X To increase or reduce: turn control A coun-
vents. The side air vents can only be closed if ter-clockwise or clockwise (Y page 104).
the adjusters are turned clockwise until they
Climate control
engage.
Dual-zone automatic climate control
Setting the air distribution
X To increase or reduce: press the K or
X Press one or more of the P, O, ¯
buttons. I button.
The corresponding indicator lamp lights up
briefly.
Switching the ZONE function on/off
Dual-zone automatic climate control This function is only available with dual-zone
automatic climate control.
Air distribution settings X To activate: press the á button.
¯ Directs air through the defroster vents The indicator lamp in the á button lights
P Directs air through the center and side air up.
vents The temperature setting for the driver's side
O Directs air through the footwell air vents is not adopted for the front-passenger side.
S Directs air through the center, side and X To deactivate: press the á button.
footwell vents The indicator lamp in the á button goes
b Directs air through the defroster, center out.
and side air vents The temperature setting for the driver's side
a Directs air through the defroster and is adopted for the front-passenger side.
footwell vents
_ Directs air through the defroster, center,
side and footwell vents
Defrosting the windshield
i Regardless of the air distribution setting,
airflow is always directed through the side air General notes
vents. The side air vents can only be closed if You can use this function to defrost the wind-
the adjusters are turned clockwise until they shield or to clear a fogged up windshield and
engage. side windows.
Setting the air distribution i You should only select the "Windshield
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- defrosting" function until the windshield is
tion lock (Y page 114). clear again.
X Press the É or Ë button repeatedly
until the desired symbol appears in the dis- Switching the "Windshield defrosting"
play. function on or off
X To activate: press the ¬ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lights
up.
110 Operating the climate control systems
The climate control system switches to the i You should only select this setting until the
following functions: windshield is clear again.
Rhigh airflow
Dual-zone automatic climate control
Rhigh temperature
X Activate the ¿ "Cooling with air dehumid-
Rair distribution to the windshield and front
ification" function.
side windows
X Activate automatic mode Ã.
Rair-recirculation mode off
X If the windows continue to fog up, activate the
i The "Windshield defrosting" function auto-
Climate control
¬ "Windshield defrosting" function.

matically sets the blower level to the optimum
defrosting effect. As a result, the airflow may i You should only select this setting until the
increase or decrease automatically after the windshield is clear again.
¬ button is pressed.
Windows fogged up on the outside
i You can adjust the blower level manually
while the "Windshield defrosting" function is XActivate the windshield wipers.
in operation: XSet the air distribution to P or O.
RAir-conditioning system: turn airflow con- i You should only select this setting until the
trol A counter-clockwise or clockwise windshield is clear again.
(Y page 104).
RDual-zone automatic climate control: press
the ó or ô button. Rear window defroster
X To deactivate: press the ¬ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes General notes
out. The previously selected settings are
restored. Air-recirculation mode remains The rear window defroster has a high current
deactivated. draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon
as the rear window is clear. Otherwise, the rear
or window defroster switches off automatically
X Dual-zone climate control: press the Ã after several minutes.
button. If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes defroster may switch off.
out. Airflow and air distribution are set to
automatic mode.
or Activating/deactivating
X Air-conditioning system: turn temperature X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
control : counter-clockwise or clockwise tion lock (Y page 114).
(Y page 104). X Press the ¤ button.
Dual-zone automatic climate control: turn The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lights
temperature control : or E counter-clock- up or goes out.
wise or clockwise (Y page 106).
Defrosting the windows

Windows fogged up on the inside
X Activate the ¿ "Cooling with air dehumid-
ification" function.
X If the windows continue to fog up, activate the
¬ "Windshield defrosting" function.
Problems with the rear window defroster

The rear window The battery has not been sufficiently charged.
defroster has deactiva- X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps,
ted prematurely or can- interior lighting or the seat heating.
not be activated. When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window defroster
can be activated again.
Climate control
Switching air-recirculation mode i Air-recirculation mode deactivates auto-
on/off matically:
Rafter approximately five minutes at outside
General notes temperatures below approximately 7 †
You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if Rafter approximately five minutes if the
unpleasant odors are entering the vehicle from "Cooling with air dehumidification" func-
outside. The air already inside the vehicle will tion is deactivated
then be recirculated. Rafter approximately 30 minutes at outside
If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the win- temperatures above approximately 7 † if
dows can fog up more quickly, in particular at the "Cooling with dehumidification" func-
low temperatures. Only use air-recirculation tion is activated
mode briefly to prevent the windows from fog-
ging up.
The operation of air-recirculation mode is the Switching the residual heat on or off
same for all control panels.
General notes
Activating/deactivating The residual heat function is only available with
dual-zone automatic climate control.
tion lock (Y page 114). It is possible to make use of the residual heat of
the engine to continue heating the vehicle for
X To activate: press the e button.
approximately 30 minutes after the engine has
The indicator lamp in the e button lights been switched off. The heating time depends on
up. the set interior temperature.
Air-recirculation mode switches on automati-
cally: i The blower will run at a low speed regardless
of the airflow setting.
Rat high outside temperatures
Rat high levels of pollution i If you activate the residual heat function at
high temperatures, only the ventilation will be
When air-recirculation mode is activated auto- activated. The blower runs at medium speed.
matically, the indicator lamp in the e button
is not lit. Outside air is added after about i You cannot use the ventilation to cool the
30 minutes. vehicle interior to a temperature lower than
X To deactivate: press the e button. the outside temperature.
The indicator lamp in the e button goes
out. Activating/deactivating
X Turn the SmartKey to position g in the igni-
tion lock or remove it (Y page 114).
X Press the Ì button.
The indicator lamp in the Ì button lights
up or goes out.
112 Air vents
The indicator lamp in the button indicates that Setting the air vents
the respective function is activated.
i Residual heat is deactivated automatically:
Rafter approximately 30 minutes
Rwhen the ignition is switched on
Rif the battery voltage drops
Climate control
Air vents
G WARNING : Side window defroster vent
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air ; Side air vent
vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in X To open a side air vent: turn the adjuster in
the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There side air vent ; to the left.
is a risk of injury. X To close a side air vent: turn the adjuster in
Make sure that all vehicle occupants always side air vent ; clockwise as far as it will go.
maintain a sufficient distance to the air out-
lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to i The center and rear air vents are adjusted in
the same way.
another area of the vehicle interior.
In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air

through the air vents into the vehicle interior,
please observe the following notes:
Rkeep the air inlet between the windshield and
the hood free of blockages, such as ice, snow
or leaves.
Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles in
the vehicle interior.
i For optimal climate control in the vehicle,
open the air vents completely and set the
adjusters to the central position.
Driving 113
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
The sensor system of some driving and driving stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
safety systems adjusts automatically while a the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
certain distance is being driven after the vehicle
securely and as specified in order to ensure
has been delivered or after repairs. Full system
effectiveness is not reached until the end of this sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
Driving and parking

teach-in procedure.
New and replaced brake pads and discs only top of one another.
reach their optimum braking effect after several
hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for G WARNING
this by applying greater force to the brake pedal. Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage
of the pedals, e.g.:
The first 1000 miles (1500 km) Rshoes with thick soles
Rshoes with high heels
The more you look after the engine when it is
new, the more satisfied you will be with its per- Rslippers
formance in the future. There is a risk of an accident.
RYou should therefore drive at varying vehicle Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct
and engine speeds for the first 1000 miles usage of the pedals.
(1500 km).
RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle,
during this period.
G WARNING
RChange gear in good time, before the tach- If you switch off the ignition while driving,
ometer needle is Ô of the way to the red area safety-relevant functions are only available
of the tachometer. with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to brake for example, the power steering and the brake
the vehicle. boosting effect. You will require considerably
RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator pedal more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
beyond the point of resistance (kickdown). of an accident.
RIdeally, for the first 1000 miles (1500 km),
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
drive in program E.
After 1,000 miles (1,500 km), you can increase G WARNING
the engine speed gradually and bring the vehicle
to full speed. If the parking brake has not been fully
You should also observe these notes on break- released when driving, the parking brake can:
ing-in if the engine or parts of the drive train on Roverheat and cause a fire
your vehicle have been replaced.
Rlose its hold function.
Always observe the maximum permissible
speed. There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release
the parking brake fully before driving off.
Driving ! Do not warm up the engine while stationary.

Pull away immediately. Avoid high engine
Important safety notes speeds and full throttle until the engine has
reached its operating temperature.
G WARNING In vehicles with automatic transmission,
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the engage positions P and R only when the vehi-
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. cle is stationary.
Z
114 Driving
Where possible, avoid spinning the drive Key positions in the ignition lock. This is only the
wheels when pulling away on slippery roads. case if you are not depressing the brake pedal.
You could otherwise damage the drive train. If you depress the brake pedal and press the
Start/Stop button, the engine starts immedi-
ately.
Key positions To start the vehicle without actively using the
SmartKey:
SmartKey Rthe Start/Stop button must be inserted in the
Driving and parking
ignition lock
Rthe SmartKey must be in the vehicle
Rthe vehicle must not be locked with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO (Y page 64)
Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO key:
Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone
or another SmartKey.
Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil.
Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case.
This can affect the functionality of KEYLESS-GO.
If you lock the vehicle with the SmartKey remote
g To remove the SmartKey control or with KEYLESS-GO, after a short time:
(shift the transmission to position j)
Ryou will not be able to switch on the ignition
1 Power supply for some consumers, such as
with the Start/Stop button.
the windshield wipers
Ryou will no longer be able to start the engine
2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)
and drive position with the Start/Stop button until the vehicle is
unlocked again.
3 To start the engine
If you lock the vehicle centrally using the button
i The SmartKey can be turned in the ignition on the front door (Y page 70), you can continue
lock even if it is not the correct SmartKey for to start the engine with the Start/Stop button.
the vehicle. The ignition is not switched on. The engine can be switched off while the vehicle
The engine cannot be started. is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/
Stop button for three seconds. This function
Start/Stop button operates independently of the ECO start/stop
automatic engine switch-off function.
General notes
Key positions with the Start/Stop button
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with
SmartKeys featuring the integrated KEYLESS-
GO function and a detachable Start/Stop but-
ton.
A check which periodically establishes a radio
connection between the vehicle and the Smart-
Key determines whether a valid SmartKey is in
the vehicle. This occurs, for example, when
starting the engine.
When you insert the Start/Stop button into the
ignition lock, the system needs approximately
two seconds recognition time. You can then use
the Start/Stop button.
: Start/Stop button
Pressing the Start/Stop button several times in
succession corresponds to the different Smart- ; Ignition lock
Driving 115
As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the Starting the engine
indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light
up. Important safety notes
For further information on situations in which an
indicator lamp either fails to go out after the G WARNING
engine is started or lights up while driving, If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
please refer to "Warning and indicator lamps in they could:
the instrument cluster" (Y page 205).
If Start/Stop button : has not yet been Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
Driving and parking

pressed, this is the same as the SmartKey being Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
removed from the ignition. motion if, for example, they:
X To switch on the power supply: press
Start/Stop button : once.
The power supply is switched on. You can now Rshift the automatic transmission out of park
activate the windshield wipers, for example. position P
The power supply is switched off again if: Rstart the engine
Rthe driver's door is opened and There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Ryou press Start/Stop button : twice when in
this position
the vehicle.
X To switch on the ignition: press Start/Stop
button : twice. When leaving the vehicle, always take the
The ignition is switched on. SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. This
If you press Start/Stop button : once when also applies to mobile phones if the "Digital
in this position, the ignition is switched off Car Key in smartphone" function is activated
again. via the Mercedes me connect web app.
Removing the Start/Stop button G WARNING

You can remove the Start/Stop button from the Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
ignition lock and start the vehicle as normal
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
using the SmartKey.
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
You can only switch between Start/Stop button
mode and SmartKey operation when the vehicle is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
is stationary. the engine running in enclosed spaces with-
You must also engage park position j. out sufficient ventilation.
X Remove Start/Stop button : from ignition
lock ;. G WARNING
You do not have to remove the Start/Stop but- Flammable materials introduced through
ton from the ignition lock when you leave the environmental influence or by animals can
vehicle. You should, however, always take the ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or
SmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle. As parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk
long as the SmartKey is in the vehicle: of fire.
Rthe vehicle can be started using the Start/ Carry out regular checks to make sure that
Stop button there are no flammable foreign materials in
Rthe electrically powered equipment can be
the engine compartment or in the exhaust
operated
system.
Z
116 Driving
General notes You can also start your engine via your smart-
phone from outside the vehicle. In this case, the
During a cold start, the engine runs at higher previously selected climate control setting is
speeds to enable the catalytic converter to activated. In this way you can cool or heat the
reach its operating temperature. The sound of interior of the vehicle before starting the jour-
the engine may change during this time. ney.
Only start the engine via your smartphone if it is
Automatic transmission safe to start and run the engine where your vehi-
cle is parked.
Driving and parking
X Shift the transmission to position j

(Y page 121). Observe the legal stipulations in the area where
The transmission position indicator on the your vehicle is parked. Engine start via smart-
multifunction display shows j phone may be limited to certain countries or
(Y page 121). regions.
You can execute a maximum of two consecutive
i You can start the engine in transmission starting attempts via your smartphone. If you
positions j and i. insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock, you
can carry out two more starting attempts.
Starting procedure with the SmartKey Once you have started the engine, you can
switch the engine off via your smartphone at any
To start the engine using the SmartKey instead time.
of the Start/Stop button, pull the Start/Stop You can only start the engine via your smart-
button out of the ignition lock. phone if:
Rthe SmartKey is in the ignition lock
tion lock (Y page 114) and release it as soon
as the engine is running. Rpark position j is selected
Rthe accelerator pedal is not depressed
Rthe alarm for the anti-theft alarm system is
Starting procedure with the Start/Stop
not set
button
Rthe panic alarm is not activated
The Start/Stop button can be used to start the Rthe hazard warning lamps are switched off
vehicle manually without inserting the SmartKey Rthe hood is closed
into the ignition lock. The Start/Stop button
Rthe doors are closed and locked
must be inserted in the ignition lock and the
SmartKey must be in the vehicle. This mode for Rthe windows and sliding sunroof are closed
starting the engine operates independently of Also make sure that:
the ECO start/stop automatic engine start func- Rthe fuel tank is sufficiently filled
tion.
Rthe starter battery is sufficiently charged
You can start the engine if a valid SmartKey is in
the vehicle. Switch off the engine and always G WARNING
take the SmartKey with you when leaving the
Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the
vehicle, even if you only leave it for a short time.
Pay attention to the important safety notes. engine is started unintentionally during ser-
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
vice or maintenance work. There is a risk of
depressed. injury.
X Press the Start/Stop button once Always secure the engine against uninten-
(Y page 114). tional starting before carrying out mainte-
The engine starts. nance or repair work.
Starting procedure via smartphone

Observe the important safety notes on starting
the engine (Y page 115).
Driving 117
Make sure that the engine cannot be started via Hill start assist
your smartphone before carrying out mainte-
nance or repairs. You can prevent an engine Hill start assist helps you when pulling away
start via your smartphone, for example, if you: forward or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It
holds the vehicle for a short time after you have
Rswitch on the hazard warning lamps
removed your foot from the brake pedal. This
Rdo not lock the doors gives you enough time to move your foot from
Ropen the hood the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and to
depress it before the vehicle begins to roll.
Driving and parking

G WARNING
Pulling away
After a short time, hill start assist will no lon-
General notes ger brake your vehicle and it could roll away.
G WARNING Therefore, quickly move your foot from the
If the engine speed is above the idling speed brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never
and you engage transmission position D or R, leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start
the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is assist.
a risk of an accident.
When engaging transmission position D or R, Hill start assist is not active if:
always firmly depress the brake pedal and do Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on a
not simultaneously accelerate. downhill gradient.
Rthe transmission is in position i.
Depress the accelerator carefully when pulling Rthe electric parking brake is applied.
away. RESP® is malfunctioning.
The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled Further information on holding the vehicle sta-
away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down. tionary on uphill gradients (Y page 124).
You can open the doors from the inside at any
time.
You can also deactivate the automatic locking ECO start/stop function
feature (Y page 176).
It is possible to shift the transmission from posi- Introduction
tion j to the desired position only if you
depress the brake pedal. Only then can the The ECO start/stop function switches the
parking lock be deactivated. engine off automatically if the vehicle is stopped
If you do not depress the brake pedal, the under certain conditions.
DIRECT SELECT lever can still be moved but the The engine starts automatically when the driver
parking lock remains engaged. wants to pull away again. The ECO start/stop
At transmission fluid temperatures below Ò4 ‡ function thereby helps you to reduce the fuel
(Ò20 †), you can only shift out of position j consumption and emissions of your vehicle.
into another transmission position when the
engine is running. Important safety notes
i Upshifts take place at higher engine speeds G WARNING
after a cold start. This helps the catalytic con-
verter to reach its operating temperature If the engine is switched off automatically and
more quickly. you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted
automatically. The vehicle may begin moving.
Information on the automatic release of the
electric parking brake (Y page 131). There is a risk of accident and injury.
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
the ignition and secure the vehicle against
rolling away.
Z
118 Driving
General notes Automatic engine switch-off can take place a

maximum of four times in a row (initial stop, then
three subsequent stops).
Automatic engine start

The engine starts automatically if:
Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function by
pressing the ECO button
Driving and parking
: ECO start/stop display (example: color mul- Rin transmission position D or N the brake
tifunction display) pedal is released and the HOLD function is not
The ECO start/stop function is activated when- active
ever you start the engine using the SmartKey or Ryou depress the accelerator pedal
the Start/Stop button. Ryou engage reverse gear R
If the engine has been switched off automati- Ryou move the transmission out of position P
cally by the ECO start/stop function, the è Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the driv-
ECO symbol is shown in the multifunction dis- er's door
play.
Rthe vehicle starts to roll
Rthe brake system requires this
Automatic engine switch-off
Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior devi-
If the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or N, ates from the set range
the ECO start/stop function switches off the Rthe system detects moisture on the wind-
engine automatically. shield when the air-conditioning system is
The ECO start/stop function is operational switched on
when: Rthe battery's condition of charge is too low
Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit Shifting the transmission to position P does not
green. start the engine.
Rthe outside temperature is within the range
that is suitable for the system. Deactivating or activating the ECO
Rthe engine is at normal operating tempera- start/stop function
ture.
Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior
has been reached.
Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.
Rthe system detects that the windshield is not
fogged up when the air-conditioning system is
switched on.
Rthe hood is closed.
Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's
seat belt is fastened.
All of the vehicle's systems remain active when
the engine is stopped automatically.
The HOLD function can also be activated if the X To deactivate: press ECO button :.
engine has been switched off automatically. It is Indicator lamp ; goes out.
then not necessary to continue applying the X To activate: press ECO button :.
brakes during the automatic stop phase. When
Indicator lamp ; lights up.
you depress the accelerator pedal, the engine
starts automatically and the braking effect of If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop
the HOLD function is deactivated. function has been deactivated manually or as
the result of a malfunction. The engine will then
Driving 119
not be switched off automatically when the vehi-

cle stops.
Problems with the engine

The engine does not The HOLD function or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated.
Driving and parking

start. X Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 147) or Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC (Y page 144).
X Try to start the engine again.
The engine does not RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.

start. The starter motor RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.
can be heard. Before attempting to start the engine again:
X Turn the SmartKey back to position g in the ignition lock.
or
X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in
the instrument cluster go out.
X Try to start the engine again. Avoid excessively long and frequent
attempts to start the engine as these will drain the battery.
If the engine does not start after several attempts:
The engine does not The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or
start. You cannot hear discharged.
the starter motor. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 260).
If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:
The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.
X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two minutes.
X Try to start the engine again.
If the engine still does not start:
Z
120 DYNAMIC SELECT button

The engine is not running There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical
smoothly and is misfir- component of the engine management system.
ing. X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter
and damage it.
X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Driving and parking
The coolant temperature The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no
gauge shows a value longer being cooled sufficiently.
above 248 ‡ (120 †). X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to
The coolant warning cool down.
lamp may also be on and
X Check the coolant level (Y page 242). Observe the warning notes
a warning tone may
as you do so and add coolant if necessary.
sound.
DYNAMIC SELECT button X Press DYNAMIC SELECT button : as many

times as necessary until the desired drive
program is selected.
Use the DYNAMIC SELECT button to change the
The selected drive program appears in the
drive program. Depending on the drive program
multifunction display. After five seconds the
selected the following vehicle characteristics
display goes out and the status icon of the
will change:
selected drive program appears.
Rthe drive (engine and transmission manage- In addition, the current drive program settings
ment) are displayed briefly in the multimedia system
Rthe suspension (vehicles with damping sys- display.
tem) i In a few countries, the ECO start/stop func-
Rthe sound of the exhaust system (vehicles tion is deactivated at the factory due to the
with sports exhaust system) available fuel grade. In this case, the ECO
Rthe steering start/stop function is not available in any
Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop function drive program, regardless of the display in the
Rthe climate control
multimedia system display.
Available drive programs:
Each time you start the engine with the Smart-
Key or the Start/Stop button, drive program C is C Comfort Comfortable and economi-
activated. For further information about starting cal driving characteristics
the engine, see (Y page 124).
S Sport Sporty driving characteris-
tics
I Individual Individual settings
E Economy Particularly economical
driving characteristics
Additional information for drive programs

(Y page 124).
You can also change gear yourself using the
steering wheel paddle shifters. For further infor-
mation on the manual drive program
(Y page 125).
Automatic transmission 121
Automatic transmission sion position display in the multifunction display

(Y page 121).
Transmission position and drive pro-
G WARNING gram display
If the engine speed is above the idling speed
and you engage transmission position D or R, The current transmission position and drive pro-
gram appear in the multifunction display.
the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is
Driving and parking

a risk of an accident.
When engaging transmission position D or R,
always firmly depress the brake pedal and do
not simultaneously accelerate.
G WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to neu- : Transmission position display
tral position N when you switch off the engine. ; Gear
The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an = Drive program display
accident. The arrows in the transmission position display
After switching off the engine, always switch show how and into which transmission positions
to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi- you can shift using the DIRECT SELECT lever.
cle from rolling away by applying the parking If the transmission position display in the mul-
brake. tifunction display is not working, you should pull
away carefully to check whether the desired
transmission position is engaged. Ideally, you
should select transmission position h and
DIRECT SELECT lever drive program E or S.
Overview of transmission positions Engaging park position P

! If the engine speed is too high or the vehicle
is coasting, do not shift the automatic trans-
mission directly from h to k, from k to h
or directly to j. Otherwise, the automatic
transmission may be damaged.
X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever switch in the
direction of arrow j.
Transmission position display j is shown in
the multifunction display.
When you have engaged park position j, make
sure that the transmission position display
j Park position with parking lock shows j in the multifunction display.
k Reverse gear You can engage park position j only when the
i Neutral vehicle is stationary; do not switch directly to
h Drive park position j at high engine speed.
The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the Depressing the brake and pushing the DIRECT
steering column. SELECT lever up or down disengages the park-
ing lock. The transmission is in neutral i.
The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to its
original position. The current transmission posi- At transmission fluid temperatures below Ò4 ‡
tion j, k, i or h is shown in the transmis- (Ò20 †), you can only shift out of park position
Z
122 Automatic transmission
j into another transmission position when the Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
engine is running. motion if, for example, they:
In order to shift from park position j directly
into k or h: Rrelease the parking brake
Rdepress the brake pedal and Rshift the automatic transmission out of park
Rpush the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down position P
past the first point of resistance Rstart the engine
Driving and parking
Engaging park position P automatically

Park position j is automatically engaged if: the vehicle.
Ryou switch off the engine using the SmartKey When leaving the vehicle, always take the
and remove the SmartKey SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. This
Ryou switch off the engine using the SmartKey also applies to mobile phones if the "Digital
or using the Start/Stop button and open the Car Key in smartphone" function is activated
driver's door or front-passenger door via the Mercedes me connect web app.
Ryou open the driver's door when the vehicle is
stationary or when driving at a very low speed X If the transmission is in position h or k:
and the transmission is in position h or k push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to
In certain situations, the automatic transmis- the first point of resistance.
sion shifts automatically to transmission posi- X If the transmission is in position j: depress
tion j if the HOLD function or Distance Pilot the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT
DISTRONIC is activated. Observe the informa- lever up or down to the first point of resist-
tion on the HOLD function (Y page 147) and on ance.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 143).
If you switch the engine off with the transmis-
sion in position k or h, the automatic trans-
Engaging reverse gear R mission shifts to i automatically.
! Only move the automatic transmission to With the SmartKey: if you then open the driv-
k when the vehicle is stationary. er's door or the front-passenger door or remove
the SmartKey from the ignition, the automatic
X Depress the brake and keep it pressed. transmission shifts to j automatically.
X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the With the Start/Stop button: if you then open
first point of resistance. the driver's door or the front-passenger door,
The ECO start/stop function is not available the automatic transmission shifts to j auto-
when reverse gear is engaged. Further informa- matically.
tion on the ECO start/stop function If you want the automatic transmission to
(Y page 118). remain in neutral i, e.g. when having the vehi-
cle cleaned in an automatic car wash with a
Shifting to neutral N towing system:
X Vehicles with the Start-Stop button:
G WARNING remove the Start-Stop button from the igni-
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, tion lock.
they could: X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
X All vehicles: switch the ignition on.
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
X Engage neutral i.
X Release the brake pedal.
X Release the electric parking brake. A Neutral

X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey Do not shift the transmission to i
in the ignition lock. while driving. The automatic trans-
mission could otherwise be dam-
Engaging drive position D aged.
No power is transmitted from the
X If the transmission is in position k or i: engine to the drive wheels.
push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the
first point of resistance. Releasing the brakes will allow you to
Driving and parking

move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push
X If the transmission is in position j: depress
it or tow it.
the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT
lever down past the first point of resistance. If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: shift
the transmission to position i if the
vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g.
on icy roads.
Transmission positions If you switch the engine off with the
transmission in position k or h,
B Park position the automatic transmission shifts to
This prevents the vehicle from rolling i automatically.
away when stopped.
Only shift the transmission to posi-
! Coasting in neutral i may
cause damage to the drive train.
tion j when the vehicle is station-
ary. The parking lock should not be 7 Drive
used as a brake when parking. The automatic transmission changes
Always apply the electronic parking gear automatically. All forward gears
brake in addition to the parking lock are available.
in order to secure the vehicle.
In the event of a malfunction of the
vehicle's electronics, the transmis-
sion may lock in position j. Have Driving tips
the vehicle electronics checked
immediately at a qualified specialist Changing gear
workshop. The automatic transmission shifts through the
Park position j is automatically individual gears automatically when it is in trans-
engaged if: mission position h. This automatic gear shift-
Ryou switch off the engine using the ing behavior is determined by:
SmartKey and remove the Smart- Rthe selected drive program
Key Rthe position of the accelerator pedal
Ryou switch off the engine using the Rthe road speed
SmartKey or using the Start/Stop
button and open the driver's door
or front-passenger door Accelerator pedal position
Ryou open the driver's door when Your style of driving influences how the auto-
the vehicle is stationary or when matic transmission shifts gear:
driving at a very low speed and the
Rlittle throttle: early upshifts
transmission is in position h or
k Rmore throttle: late upshifts
C Reverse gear
Only shift the transmission into posi-
tion k when the vehicle is station-
ary.
Z
Holding the vehicle stationary on uphill between transmission positions h and k,

gradients move the DIRECT SELECT lever up and down
past the point of resistance.
G WARNING
If the clutch overheats, the electronic man-
agement system is automatically deactivated. Drive programs
This interrupts the power transmission. The Drive program C (Comfort)
vehicle may, for example, roll backwards on
Driving and parking
gradients. There is a risk of an accident. Drive program C is characterized by the follow-

ing:
Never hold the vehicle stationary on uphill
gradients by depressing the accelerator. Rthe vehicle delivers comfortable, economical
handling characteristics.
The clutch may overheat if you hold the vehicle Rthe vehicle pulls away more gently in forward
stationary on uphill gradients by depressing the and reverse gears, unless the accelerator
accelerator pedal. If the clutch overheats, a pedal is depressed fully.
warning tone sounds. Rthe vehicle has improved driving stability, for
The Stop Vehicle Shift to 'P' Leave example on slippery road surfaces.
Engine Running display message appears in Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the
the multifunction display. You will only be able to automatic transmission shifting up sooner.
continue your journey once the clutch has The vehicle is driven in the low engine speed
cooled down and the display message in the range and the wheels are less likely to spin.
multifunction display has disappeared.
Do not hold the vehicle stationary on uphill gra- Drive program S (Sport)
dients by depressing the accelerator pedal.
Instead, only ever hold the vehicle stationary on Drive program S is characterized by the follow-
uphill gradients by: ing:
Rdepressing the brake pedal Rsporty engine settings.
Ractivating the HOLD function Rthe automatic transmission shifts up later.
Rengaging the electric parking brake the fuel consumption possibly being higher as
a result of the later automatic transmission
shift points.
Kickdown
Use kickdown for maximum acceleration. Drive program I (Individual)
X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the In drive program I the following properties of the
pressure point. drive program can be selected:
The automatic transmission shifts to a lower
gear depending on the engine speed. Rthe drive (engine and transmission manage-
X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the
ment)
desired speed is reached. Rthe suspension (vehicles with damping sys-
The automatic transmission shifts back up. tem)
Rthe steering
For further information on kickdown in manual
drive program M (Y page 126). Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop function
Rthe climate control:
Rocking the vehicle free Information about configuring drive program I
with the multimedia system can be found in the
Shifting back and forth between transmission Digital Operator's Manual.
positions h and k can help to free up the
vehicle if it gets stuck in mud or snow. The vehi- i To permanently select the gears in drive
cle's engine management system limits the program I using the steering wheel paddle
speed to a maximum of 5 mph (9 km/h) when shifters, select the M (manual) setting for the
shifting back and forth. To shift repeatedly drive.
Drive program E (Economy) If manual gearshifting is deactivated, the gears

will be selected automatically.
Drive program E is characterized by the follow-
ing:
Temporary setting
Rcomfort-oriented engine settings.
Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the
automatic transmission shifting up sooner.
Rthe vehicle pulls away more gently in forward
and reverse gears, unless the accelerator
Driving and parking

pedal is depressed fully.
Rthe vehicle has improved driving stability, for
example on slippery road surfaces.
Rthe automatic transmission shifting up
sooner. This results in the vehicle being driven
at lower engine speeds and the wheels being
less likely to spin.
Rgliding mode is activated automatically when X To activate: shift the DIRECT SELECT lever to
engine-internal conditions are fulfilled and position h.
the accelerator is not depressed. At the same
X Pull steering wheel paddle shifter : or ;.
time the transmission’s clutch opens and the
vehicle rolls freely using its kinetic energy. As Temporary setting will be active for a certain
a result great distances can be completed amount of time. Under certain conditions the
without the engine brake and fuel consump- minimum amount of time is extended, e.g. in the
tion reduced. case of lateral acceleration, during an overrun
phase or when driving on steep terrain.
i The availability of gliding mode depends on
various factors, including the following: X To deactivate: pull steering wheel paddle
shifter ; and hold it in place.
Rthe engine and transmission temperature
or
Rthe downhill gradient
X Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the
Rthe vehicle speed
transmission position.
Rperforming regular adaptation functions
or
When you depress the brake pedal, gliding X Use the DYNAMIC SELECT button to change
mode is deactivated, depending on pedal the drive program.
pressure.
When you activate cruise control or Distance
Pilot DISTRONIC, gliding mode is not availa- Shifting gears
ble.
Manual gear shifting

General notes
You can change gear yourself using the steering
wheel paddle shifters. The transmission must be
in position h to do this.
Depending on which steering wheel paddle
shifter is pulled, the automatic transmission
immediately shifts into the next gear down or
up, if permitted. X To shift up: pull steering wheel paddle
If you activate manual gearshifting, the multi- shifter ;.
function display will show the current gear The automatic transmission shifts up to the
instead of transmission position h. next gear.
Z
If the maximum engine speed on the currently The gearshift recommendations assist you in
engaged gear is reached and you continue to adopting an economical driving style. The rec-
accelerate, the automatic transmission auto- ommended gear is shown in the multifunction
matically shifts up in order to prevent engine display.
damage. X Shift to recommended gear ; according to
X To shift down: pull steering wheel paddle gearshift recommendation : when shown in
shifter :. the multifunction display.
The automatic transmission shifts down to
the next gear.
Driving and parking
Kickdown
Automatic down shifting occurs when coast-
ing. X For maximum acceleration, depress the
If the engine exceeds the maximum engine accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point.
speed when shifting down, the automatic The automatic transmission shifts to a lower
transmission protects against engine damage gear depending on the engine speed.
by not shifting down. X Shift back up once the desired speed is
reached.
Shift recommendation During kickdown, you cannot shift gears using
the steering wheel paddle shifters.
If you apply full throttle, the automatic trans-
mission shifts up to the next gear when the
maximum engine speed is reached. This pre-
vents the engine from overrevving.
Problems with the transmission

The transmission has The transmission is losing oil.
problems shifting gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
The acceleration ability The transmission is in emergency mode.

is deteriorating. X Stop the vehicle.
The transmission no lon- X Shift the transmission to position j.
ger shifts into all of the
X Switch off the engine.
gears.
X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.
Reverse gear can no lon-
ger be engaged. X Shift the transmission to position h.
X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
Refueling 127
Refueling Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could

result in damage to the fuel system and the
Important safety notes engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop
and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained
G WARNING completely.
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel ! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the
incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo- fuel system.
sion.
! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted
Driving and parking

You must avoid fire, open flames, creating surfaces. You could otherwise damage the
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine paintwork.
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before ! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel can.
refueling. The fuel lines and/or the fuel injection system
could otherwise be blocked by particles from
G WARNING the fuel can.
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. Do not get into the vehicle again during the refu-
There is a risk of injury. eling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge
could build up again.
You must make sure that fuel does not come
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray out
when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel
For further information on fuel and fuel quality
vapors. Keep fuel away from children. (Y page 295).
If you or others come into contact with fuel,
observe the following:
RWash away fuel from skin immediately Refueling
using soap and water. General information
RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
immediately rinse them thoroughly with Pay attention to the important safety notes
(Y page 127).
clean water. Seek medical assistance with-
The fuel filler flap is unlocked/locked automat-
out delay.
ically when you unlock/lock the vehicle with the
RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis- SmartKey.
tance without delay. Do not induce vomit- The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed
ing. æ in the instrument cluster. The arrow on the
RImmediately change out of clothing which filling pump indicates the side of the vehicle.
has come into contact with fuel.
Opening the fuel filler flap
G WARNING
Electrostatic buildup can create sparks and
ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire and
explosion.
Always touch the vehicle body before opening
the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump
nozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup is
thereby discharged.
! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a

gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition
if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. : Opens the fuel filler flap
Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. ; Tire pressure table
Z
128 Refueling
= Insert the fuel filler cap

? Instruction label for fuel type to be refueled i Do not add any more fuel after the pump
stops filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel
X Switch off the engine. may leak out.
X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function Closing the fuel filler flap
or KEYLESS‑GO
X Open the driver's door.
X Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn
The vehicle electronics are now in position clockwise until it engages audibly.
Driving and parking
g. This is the same as the SmartKey having X Close the fuel filler flap.
been removed. Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehi-
X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of cle.
arrow :. If you are driving with the fuel filler cap open, the
The fuel filler flap swings up. 8 reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. A mes-
X Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise and sage appears in the multifunction display
remove it. (Y page 193).
X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder on the In addition, the ; Check Engine warning
inside of fuel filler flap =. lamp may light up (Y page 210).
X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel For further information on warning and indicator
pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and lamps in the instrument cluster, see
refuel. (Y page 210).
X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle
switches off.
Problems with fuel and the fuel tank

Fuel is leaking from the The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.
vehicle.
G WARNING
Risk of explosion or fire.
X Apply the electric parking brake.
X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS‑GO
X Open the driver's door.
The vehicle electronics are now in position g. This is the same as
the SmartKey being removed from the ignition.
X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.
The fuel filler flap cannot The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.
be opened. X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 64).
Parking 129

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 71).
The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed.
Driving and parking

Parking Rthe SmartKey must be removed from the igni-
tion lock.
Important safety notes Ron uphill or downhill gradients, the front
wheels must be turned towards the curb.
G WARNING
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with Switching off the engine
hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust
gas flow. There is a risk of fire. Important safety notes
Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate- G WARNING
rials come into contact with parts of the vehi- The automatic transmission switches to neu-
cle which are hot. Take particular care not to tral position N when you switch off the engine.
park on dry grassland or harvested grain The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an
fields. accident.
After switching off the engine, always switch
G WARNING
to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi-
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
cle from rolling away by applying the parking
brake.
Rrelease the parking brake.
Rshift the automatic transmission out of the Automatic transmission
parking position P.
Rstart the engine.
X Shift the transmission to position j.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of X With the SmartKey : turn the SmartKey to
an accident and injury. position g in the ignition lock and remove it.
The immobilizer is activated.
X With the Start/Stop button: press the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never Start/Stop button (Y page 114).
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. The engine stops and all the indicator lamps in
the instrument cluster go out.
! Always secure the vehicle correctly against If the driver's door is closed, this is the same
rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its driv- as key position 1. If the driver's door is open,
etrain could be damaged. this is the same as key position g, i.e. the
To ensure that the vehicle is secured against SmartKey having been removed.
rolling away unintentionally: If you switch the engine off with the transmis-
Rthe electric parking brake must be applied. sion in position k or h, the automatic trans-
Rthe transmission must be in position j and mission shifts to i automatically.
the transmission position display must show With the SmartKey: if you then open the driv-
j in the multifunction display. er's door or the front-passenger door or remove
Z
130 Parking
the SmartKey from the ignition, the automatic The function of the electric parking brake is
transmission shifts to j automatically. dependent on the on-board voltage. If the on-
With the Start/Stop button: if you then open board voltage is low or there is a malfunction in
the driver's door or the front-passenger door, the system, it may not be possible to apply the
the automatic transmission shifts to j auto- released parking brake.
matically. X If this is the case, only park the vehicle on
If you want the automatic transmission to level ground and secure it to prevent it rolling
remain in neutral i, e.g. when having the vehi- away.
cle cleaned in an automatic car wash with a X Shift the automatic transmission to position
Driving and parking
towing system: j.
X Vehicles with the Start-Stop button: It may not be possible to release an applied
remove the Start-Stop button from the igni- parking brake if the on-board voltage is low or
tion lock. there is a malfunction in the system. Contact a
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. qualified specialist workshop.
X All vehicles: switch the ignition on. The electric parking brake performs a function
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it test at regular intervals while the engine is
depressed. switched off. The sounds that can be heard while
X Engage neutral i.
this is occurring are normal.
X Release the electric parking brake.
Applying or releasing manually
X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey
in the ignition lock.
Electric parking brake

General notes
G WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
Rrelease the parking brake. X To engage: push handle :.
Rshift the automatic transmission out of the When the electric parking brake is engaged,
the red ! indicator lamp lights up in the
parking position P.
instrument cluster.
Rstart the engine.
The electric parking brake can also be applied
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip- when the SmartKey is removed.
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of X To release: pull handle :.
an accident and injury. The red ! indicator lamp in the instrument
When leaving the vehicle, always take the cluster goes out.
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never The electric parking brake can only be
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. released:
Rif the SmartKey is in position 1 or 2 in
the ignition lock (Y page 114) or
Rif the ignition was switched on using the
Start/Stop button
Driving tips 131
Applying automatically Ensure that you do not depress the accelerator

pedal unintentionally. Otherwise, the parking
The electric parking brake is automatically brake will be released and the vehicle will start
applied when the transmission is in position j to move.
and:
Rthe engine is switched off or Emergency braking
Rthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and the
driver's door is opened The vehicle can also be braked during an emer-
gency by using the electric parking brake.
To prevent the electric parking brake from being
Driving and parking

automatically applied, pull handle :. X While driving, push handle : of the electric
parking brake (Y page 130).
The electric parking brake is also engaged auto-
The vehicle is braked as long as you keep
matically if:
handle : of the electric parking brake
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC brings the vehicle pressed. The longer the electric parking brake
to a standstill or handle : is depressed, the greater the brak-
Rthe HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta- ing force.
tionary During braking:
RParking Pilot is keeping the vehicle stationary
Ra warning tone sounds
In addition, at least one of the following condi- Rthe Release Parking Brake message
tions must be fulfilled:
appears
Rthe engine is switched off Rthe red ! indicator lamp in the instrument
Rthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and the cluster flashes
driver's door is opened When the vehicle has been braked to a stand-
Rthere is a system malfunction still, the electric parking brake is engaged.
Rthe power supply is insufficient
Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period
The red ! indicator lamp in the instrument Parking the vehicle for a long period
cluster goes out.
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than
The electric parking brake is not automatically four weeks, the battery may be damaged by
engaged if the engine is switched off by the ECO exhaustive discharging.
start/stop function.
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six
weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a
Releasing automatically result of lack of use.
Your vehicle's electric parking brake is auto- X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek
matically released if all of the following condi- advice.
tions are met:
i You can obtain information about trickle
Rthe engine is running.
chargers from a qualified specialist work-
Rthe transmission is in position h or k and shop.
you depress the accelerator pedal or shift
from position j to h or k
Rthe seat belt has been fastened.
Driving tips
If the transmission is in position k, the tailgate
must be closed. General notes
If your seat belt is not fastened, the following
conditions must be fulfilled to automatically Important safety notes
release the electric parking brake:
G WARNING
RThe driver's door is closed.
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
RYou are shifting from transmission position
j or have previously driven at speeds safety-relevant functions are only available
greater than 2 mph (3 km/h) with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
Z
132 Driving tips
for example, the power steering and the brake Drinking and driving
boosting effect. You will require considerably
G WARNING
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
of an accident. Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and
driving are very dangerous combinations.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can
affect your reflexes, perceptions and judg-
G WARNING
ment.
Driving and parking
If you operate mobile communication equip-

The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci-
ment when driving, you may be distracted
dent is greatly increased when you drink or
from the traffic situation. You could also lose
take drugs and drive.
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident. Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
anyone to drive who has been drinking or tak-
Only operate this equipment when the vehicle
ing drugs.
is stationary.
Observe the legal requirements for the country Emission control

in which you are driving. Some jurisdictions pro-
hibit the driver from using a mobile phone while G WARNING
driving a vehicle. Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
If you make a call while driving, always use gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
when the traffic situation permits. If you are
unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
before operating the telephone. the engine running in enclosed spaces with-
Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph out sufficient ventilation.
(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers a
distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per sec- Certain engine systems are designed to keep
ond. the level of poisonous components in exhaust
fumes within legal limits.
Drive sensibly – save fuel These systems only work at peak efficiency if
they are serviced exactly in accordance with the
Observe the following tips to save fuel: manufacturer's specifications. Always have
RThe tires should always be inflated to the rec-
work on the engine carried out at a qualified
ommended tire pressure. specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you use an authorized Mercedes-
RRemove unnecessary loads.
Benz Center for this purpose. In particular, work
RRemove roof racks when they are not needed. relevant to safety or on safety-related systems
RWarm up the engine at low engine speeds. must be carried out at a qualified specialist
RAvoid frequent acceleration or braking. workshop.
RHave all maintenance work carried out as The engine settings must not be changed under
indicated by the service intervals in the Main- any circumstances. Furthermore, all specific
tenance Booklet or by the service interval dis- service work must be carried out at regular
play. intervals and in accordance with the Mercedes-
Benz service requirements. Details can be found
Fuel consumption also increases when driving in
in the Maintenance Booklet.
cold weather, in stop-start traffic and in hilly ter-
rain.
Driving tips 133
ECO display RAcceleration (evaluation of the accelera-

tion processes):
Vehicles with a black and white multi- - The bar fills up: moderate acceleration,
function display especially at higher speeds
- The bar empties: sporty acceleration
RConstant (assessment of driving behavior at
all times):
- The bar fills up: constant speed and avoid-
Driving and parking

ance of unnecessary acceleration and
deceleration
- The bar empties: fluctuations in speed
RCoasting (assessment of all deceleration
The ECO display provides feedback on how eco- processes):
nomical your driving characteristics are. The - The bar fills up: anticipatory driving, keep-
ECO display assists you in achieving the most ing your distance and early release of the
economical driving style for the selected set- accelerator. The vehicle can coast without
tings and prevailing conditions. Your driving use of the brakes.
style can significantly influence the vehicle's - The bar empties: frequent braking
consumption.
The ECO display consists of three bars: An economical driving style specially requires
driving at moderate engine speeds.
RAcceleration
To achieve a higher value in the categories
RConstant Acceleration and Constant
Constant:
RCoasting Robserve the gearshift recommendations.
The percent value is the average value of the Rdrive the vehicle in drive program C or E
three bars. The three bars and the mean value (vehicles with a DYNAMIC SELECT button).
begin at the value of 50%. A higher percentage On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. on the
indicates a more economical driving style. highway, only the bar for Constant will change.
The ECO display does not indicate the actual fuel The ECO display summarizes the driving char-
consumption. A fixed percentage count in the acteristics from the start of the journey to its
ECO display does not indicate a fixed consump- completion. For this reason, the bars change
tion. dynamically at the beginning of the journey. On
Apart from driving style, consumption is longer journeys, there are fewer changes. For
dependent on many factors such as, e.g.: more dynamic changes, carry out a manual
RLoad reset.
RTire pressure For more information on the ECO display, see
RCold start
(Y page 168).
RChoice of route
RActive electrical consumers
Vehicles with a color multifunction dis-
play
These factors are not included in the ECO dis-
play. The ECO display shows you how economical
The evaluation of your driving style is carried out your driving style is. The ECO display assists you
using the following three categories: in achieving the most economical driving style
for the selected settings and prevailing condi-
tions. Your driving style can significantly influ-
ence the vehicle's consumption.
Z
134 Driving tips
The ECO display consists of three sections, with

an inner and outer area. The sections corre-
spond to the following three categories:
: Acceleration (evaluation of the
acceleration processes):
Rthe outer area fills up and the inner
area lights up green: moderate
: Acceleration acceleration, especially at higher
Driving and parking
; Coasting speeds
= Constant Rthe outer area empties and the
? Additional range achieved inner area is gray: sporty acceler-
Range ? is shown under Bonus from start ation
and represents the additional range achieved ; Coasting (evaluation of all decelera-
since the beginning of the journey as a result of
tion processes):
an adapted driving style.
If the fuel level has dropped into the reserve Rthe outer area fills up and the inner
range, the Reserve fuel level message is area lights up green: anticipatory
shown in the multifunction display instead of driving, keeping your distance and
range ?. The 8 warning lamp in the instru- early release of the accelerator.
ment cluster also lights up (Y page 210). The vehicle can coast without use
of the brakes.
Rthe outer area empties and the
inner area is gray: frequent heavy
braking
= Constant (continuous evaluation
over the entire journey):
Rthe outer area fills up and the inner
area lights up green: constant
speed and avoidance of unneces-
sary acceleration and deceleration
Rthe outer area empties and the
inner area is gray: fluctuations in
speed
The three inner areas display the current driving

style and light up green as a result of a particu-
larly economical driving style. Depending on the
driving situation, up to two areas may light up
simultaneously.
At the beginning of the journey, the three outer
areas are empty and fill up as a result of eco-
nomical driving. A higher level indicates a more
economical driving style. If the three outer areas
are completely filled at the same time, the driver
has adopted the most economical driving style
for the selected settings and prevailing condi-
tions. The ECO display border lights up.
The ECO display does not indicate the actual fuel
consumption. The additionally achieved range
displayed under Bonus from start does not
indicate a fixed consumption reduction.
Driving tips 135
In addition to driving style, the actual consump- helps you to avoid overheating the brakes and
tion is affected by other factors, such as: wearing them out excessively.
RLoad When you take advantage of engine braking, it
RTire pressure is possible that a drive wheel will not rotate for
some time, e.g. on a slippery road surface.
RCold start
This could cause damage to the drive train.
RChoice of route This type of damage is not covered by the
RActive electrical consumers Mercedes-Benz warranty.
These factors are not included in the ECO dis- Briefly depressing the accelerator pedal on
Driving and parking

play. downhill gradients while the manual drive pro-
An economical driving style specially requires gram M is temporarily activated: the automatic
driving at moderate engine speeds. transmission may switch to the last active auto-
Achieving a higher value in the categories matic drive program E or S. The automatic trans-
"Acceleration" and "Constant": mission may shift to a higher gear. This can
reduce the engine's braking effect.
Robserve the gearshift recommendations.
Rdrive the vehicle in drive program C or E
Heavy and light loads
(vehicles with a DYNAMIC SELECT button).
On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. on the G WARNING
highway, only the outer area for "constant" will
change. If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while
The ECO display summarizes the driving style driving, the braking system can overheat. This
from the start of the journey to its completion. increases the stopping distance and can even
Therefore, there are more marked changes in cause the braking system to fail. There is a
the outer areas at the start of a journey. On lon- risk of an accident.
ger journeys, there are fewer changes. For more Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never
marked changes, perform a manual rest
(Y page 169). depress the brake pedal and the accelerator
pedal at the same time.
For more information on the ECO display, see
(Y page 168).
! Depressing the brake pedal constantly
results in excessive and premature wear to
the brake pads.
Braking
If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy
Important safety notes load, do not stop the vehicle immediately. Drive
on for a short while. This allows the airflow to
G WARNING cool the brakes more quickly.
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
an attempt to increase the engine's braking Wet roads
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain
There is an increased danger of skidding and without braking, there may be a delayed reac-
accidents. tion from the brakes when braking for the first
time. This may also occur after the vehicle has
Do not shift down for additional engine brak- been washed or driven through deep water.
ing on a slippery road surface.
You have to depress the brake pedal more
firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the
Downhill gradients vehicle in front.
After driving on a wet road or having the vehicle
! On long and steep gradients, you must washed, brake firmly while paying attention to
reduce the load on the brakes by shifting to a the traffic conditions. This will warm up the
lower gear in good time. This allows you to brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly
take advantage of engine braking. For this you and protecting them against corrosion.
must first activate manual gearshifting. This
Z
136 Driving tips
Limited braking performance on salt- If the brake system has only been subject to
treated roads moderate loads, you should test the functional-
ity of your brakes at regular intervals.
If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt resi- You can find a description of Brake Assist (BAS)
due may form on the brake discs and brake on (Y page 57).
pads. This can result in a significantly longer
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only have
braking distance.
brake pads/linings installed on your vehicle
RIn order to prevent any salt build-up, apply the which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz
brakes occasionally while paying attention to vehicles or which correspond to an equivalent
Driving and parking
the traffic conditions. quality standard. Brake pads/linings which have

RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the not been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles
beginning and end of a journey. or which are not of an equivalent quality could
RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle affect your vehicle's operating safety.
ahead. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use
brake fluid that has been specially approved for
Servicing the brakes your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which corre-
sponds to an equivalent quality standard. Brake
! The brake fluid level may be too low, if: fluid which has not been approved for
Rif the red brake warning lamp lights up in Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which is not of an
the instrument cluster and equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's
operating safety.
Ryou hear a warning tone while the engine is
running
Checking brake lining thickness
Observe additional warning messages in the
multifunction display. You can measure the break pad/lining thick-
The brake fluid level may be too low due to ness using a test gage. Color-coding (green or
brake pad wear or leaking brake lines. red) on the test gage allows you to determine
Have the brake system checked immediately. whether the brake pad/lining thickness is still
Consult a qualified specialist workshop to sufficient. The test gage is in the vehicle docu-
arrange this. ment wallet in the glove box.
! A function or performance test should only

be carried out on a 2-axle dynamometer. If
you wish to operate the vehicle on such a
dynamometer, please consult a qualified spe-
cialist workshop in advance. You could oth-
erwise damage the drive train or the brake
system.
! As the ESP® system operates automatically,
the engine and the ignition must be switched
off (the SmartKey must be in position u or
1 in the ignition lock), if the electric parking
brake is tested on a braking dynamometer
(maximum 10 seconds).
Braking triggered automatically by ESP® may
cause severe damage to the brake system.
All checks and maintenance work on the brake
system must be carried out at a qualified spe-
Front wheel
cialist workshop.
Have brake pads installed and brake fluid
replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
Driving tips 137
For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or in

conditions in which hydroplaning may occur,
you must drive in the following manner:
Rlower your speed
Ravoid ruts
Ravoid sudden steering movements
Rbrake carefully
Driving and parking

Driving on flooded roads
! Do not drive through flooded areas. Check
the depth of any water before driving through
it. Drive slowly through standing water. Oth-
erwise, water could enter the vehicle interior
or engine compartment. It can then damage
the engine's or automatic transmission's
electronic components. It can also be sucked
Rear wheel in by the engine's air intake connection and
cause engine damage.
X Bring the vehicle and wheels into a suitable
position so that you can attach test gage A.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away
(Y page 129). Winter driving
X Engage park position P. G WARNING
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
X Place test gage A between the wheel's
an attempt to increase the engine's braking
spokes on brake pad/lining =.
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
X Hold test gage A vertically on brake disc :
There is an increased danger of skidding and
and slide measuring pin ; onto brake
disc :. accidents.
X Check which color field ? the arrow on Do not shift down for additional engine brak-
measuring pin ; is pointing to. ing on a slippery road surface.
Green: the brake pad/lining thickness is suf-
ficient. G DANGER
Red: the brake pad/lining thickness is not If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate
sufficient. Have the brake pads/lining ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the
To avoid an inaccurate measurement: vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle
Rmake sure you position the wheels suitably becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of
Rdo not put the measuring pin on a recess in fatal injury.
the brake disc If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating
running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area
around the vehicle are clear of snow. To
Driving on wet roads ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a
Aquaplaning window on the side of the vehicle that is not
facing into the wind.
If the road surface is wet, aquaplaning may
occur depending on water level, speed and tire Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified
tread depth. specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
Z
138 Driving systems
Drive particularly carefully on slippery road sur- The speed indicated in the speedometer may
faces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and differ slightly from the speed stored.
braking maneuvers. Do not use cruise control or
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC. Important safety notes
If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be
stopped when moving at low speed: If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise con-
trol can neither reduce the risk of an accident
X Shift the transmission to position i. nor override the laws of physics. Cruise control
X Try to bring the vehicle under control using cannot take into account the road, traffic and
Driving and parking
corrective steering. weather conditions. Cruise control is only an

The outside temperature indicator is not aid. You are responsible for the distance to the
designed to serve as an ice-warning device and vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. good time and for staying in your lane.
Changes in the outside temperature are dis- Do not use cruise control:
played after a short delay. Rin road and traffic conditions which do not
Indicated temperatures just above the freezing allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in
point do not guarantee that the road surface is heavy traffic or on winding roads
free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-
wooded areas or on bridges. erating could cause the drive wheels to lose
You should pay special attention to road condi- traction and the vehicle could then skid
tions when temperatures are around freezing Rin poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or
point. snow
For more information on driving with snow If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
chains, see (Y page 272). driver of the speed stored.
For more information on driving with summer
tires, see (Y page 271). Cruise control lever
Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" sec-
tion (Y page 271).
Driving systems
Cruise control
General notes
Cruise control maintains a constant road speed
for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid
exceeding the set speed. On long and steep
downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is : Activates or increases speed
laden, you must select a low gear in good time.
; Activates or reduces speed
You need to shift manually using the steering
wheel paddle shifters beforehand. By doing so, = Deactivates cruise control
you will make use of the braking effect of the ? Activates at the current speed/last stored
engine. This relieves the load on the brake sys- speed
tem and prevents the brakes from overheating When you activate cruise control, the stored
and wearing too quickly. speed is shown in the multifunction display for
When the engine is running, you can use the five seconds.
cruise control lever to limit the speed to any
speed between 20 mph (30 km/h) and the tech-
nically permitted maximum speed of the vehicle.
Use cruise control if road and traffic conditions
make it appropriate to maintain a steady speed
for a prolonged period.
Driving systems 139
Activation conditions Setting a speed

To activate cruise control, all of the following Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment
activation conditions must be fulfilled: until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to
Rthe electric parking brake must be released. the speed set.
RESP® must be active, but not intervening. X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-
ments (10 km/h increments): briefly press
Rthe transmission must be in position h.
the cruise control lever up : past the pres-
sure point for a higher speed, or down ; for
Driving and parking

Storing, maintaining and calling up a a lower speed.
speed X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-
Storing and maintaining the current the cruise control lever up : to the pressure
speed point for a higher speed, or down ; for a
You can store the current speed if you are driv- lower speed.
ing faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).
X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.
i Cruise control is not deactivated if you
depress the accelerator pedal. For example, if
X Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or you accelerate briefly to overtake, cruise con-
down ;. trol adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. speed stored after you have finished overtak-
Cruise control is activated. The vehicle auto- ing.
matically maintains the stored speed.
i Cruise control may be unable to maintain Deactivating cruise control
the stored speed on uphill gradients. The
stored speed is resumed when the gradient There are several ways to deactivate cruise con-
evens out. Cruise control maintains the trol:
stored speed on downhill gradients by auto- X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards
matically applying the brakes. =.
Storing the current speed or calling up the or
last stored speed X Brake.
G WARNING Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:

Rthe vehicle is secured with the electric park-
If you call up the stored speed and it differs
ing brake
from the current speed, the vehicle acceler-
Ryou are driving at less than 20 mph (30 km/h)
ates or decelerates. If you do not know the
RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®
stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or
Ryou shift the transmission to position i
brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-
while driving
dent.
If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a
Pay attention to the road and traffic condi- warning tone. You will see the Cruise Con‐
tions before calling up the stored speed. If you trol Off message in the multifunction display
do not know the stored speed, store the for approximately five seconds.
desired speed again.
i When you switch off the engine, the last
speed stored is cleared.
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you ?.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
The first time cruise control is activated, it
stores the current speed or regulates the
speed of the vehicle to the previously stored
speed.
Z
140 Driving systems
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC i Canada only: This device complies with

RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
General notes subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC regulates the speed and
and automatically helps you maintain the dis-
tance to the vehicle detected in front. Vehicles 2. This device must accept any interference
are detected with the aid of the radar sensor received, including interference that may
system. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC brakes auto- cause undesired operation of the device.
Removal, tampering, or altering of the device
Driving and parking
matically to avoid exceeding the set speed or to

maintain the designated distance from the vehi- will void any warranties, and is not permitted.
cle in front. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects that there is approved way.
a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually Any unauthorized modification to this device
and acoustically. Without your intervention, Dis- could void the user's authority to operate the
tance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot prevent a colli- equipment.
sion. An intermittent warning tone will then
sound and the distance warning lamp will light Important safety notes
up in the instrument cluster. Brake immediately
in order to increase the distance to the vehicle in G WARNING
front or take evasive action provided it is safe to
do so. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC does not react to:
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC operates in the range Rpeople or animals
between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph Rstationary objects on the road, e.g. stopped
(200 km/h). or parked vehicles
Change into a lower gear in good time on long
Roncoming vehicles and crossing traffic
and steep downhill gradients. This is especially
important if the vehicle is laden. By doing so, you As a result, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may
will make use of the braking effect of the engine. neither give warnings nor intervene in such
This relieves the load on the brake system and situations. There is a risk of an accident.
prevents the brakes from overheating and wear-
ing too quickly. Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
Do not use Distance Pilot DISTRONIC on roads uation and be ready to brake.
with steep gradients.
For Distance Pilot DISTRONIC to assist you G WARNING
when driving, the radar sensor system must be Distance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot always
operational. clearly identify other road users and complex
Since Distance Pilot DISTRONIC transmits radar traffic situations.
waves, it can resemble the radar detectors of
the responsible authorities. You can refer to the In such cases, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may:
relevant chapter in the Operator's Manual if Rgive an unnecessary warning and then
questions are asked about this. brake the vehicle
i USA only: This device has been approved by Rneither give a warning nor intervene
the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The Raccelerate or brake unexpectedly
radar sensor is intended for use in an auto-
motive radar system only. Removal, tamper- There is a risk of an accident.
ing, or altering of the device will void any war- Continue to drive carefully and be ready to
ranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do brake, especially if Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
not tamper with, alter, or use in any non- warns you.
approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user's authority to operate the
equipment.
Driving systems 141
G WARNING If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC no longer detects a

vehicle in front, it may unexpectedly accelerate
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle to the speed stored.
with up to 50% of the maximum possible This speed may:
deceleration. If this deceleration is not suffi-
Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter lane or
cient, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC alerts you
an exit lane
with a visual and acoustic warning. There is a
Rbe so high when driving in the right-hand lane
risk of an accident. that you overtake vehicles in the left-hand
Driving and parking

Apply the brakes yourself in these situations lane
and try to take evasive action. Rbe so high in the left lane that you pass vehi-
cles driving in the right lane
! When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or the If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
HOLD function is activated, the vehicle driver of the speed stored.
brakes automatically in certain situations.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate Cruise control lever
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and the HOLD
function in the following or similar situations:
Rwhen towing the vehicle
Rin the car wash
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Distance

Pilot DISTRONIC can neither reduce the risk of
an accident nor override the laws of physics.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot take into
account road, weather or traffic conditions. Dis-
tance Pilot DISTRONIC is only an aid. You are
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time
and for staying in your lane. : Stores the current speed or a higher speed
Do not use Distance Pilot DISTRONIC: ; Stores the current speed or a lower speed
Rin road and traffic conditions which do not = Deactivates Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in ? Stores the current speed or calls up the last
heavy traffic or on winding roads stored speed
Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel- A Sets a specified minimum distance
erating could cause the drive wheels to lose
traction and the vehicle could then skid Activating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
heavy rain or snow Activation conditions
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may not detect nar- ! When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or the
row vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or HOLD function is activated, the vehicle
vehicles driving on a different line. brakes automatically in certain situations.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
impaired if: Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and the HOLD
Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else function in the following or similar situations:
covering the sensors Rwhen towing the vehicle
Rthere is snow or heavy rain
Rin the car wash
Rthere is interference by other radar sources
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-
ple, in parking garages
Z
142 Driving systems
To activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC, the fol- do not know the stored speed, store the
lowing conditions must be fulfilled: desired speed again.
Rthe engine must be started. It may take up to
two minutes of driving before Distance Pilot X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
DISTRONIC is ready for use. you ?.
Rthe electric parking brake must be released. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
RESP® must be active, but not intervening. The first time Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is
RParking Pilot must not be activated.
activated, it stores the current speed or reg-
ulates the speed of the vehicle to the previ-
Driving and parking
Rthe transmission must be in position h.

ously stored speed.
Rthe driver's door must be closed when you
shift from j to h or your seat belt must be Pulling away and driving
fastened. X If you want to pull away with Distance
Rthe front-passenger door must be closed. Pilot DISTRONIC: remove your foot from the
Rthe vehicle must not skid. brake pedal.
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
Activating you ?.
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards or
you ?, up : or down ;.
X If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated:
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated.
accelerate briefly.
X Keep the cruise control lever pressed up : or
Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed
down ; until the desired speed is set. to that of the vehicle in front. If no vehicle is
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. detected in front, your vehicle accelerates to
Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the the set speed.
vehicle in front, but only up to the desired
stored speed. The vehicle can also pull away when it is facing
an unidentified obstacle or is driving on a differ-
i If you do not fully release the accelerator ent line from another vehicle. The vehicle then
pedal, the Distance Pilot Suspended mes- brakes automatically. Be ready to brake at all
sage appears in the multifunction display. The times.
set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in If there is no vehicle in front, Distance Pilot
front will then not be maintained. You will be DISTRONIC operates in the same way as cruise
driving at the speed you determine by the control.
position of the accelerator pedal.
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a slower-
You can also activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC moving vehicle in front, it brakes your vehicle. In
when stationary. The lowest speed that can be this way, the distance you have selected is main-
set is 20 mph (30 km/h). tained.
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a faster-
Driving with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC moving vehicle in front, it increases the driving
speed. However, the vehicle is only accelerated
Activating at the current speed/last up to the speed you have stored.
stored speed
i Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated
G WARNING when you depress the brake, except when the
If you call up the stored speed and it differs vehicle is stationary.
from the current speed, the vehicle acceler- Selecting the drive program
ates or decelerates. If you do not know the
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC supports a sporty
stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or driving style when you select the S drive pro-
brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci- gram (Y page 124) or the manual drive program
dent. (Y page 125). Acceleration behind the vehicle in
Pay attention to the road and traffic condi- front or to the set speed is then noticeably more
tions before calling up the stored speed. If you dynamic. If you have selected the E driving pro-
gram, the vehicle accelerates more gently. This
Driving systems 143
setting is recommended in stop-and-start traf- Setting a speed

fic.
Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment
Changing lanes until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to
If when driving on multilane roads you wish to the speed set.
change to the overtaking lane, Distance Pilot X Press the cruise control lever up : for a
DISTRONIC supports you if: higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.
Ryou are driving faster than 45 mph (70 km/h) X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC is maintaining the
Driving and parking

distance to a vehicle in front the cruise control lever up : or down ; to
the pressure point.
Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signal
The last stored speed increases or decreases
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC does not currently in 1 mph (1 km/h) increments.
detect a danger of collision X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-
If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle is ments (10 km/h increments): briefly press
accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted if the cruise control lever up : or down ;
changing lanes takes too long or if the distance beyond the pressure point.
between your vehicle and the vehicle in front The last stored speed increases or decreases
becomes too small. in 5 mph (10 km/h) increments.
Stopping i Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is not deactivated
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects that the if you depress the accelerator pedal. If you
vehicle in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle accelerate to overtake, Distance Pilot
until it is stationary. DISTRONIC adjusts the vehicle's speed to the
Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains sta- last speed stored after you have finished over-
tionary and you do not need to depress the taking.
brake.
Setting a specified minimum distance
i After a time, the electric parking brake
secures the vehicle and relieves the service You can set the specified minimum distance for
brake. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC by varying the time
span between one and two seconds. With this
i Depending on the specified minimum dis- function you can set the minimum distance that
tance, your vehicle will come to a standstill at
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC maintains to the vehi-
a sufficient distance behind the vehicle in
cle in front, dependent on vehicle speed. You
front. The specified minimum distance is set
can see this distance in the multifunction dis-
using the control on the cruise control lever.
play (Y page 148).
When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated, The specified minimum distance can be
the transmission is shifted automatically to changed while Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is
position j if: switched on or off.
Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and the
driver's door is open.
i Make sure that you maintain the minimum
distance to the vehicle in front as required by
Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto- law. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front
matically switched off by the ECO start/stop if necessary.
function.
The electric parking brake secures the vehicle
automatically if Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is
activated when the vehicle is stationary and:
Ra system malfunction occurs.
Rthe power supply is insufficient.
If a malfunction occurs, the transmission may
also shift to position j automatically.
Z
144 Driving systems
DISTRONIC is not deactivated if you depress

the accelerator pedal.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is automatically deac-
tivated if:
Ryou engage the electric parking brake or if the
vehicle is automatically secured with the elec-
tric parking brake
RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®
Driving and parking
Rthe transmission is in position j, k or i

Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards you
in order to pull away and the front-passenger
X To increase: turn control = in direction ;. door or one of the rear doors is open
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC then maintains a Rthe vehicle is skidding
greater distance between your vehicle and Ryou switch on Parking Pilot
the vehicle in front.
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is automatically
X To decrease: turn control = in direction :.
deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. The
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC then maintains a Distance Pilot Off message appears in the
shorter distance between your vehicle and multifunction display for approximately five sec-
the vehicle in front. onds.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is also automatically
Deactivating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC deactivated when you activate DSR. The Ã
DSR symbol appears in the multifunction dis-
play.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC displays in

the instrument cluster
Displays in the speedometer
There are several ways to deactivate Distance

Pilot DISTRONIC:
X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-
wards :.
or
X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary
X Briefly press the cruise control lever for- When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC PLUS is activa-
wards :. ted and there are no vehicles detected in front,
or one or two segments ; in the set speed range
X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary
light up.
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a vehicle in
When you deactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC, front, segments ; between speed of the vehi-
the Distance Pilot Off message appears in cle in front = and stored speed : light up.
the multifunction display for approximately five
seconds. i For design reasons, the speed displayed in
the speedometer may differ slightly from the
i The last speed stored remains stored until speed set for Distance Pilot DISTRONIC.
you switch off the engine. Distance Pilot
Driving systems 145
Display when Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is function using the on-board computer
deactivated (Y page 173).
Vehicles with a black and white multifunc-
Display when Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is
tion display: you can select the distance dis-
play function using the on-board computer. activated
Vehicles with a color multifunction display: You will initially see the stored speed for about
in the Assistance menu of the on-board com- five seconds when you activate Distance Pilot
puter, you can select the assistance graphic. DISTRONIC.
Driving and parking

: Vehicle in front, if detected : Vehicle in front, if detected
; Distance indicator, current distance to the ; Specified minimum distance to the vehicle
vehicle in front in front; adjustable
= Specified minimum distance to the vehicle = Your vehicle
in front; adjustable ? Distance Pilot DISTRONIC active (text only
? Your vehicle appears when the cruise control lever is
actuated)
X Vehicles with color multifunction display:
select the Assistance Graphic function X Vehicles with color multifunction display:
using the on-board computer (Y page 173). select the Assistance Graphic function
using the on-board computer (Y page 173).
Distance display in vehicles with a black and white

multifunction display Distance display in vehicles with a black and white
: Vehicle in front, if detected multifunction display
: Distance Pilot DISTRONIC activated
; Distance indicator, current distance to the
vehicle in front ; Your vehicle
= Specified minimum distance to the vehicle = Specified minimum distance to the vehicle
in front; adjustable in front; adjustable
? Your vehicle ? Vehicle in front, if detected
X Vehicles with black and white multifunc- X Vehicles with black and white multifunc-
tion display: select the Distance Display tion display: select the Distance Display
Z
146 Driving systems
function using the on-board computer HOLD function

(Y page 173).
General notes
Tips for driving with Distance Pilot The HOLD function can assist the driver in the
DISTRONIC following situations:
Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep slopes
General notes
Rwhen maneuvering on steep slopes
Pay particular attention in the following traffic
Rwhen waiting in traffic
Driving and parking
situations:
The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver
RCornering, entering and exiting a bend: the
having to depress the brake pedal.
ability of Distance Pilot DISTRONIC to detect
vehicles during cornering is limited. Your vehi- The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD
cle may brake unexpectedly or late. function deactivated when you depress the
accelerator pedal to pull away.
RDriving on a different line: Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC may not detect vehicles which are
not driving in the middle of their lane. The dis- Important safety notes
tance to the vehicle in front will be too short.
ROther vehicles changing lanes: Distance Pilot
G WARNING
DISTRONIC has not detected the vehicle cut- If the vehicle is only braked using the HOLD
ting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will be function, the vehicle may roll away in the fol-
too short. lowing situations when you leave the vehicle:
RNarrow vehicles: Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
Rif there is a malfunction in the system or in
has not yet detected the vehicle in front on
the edge of the road because of its narrow the voltage supply
width. The distance to the vehicle in front will Rif the HOLD function is deactivated by
be too short. depressing the accelerator pedal or brake
RObstacles and stationary vehicles: Distance pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant
Pilot DISTRONIC does not brake for obstacles
Rif the electrical system in the engine com-
or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the
detected vehicle turns a corner and an obsta- partment, the battery or the fuses are tam-
cle or stationary vehicle is then revealed, Dis- pered with or the battery is disconnected
tance Pilot DISTRONIC will not brake for There is a risk of an accident.
them.
Always deactivate the HOLD function and
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC may mistakenly
detect vehicles that are crossing your lane. If secure the vehicle against rolling away before
you activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC in the you leave it.
following situations, the vehicle could pull
away unintentionally: ! When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or the
- At traffic lights with crossing traffic, for HOLD function is activated, the vehicle
example. brakes automatically in certain situations.
- With a vehicle ahead on the other side of an To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
intersection and the HOLD function active. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and the HOLD
In such situations, brake if necessary. Distance
Pilot DISTRONIC will then be deactivated. Rwhen towing the vehicle
Rin the car wash
Deactivating the HOLD function (Y page 147).

Driving systems 147
Activation conditions i After a time, the electric parking brake

secures the vehicle and relieves the service
You can activate the HOLD function if: brake.
Rthe vehicle is stationary
When the HOLD function is activated, the trans-
Rthe engine is running or if it has been auto- mission is automatically shifted to position j
matically switched off by the ECO start/stop if:
function
Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and the
Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt is
driver's door is open
fastened
Driving and parking

Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-
Rthe electric parking brake is released
matically switched off by the ECO start/stop
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated function
Rthe transmission is in position h, k or i The electric parking brake secures the vehicle
on vehicles with automatic transmission automatically if the HOLD function is activated
when the vehicle is stationary and:
Activating the HOLD function Ra system malfunction occurs
Rthe power supply is insufficient
Start-off Assist
G WARNING
X Make sure that the activation conditions are If you use start-off assist, individual wheels
met. may start to spin and the vehicle may skid. If
X Depress the brake pedal.
ESP® is deactivated, there is a greater danger
X Quickly depress the brake pedal further
of skidding and having an accident. Make sure
until : appears in the multifunction display.
The HOLD function is activated. You can that no persons or obstacles are in the vicinity
release the brake pedal. of the vehicle.
i If depressing the brake pedal the first time Start-off assist enables optimum acceleration
does not activate the HOLD function, wait from a standstill. For this, a suitably high-grip
briefly and then try again. road surface is required and the vehicle and tires
must be in good working order.
Deactivating the HOLD function Do not activate start-off assist on public roads.
Observe the safety notes on driving safety sys-
The HOLD function is deactivated automatically tems (Y page 56).
if:
Be sure to read the safety notes and information
Ryou accelerate. On vehicles with automatic on ESP® (Y page 60).
transmission: only when the transmission is in
position h or k.
Activating start-off assist
Rthe transmission is in position j on vehicles
with automatic transmission. X Deactivate ESP® (Y page 173).
Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a cer- X Turn the steering wheel to the straight-ahead
tain amount of pressure until : disappears position.
from the multifunction display. X Firmly depress the brake pedal with your left
Ryou activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC. foot and keep it depressed.
Ryou secure the vehicle using the electric park- X Shift the transmission to position h.
ing brake. X Use the DYNAMIC SELECT button to select
the S drive program (Y page 120).
Z
148 Driving systems
X Quickly depress the accelerator pedal fully. DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL

X Take your foot off the brake, but keep the
accelerator pedal depressed. General notes
The vehicle pulls away at maximum acceler-
ation. DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL offers improved
driving comfort and continuously controls the
i Activate ESP® as soon as the acceleration calibration of the dampers. The damping char-
process has ended. ESP® will otherwise not acteristics adapt to the current operating and
be able to stabilize the vehicle if the vehicle driving situation.
starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin.
Driving and parking
The damping is tuned individually to each wheel

Canceling start-off assist and depends on:
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty
X Reactivate ESP®. Rthe road surface conditions
Rthe drive program selected
The drive program can be set using the
4MATIC DYNAMIC SELECT button (Y page 120).
! Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised. Selecting Comfort mode
This may damage the differential. Damage of
this sort is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz In the Comfort drive program, the driving char-
Limited Warranty. All wheels must remain acteristics of your vehicle are more comforta-
either on the ground or be fully raised. ble. Therefore, select this drive program if you
Observe the instructions for towing the vehi- prefer a more comfortable driving style. Also
cle with all wheels in full contact with the select the Comfort drive program when driving
ground. fast on straight roads, e.g. on straight stretches
4MATIC, together with ESP®, improves the trac- of highway.
tion of your vehicle whenever a drive wheel X Press DYNAMIC SELECT button (Y page 120)
spins due to insufficient grip. as many times as necessary until the Com-
If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can fort drive program is selected.
neither reduce the risk of accident nor override
the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take
account of road, weather and traffic conditions.
Selecting Sport mode
4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible for The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in
the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle the Sport drive program ensures even better
speed, for braking in good time and for staying in contact with the road. Select this drive program
your lane. when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on
If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip: winding country roads.
ROnly depress the accelerator pedal as far as X Press DYNAMIC SELECT button (Y page 120)
necessary when pulling away. as many times as necessary until the Sport
RAccelerate less when driving. drive program is selected.
i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum
effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if you
use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow chains Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
if necessary.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic
parking aid with ultrasound. It monitors the area
around your vehicle using six sensors in the
front bumper and six sensors in the rear
bumper. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC visually
and audibly indicates the distance between your
vehicle and an object.
Driving systems 149
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is

not a replacement for your attention to your
immediate surroundings. You are always
responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and
exiting a parking space. Make sure that there
are no persons, animals or objects in the maneu-
vering area when you are maneuvering or park-
ing.
! When parking, pay particular attention to
Driving and parking

objects above or below the sensors, such as
flower pots or trailer drawbars. Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects
when they are in the immediate vicinity of the : Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side
vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or the (example)
objects. The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or slush.
The sensors may not detect snow and other They can otherwise not function correctly. Clean
objects that absorb ultrasonic waves. the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch
Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car or damage them (Y page 248).
wash, the compressed-air brakes of a truck or
Range
a pneumatic drill could cause Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC to malfunction.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not function
correctly on uneven terrain.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated auto-
matically when you:
Rswitch on the ignition
Rshift the transmission to position h, k or
i
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated at
speeds above 11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactiva-
ted at lower speeds.
Range of the sensors

General notes
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not take into
account obstacles located:
Rbelow the detection range, such as persons,
animals or objects : Detection range of front sensors
Rabove the detection range, e.g. overhanging ; Detection range of rear sensors
loads, tail sections or loading ramps of trucks Front sensors
Center Approx. 40 in (approx.
100 cm)
Corners Approx. 24 in (approx.
60 cm)
Z
150 Driving systems
Rear sensors direction in which the vehicle is rolling deter-

mine which warning display is active when the
Center Approx. 48 in (approx. engine is running.
120 cm)
Transmission posi- Warning display
Corners Approx. 32 in (approx. tion
80 cm)
h Front area activated
Minimum distance k, i or the vehicle Rear and front areas
Driving and parking
is rolling backwards activated

Center Approx. 8 in (approx. 20 cm)
j No areas activated
Corners Approx. 6 in (approx. 15 cm)
One or more segments light up as the vehicle
If an obstacle is detected within this range, the approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehi-
relevant warning displays light up and a warning cle's distance from the obstacle. In addition,
tone sounds. If the distance falls below the min- warning tones are issued.
imum, the distance may no longer be shown. When the distance to the obstacle is sufficient,
you will hear an intermittent warning tone. The
Warning displays shorter the distance to the obstacle, the shorter
the frequency of the intermittent warning tones
becomes. When the minimum distance is
reached, you hear a continuous warning tone.
Deactivating or activating Parking

Assist PARKTRONIC
: Segments on the left-hand side of the vehi-

cle
; Segments on the right-hand side of the vehi-
cle
= Segments showing operational readiness
The warning displays show the distance
between the sensors and the obstacle. The : Indicator lamp
warning display for the front area is located on ; Deactivates or activates Parking Assist
the dashboard above the center air vents. The PARKTRONIC
warning display for the rear area is located on If indicator lamp : is lit, Parking Assist
the headliner in the rear compartment. PARKTRONIC is deactivated.
The warning display for each side of the vehicle
is divided into five yellow and two red segments. i Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automati-
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational if yel- cally activated when you turn the SmartKey to
low segments showing operational readiness = position 2 in the ignition lock.
light up.
The gear lever position or the transmission posi-
tion of the automatic transmission and the
Driving systems 151
Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Only the red segments in Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has been deacti-
the Parking Assist vated.
PARKTRONIC warning X If problems persist, have Parking Assist PARKTRONIC checked at a
displays are lit. You also qualified specialist workshop.
hear a warning tone for
Driving and parking

approximately two sec-
onds.
Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC is then
deactivated and the indi-
cator lamp on the
PARKTRONIC button
lights up.
Only the red segments in The Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is inter-
the Parking Assist ference.
PARKTRONIC warning X Clean the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 248).
displays are lit. Parking
X Switch the ignition back on.
Assist PARKTRONIC is
then deactivated. The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultra-
sound waves.
X Check to see if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC works at a different
location.
Parking Pilot G WARNING

While parking or pulling out of a parking
General notes
space, the vehicle swings out and can drive
Parking Pilot is an electronic parking aid with onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could
ultrasound. It measures the road on both sides result in a collision with another road user.
of the vehicle. A parking symbol indicates a suit- There is a risk of an accident.
able parking space. Active steering intervention
and brake application can assist you during Pay attention to other road users. Stop the
parking and when exiting a parking space. Park- vehicle if necessary or cancel the Parking Pilot
ing Assist PARKTRONIC is also available parking procedure.
(Y page 148).
! If they cannot be avoided, drive over obsta-
Important safety notes cles such as curbs slowly and at an obtuse
angle. Otherwise, you may damage the
Parking Pilot is only an aid. It is not a replace- wheels or tires.
ment for your attention to your immediate sur-
roundings. You are always responsible for safe Parking Pilot may also display spaces not suita-
maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking ble for parking, e.g.:
space. Make sure that there are no persons, RWhere parking or stopping is prohibited
animals or objects in the maneuvering area RIn front of driveways or entrances and exits
when you are maneuvering or parking. ROn unsuitable surfaces
When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactiva-
ted, Parking Pilot is also unavailable.
Z
152 Driving systems
Parking tips: Parking Pilot does not assist you parking in

ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the parking spaces parallel or perpendicular to the direction
space as possible. of travel if:
RParking spaces that are littered or overgrown Rthe parking space is on a curb
might be identified or measured incorrectly. Rthe system reads the parking space as being
RParking spaces that are partially occupied by blocked, for example by foliage or grass pav-
trailer drawbars might not be identified as ing blocks
such or be measured incorrectly. Rthe area is too small for the vehicle to maneu-
Driving and parking
RSnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking ver into

space being measured inaccurately. Rthe parking space is bordered by an obstacle,
RPay attention to the warning messages of e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC during the park- For further information on the detection range
ing procedure (Y page 150). (Y page 149).
RYou can intervene to correct the steering pro-
cedure at any time. Parking Pilot will then be
G WARNING
canceled. If there are objects above the detection range:
RWhen transporting a load that protrudes from RParking Pilot may steer in too early
your vehicle, you must not use Parking Pilot.
Rthe vehicle may not stop in front of these
RNever use Parking Pilot when snow chains are
mounted. objects
RMake sure that the tire pressures are always You may cause a collision as a result. There is
correct. This has a direct influence on the a risk of an accident.
parking characteristics of the vehicle. If objects are located above the detection
Use Parking Pilot for parking spaces that are: range, stop and deactivate Parking Pilot.
Rthat are parallel or at right-angles to the direc-
tion of travel
Ron straight roads, not bends
Ron the same level as the road, e.g. not on the
pavement
Detecting parking spaces

Objects located above the detection range of : Detected parking space on the left
Parking Pilot will not be detected when the park- ; Parking symbol
ing space is measured. These are not taken into
= Detected parking space on the right
account when the parking procedure is calcula-
ted, e.g. overhanging loads, truck overhangs or Parking Pilot is activated automatically when
loading ramps. Parking Pilot may therefore driving forward. The system is operational at
guide you into the parking space too early. speeds of up to approximately 22 mph
Parking Pilot does not assist you parking in (35 km/h). While in operation, the system inde-
spaces perpendicular to the direction of travel if: pendently locates and measures parking spaces
on both sides of the vehicle.
Rtwo parking spaces are located directly next
to one another Parking Pilot will only detect parking spaces:
Rthe parking space is directly next to a low Rthat are parallel or at right-angles to the direc-
obstacle such as a low curb tion of travel
Ryou forward-park Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel and
at least 59 in (1.5 m) wide
Driving systems 153
Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel and X Stop the vehicle when the parking space sym-
at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) longer than your vehi- bol shows the desired parking space in the
cle instrument cluster.
Rat right angles to the direction of travel and at X Shift the transmission to position k.
least 39.5 in (1.0 m) wider than your vehicle The Start Parking Pilot? Yes: OK No:
When driving at speeds below 19 mph % message appears in the multifunction
(30 km/h), you will see parking symbol ; as a display.
status indicator in the instrument cluster. When X To cancel the procedure: press the %
a parking space has been detected, an arrow button on the multifunction steering wheel or
Driving and parking

towards the right or the left also appears. Park- pull away.
ing Pilot only displays parking spaces on the or
front-passenger side as standard. Parking X To park using Parking Pilot: press the a
spaces on the driver's side are displayed as
soon as the turn signal on the driver's side is button on the multifunction steering wheel.
activated. When parking on the driver's side, The Parking Pilot Active Accelerate
this must remain activated until you confirm the and Brake Observe Surroundings mes-
use of Parking Pilot by pressing the a button sage appears in the multifunction display.
on the multifunction steering wheel. The system X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.
automatically determines whether the parking X Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake at all
space is parallel or at right-angles to the direc- times. When backing up, drive at a speed
tion of travel. below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). Oth-
A parking space is displayed while you are driv- erwise, Parking Pilot is canceled immediately.
ing past it, and until you are approximately 50 ft Parking Pilot brakes the vehicle to a standstill
(15 m) away from it. when the vehicle approaches the rear border
of the parking space.
Parking Maneuvering may be required in tight parking
spaces.
G WARNING The Parking Pilot Active Select D
If you leave the vehicle when it is only being Observe Surroundings message appears in
braked by Parking Pilot, it could roll away if: the multifunction display.
X Shift the transmission to position h while
Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in
the vehicle is stationary.
the voltage supply. Parking Pilot immediately steers in the other
Rthe electrical system in the engine com- direction.
partment, the battery or the fuses are tam- The Parking Pilot Active Accelerate
pered with. and Brake Observe Surroundings mes-
Rthe battery is disconnected. sage appears in the multifunction display.
Rthe vehicle is accelerated, e.g. by a vehicle
i You will achieve the best results by waiting
for the steering procedure to complete before
occupant. pulling away.
There is a risk of an accident. X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all
Before leaving the vehicle, always secure it times.
against rolling away. Parking Pilot brakes the vehicle to a standstill
when the vehicle approaches the front border
i If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC detects of the parking space.
obstacles, Parking Pilot brakes automatically Maneuvering may be required in tight parking
whilst the vehicle is being parked. You are spaces.
responsible for braking in good time. The Parking Pilot Active Select R
Observe Surroundings message appears in
the multifunction display.
As soon as the parking procedure is complete,
the Parking Pilot Finished message
Z
154 Driving systems
appears and a warning tone sounds. The vehicle while the vehicle is exiting the parking space.
is now parked. You are responsible for braking in good time.
The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver X Start the engine.
having to depress the brake pedal. The braking X Release the electric parking brake.
effect is canceled when you depress the accel-
X Switch on the turn signal in the direction you
erator pedal.
will drive out of the parking space.
Parking Pilot no longer supports you with steer-
X Shift the transmission to position h or k.
ing interventions and brake applications. When
Parking Pilot is finished, you must steer and The Start Parking Pilot? Yes: OK No:
Driving and parking
brake again yourself. Parking Assist % message appears in the multifunction

PARKTRONIC is still available. display.
X To cancel the procedure: press the %
Parking tips:
button on the multifunction steering wheel or
RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the park- pull away.
ing space after parking is dependent on vari-
or
ous factors. These include the position and
shape of the vehicles parked in front and X To exit a parking space using Parking
behind it and the conditions of the location. It Pilot: press the a button on the multi-
may be the case that Parking Pilot guides you function steering wheel.
too far into a parking space, or not far enough The Parking Pilot Active Accelerate
into it. In some cases, it may also lead you and Brake Observe Surroundings mes-
across or onto the curb. If necessary, you sage appears in the multifunction display.
should cancel the parking procedure with X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.
Parking Pilot. X Pull away, being ready to brake at all times. Do
RYou can also preselect transmission position not exceed a maximum speed of approx-
h. The vehicle redirects and does not drive imately 6 mph (10 km/h) when exiting a park-
as far into the parking space. Should the ing space. Otherwise, Parking Pilot is can-
transmission change take place too early, the celed immediately.
parking procedure is canceled. A sensible X Depending on the message or as required,
parking position can no longer be achieved shift the transmission to position h or k.
from this position. Parking Pilot immediately steers in the other
direction. The Parking Pilot Active
Exiting a parking space Accelerate and Brake Observe Sur‐
roundings message appears in the multi-
In order for Parking Pilot to support you when function display.
exiting the parking space:
i You will achieve the best results by waiting
Ryou need to have parked using Parking Pilot. for the steering procedure to complete before
Rthe border of the parking space must be high pulling away.
enough at the front and the rear. A curb stone If you back up after activation, the steering
is too small, for example. wheel is moved to the straight-ahead posi-
Rthe border of the parking space must not be tion.
too wide, as the position of the vehicle must X Drive forwards and reverse as prompted by
not exceed an angle of 45° to the starting the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning dis-
position as it is maneuvered into the parking plays, several times if necessary.
space.
Ra maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft
Once you have exited the parking space com-
pletely, the steering wheel is moved to the
(1.0 m) must be available.
straight-ahead position. You hear a tone and the
Parking Pilot can assist you with exiting a park- Parking Pilot Finished message appears in
ing space only if you have parked the vehicle the multifunction display. You will then have to
parallel to the direction of travel using Parking steer and merge into traffic on your own. Park-
Pilot. ing Assist PARKTRONIC is still available. You can
i If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC detects take over the steering before the vehicle has
obstacles, Parking Pilot brakes automatically exited the parking space completely. This is
Driving systems 155
useful, for example when you recognize that it is Rear view camera : is an optical parking and
already possible to pull out of the parking space. maneuvering aid. It shows the area behind your
vehicle with guide lines in the multimedia sys-
Canceling Parking Pilot tem display.
The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a
X Stop the movement of the multifunction mirror image, as in the rear view mirror.
steering wheel or steer yourself. Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 248).
Parking Pilot is canceled immediately. The
Parking Pilot Canceled message appears i The text shown in the multimedia system
Driving and parking

in the multifunction display. display depends on the language setting. The
or following are examples of rear view camera
X Press the PARKTRONIC button (Y page 150). messages in the multimedia system display.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is switched off
and Parking Pilot is immediately canceled. Important safety notes
The Parking Pilot Canceled message
appears in the multifunction display. The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a
replacement for your attention to your immedi-
Parking Pilot is canceled automatically when: ate surroundings. You are always responsible
Rthe electric parking brake is engaged for safe maneuvering and parking. Make sure
Rtransmission position j is selected
that there are no persons, animals or objects in
the maneuvering area when you are maneuver-
Rparking using Parking Pilot is no longer pos-
ing or parking.
sible
Under the following circumstances, the rear
Ryou are driving faster than 6 mph (10 km/h)
view camera will not function, or will function in
Ra wheel spins, ESP® intervenes or fails. In a limited manner:
such cases the ÷ warning lamp lights up in Rif the tailgate is open
the instrument cluster
Rin heavy rain, snow or fog
A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol dis-
Rat night or in very dark places
appears and the multifunction display shows the
Parking Pilot Canceled message. Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light
When Parking Pilot is canceled, you must steer Rif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED
and brake again yourself. lighting (the display may flicker)
If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle is Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,
braked to a standstill. To drive on, depress the e.g. when driving into a heated garage in win-
accelerator again. ter
Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed.
Observe the notes on cleaning
Rear view camera (Y page 248)
Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this
General notes case, have the camera position and setting
checked at a qualified specialist workshop
The field of vision and other functions of the rear
view camera may be restricted due to additional
accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g.
license plate holder, rear bicycle rack).
i The contrast of the display may be affected
by the sudden presence of sunlight or other
light sources, e.g. when exiting a garage. Pay
particular attention in this situation.
i If usability is severely restricted, e.g. due to
pixel errors, have the display repaired or
replaced.
Z
156 Driving systems
Activating/deactivating the rear view

camera
X To activate: make sure that the SmartKey is
in position 2 in the ignition lock.
X Make sure that the Activation by R gear
function is selected in the multimedia system;
see the Digital Operator's Manual.
X Engage reverse gear.
Driving and parking
The area behind the vehicle is shown with

guide lines in the multimedia system display.
The image from the rear view camera is avail-
able throughout the maneuvering process. : Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the
To deactivate: the rear view camera deacti- vehicle
vates if you shift the transmission to j or after ; White guide line without steering input –
driving forwards a short distance. vehicle width including the exterior mirrors
If the complete system fails, the inner segments (static)
of the warning display are shown in red. The = Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
indicator lamp on the PARKTRONIC button including the exterior mirrors, at the current
lights up. steering wheel angle (dynamic)
If the rear system fails: ? Yellow lane marking the course the tires will
Rthe rear segments are shown in red when take at the current steering wheel angle
reversing (dynamic)
Rthe rear segments are hidden when driving
forward
Messages in the multimedia system dis-

play
The rear view camera may show a distorted view
of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all.
The rear view camera does not show objects in
the following positions:
Rvery close to the rear bumper
Runder the rear bumper
A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
Rin the area immediately above the tailgate
imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-
handle
cle
! Objects not at ground level may appear to B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)
be further away than they actually are, e.g.: C Bumper
Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle D Red guide line at a distance of approximately
Rthe drawbar of a trailer 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle
Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
Rthe rear section of an HGV
Ra slanted post
Use the guidelines only for orientation.
Approach objects no further than the bottom-
most guideline.
Driving systems 157
= Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-
cle
? Red guide line at a distance of approximately
12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle
X Make sure that the rear view camera is
switched on (Y page 156).
The lane and the guide lines are shown.
Driving and parking

X With the help of white guide line :, check
whether the vehicle will fit into the parking
space.
: Front warning display X Using white guide line : as a guide, carefully
; Additional measurement operational readi- back up until you reach the end position.
ness indicator for Parking Assist Red guide line ? is then at the end of the
PARKTRONIC parking space. The vehicle is almost parallel
in the parking space.
= Rear warning display
When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is opera- Reverse perpendicular parking with steer-
tional (Y page 150), additional measurement ing input
operational readiness indicator ; appears in
the multimedia system display. If the Parking
Assist PARKTRONIC warning displays are active
or light up, warning displays : and = are also
active or light up correspondingly in the multi-
media system display.
"Reverse parking" function

Backing up straight into a parking space
without steering input
: Parking space marking

; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, at the current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
X Drive past the parking space and bring the
vehicle to a standstill.
X Make sure that the rear view camera is
switched on (Y page 156).
The lane and the guide lines are shown.
X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the
: White guide line without steering input – steering wheel in the direction of the parking
vehicle width including the exterior mirrors space until yellow guide line ; reaches park-
(static) ing space marking :.
; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width X Maintain the steering input and reverse care-
including the exterior mirrors, at the current fully.
Z
158 Driving systems
X Back up carefully until you have reached the

final position.
Red guide line : is then at end of parking
space =. The vehicle is almost parallel in the
parking space.
Wide-angle function
Driving and parking
: Yellow guide line for the vehicle width

including the exterior mirrors, at the current
X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in
front of the parking space.
The white lane should be as close to parallel
with the parking space marking as possible.
: Symbol for the wide-angle view function
; Your vehicle
= Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning dis-
plays
Select this view when you are driving out of an
exit and the view of crossing traffic is restricted,
for example.
ATTENTION ASSIST
: White guide line at the current steering input General notes
; Parking space marking ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,
X Turn the steering wheel to the center position monotonous journeys, such as on highways. It is
while the vehicle is stationary. active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 125 mph
(200 km/h) range. If ATTENTION ASSIST
detects typical indicators of fatigue or increas-
ing lapses in concentration on the part of the
driver, it suggests taking a break.

ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the driver. It
might not always recognize fatigue or increasing
inattentiveness in time or fail to recognize them
at all. The system is not a substitute for a well-
rested and attentive driver.
: Red guide line at a distance of approximately

12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle
; White guide line without steering input
= End of parking space
Driving systems 159
The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is ing, the System Suspended message

restricted and warnings may be delayed or not appears. The bar display then changes the
occur at all: display, such as when you are driving at a
Rif the length of the journey is less than approx- speed below 37 mph (60 km/h) or above
imately 30 minutes 125 mph (200 km/h).
Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surface
is uneven or if there are potholes Displaying Attention Level with color
Rif there is a strong side wind multifunction display
Driving and parking

Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds or high rates of accel-
eration
Rif you are predominantly driving slower than
37 mph (60 km/h) or faster than 125 mph
(200 km/h)
Rif the time has been set incorrectly
Rin active driving situations, such as when you
change lanes or change your speed
ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when you continue
your journey and starts assessing your tiredness
again if:
Ryou switch off the engine
You can have current status information dis-
played in the assistance menu (Y page 172) of
Ryou take off your seat belt and open the driv- the on-board computer.
er's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or to
X Select the Assistance display for Attention
take a break
Assist using the on-board computer
(Y page 173).
Displaying the attention level with
black and white multifunction display The following information is displayed:
RThe length of the journey since the last break.
RThe Attention Level determined by ATTEN-
TION ASSIST, displayed in a bar display in five
levels from high to low.
RIf ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate
the attention level and cannot output a warn-
ing, the System Suspended message
appears. The bar display then changes the
display, such as when you are driving at a
speed below 37 mph (60 km/h) or above
125 mph (200 km/h).
Activating ATTENTION ASSIST

X Select the status overview using the on-board
computer (Y page 173). X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-
X Press : to display the ATTENTION ASSIST board computer (Y page 174).
assessment. The system determines the attention level of
the driver depending on the setting selected:
The following information is displayed:
Standard selected: the sensitivity with which
RThe length of the journey since the last break.
the system determines the attention level is set
RThe Attention Level determined by ATTEN- to normal.
TION ASSIST, displayed in a bar display in five Sensitive selected: the sensitivity is set
levels from high to low. higher. The attention level detected by Attention
RIf ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate
the attention level and cannot output a warn-
Z
160 Driving systems
Assist is adapted accordingly and the driver is Blind Spot Assist

warned earlier.
Vehicles with black and white multifunction General notes
display: when ATTENTION ASSIST is activated, Blind Spot Assist monitors the areas on either
the multifunction display in the status overview side of the vehicle that are not visible to the
shows the À symbol. driver with two lateral, rear-facing radar sen-
Vehicles with color multifunction display: sors. A warning display in the exterior mirrors
when ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the draws your attention to vehicles detected in the
multifunction display in the assistance graphic monitored area. If you then switch on the cor-
Driving and parking
shows the é symbol. responding turn signal to change lane, you will
When ATTENTION ASSIST has been deactivated, also receive an optical and audible warning.
it is automatically reactivated after the engine Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed of
has been stopped. The sensitivity selected cor- approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
responds to the last selection activated (stand-
ard/sensitive). Important safety notes
G WARNING
Warning in the multifunction display Blind Spot Assist does not react to:
If fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,
are detected, a warning appears in the multi- placing them in the blind spot area
function display: ATTENTION ASSIST Take a
Break!
Break!. Rvehicles which approach with a large speed
In addition to the message shown in the multi- differential and overtake your vehicle
function display, you will then hear a warning As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give
tone. warnings in such situations. There is a risk of
X If necessary, take a break. an accident.
X Confirm the message by pressing the a Always observe the traffic conditions care-
button on the steering wheel. fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.
On long journeys, take regular breaks in good
time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you do Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to
not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST still detect some vehicles and is no substitute for
detects increasing lapses in concentration, you attentive driving. Always ensure that there is
will be warned again after 15 minutes at the sufficient distance to the side for other road
earliest. This will only happen if ATTEN- users and obstacles.
TION ASSIST still detects typical indicators of
fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration. i USA only:
Vehicles with the COMAND multimedia sys- This device has been approved by the FCC as
tem: if a warning is output in the multifunction a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor
display, a service station search is performed in is intended for use in an automotive radar
the multimedia system. You can select a service system only. Removing, tampering with, or
station and navigation to this service station will altering the device will void any warranties,
then begin. This function can be activated or and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tam-
deactivated in the multimedia system; see the per with, alter, or use in any non-approved
Digital Operator's Manual. way.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
Lane Tracking package
Radar sensors
General notes
The radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist are inte-
The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind grated into the rear bumper. Make sure that the
Spot Assist (Y page 160) and Lane Keeping bumpers are free from dirt, ice or slush. The
Assist (Y page 162). sensors must not be covered, for example by
Driving systems 161
cycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below
severe impact or in the event of damage to the approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in
bumpers, have the function of the radar sensors the monitoring range are then not indicated.
checked at a qualified specialist workshop. When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator
Blind Spot Assist may no longer work properly. lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow
at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). At speeds
Monitoring range of the sensors above 20 mph (30 km/h), the indicator lamp
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be goes out and Blind Spot Assist is operational.
impaired if: If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot
Driving and parking

Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph
covering the sensors (30 km/h), warning lamp : on the correspond-
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy ing side lights up red. This warning is always
rain or snow emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot
Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a
monitoring range from behind or from the side.
When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only
motorbike or bicycle
occurs if the difference in speed is less than
Rthe road has very wide lanes 7 mph (12 km/h).
Rthe road has narrow lanes The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse
Ryou are not driving in the middle of the lane gear is engaged. In this event, Blind Spot Assist
Rthere are barriers or other road boundaries is no longer active.
Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not The brightness of the indicator/warning lamps
indicated. is adjusted automatically according to the ambi-
Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 10 ft ent light.
(3 m) behind your vehicle and directly next to it. Collision warning
If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range of
indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driv- Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the corre-
ing in the middle of their lane. This may be the sponding turn signal, a double warning tone
case if the vehicles are driving on the inner side sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn
of their lane. signal remains on, vehicles detected are indica-
ted by the flashing of red warning lamp :.
Due to the nature of the system: There are no further warning tones.
Rwarnings may be issued in error when driving
close to crash barriers or similar solid lane Switching on Blind Spot Assist
borders. X Make sure that Blind Spot Assist is activated
Rwarnings may be interrupted when you are in the on-board computer (Y page 174).
driving alongside particularly long vehicles, X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
such as trucks, for a prolonged time. tion lock.
Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light
Warning display up red for approximately 1.5 seconds and
then turn yellow.
: Warning display
Z
162 Driving systems
Lane Keeping Assist If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane Keep-
ing Assist can neither reduce the risk of an acci-
General notes dent nor override the laws of physics. Lane
Keeping Assist cannot take into account the
road, traffic and weather conditions. Lane Keep-
ing Assist is merely an aid. You are responsible
for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehi-
cle speed, for braking in good time and for stay-
ing in your lane.
Driving and parking
The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the vehi-

cle in the lane.
The system may be impaired or may not function
if:
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient
illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain,
Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of fog or spray
your vehicle by means of multifunction cam- Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the
era : which is attached behind the top of the sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if
windshield. Lane Keeping Assist detects lane the road surface is wet)
markings on the road and can warn you before Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or
you leave your lane unintentionally. covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin-
This function is available in the range between ity of the camera
40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and 200 km/h). Rthere are no or several unclear lane markings
A warning may be given if a front wheel passes for one lane, e.g. roadworks
over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or cov-
intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for ered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
up to 1.5 seconds. Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too short
and thus the lane markings cannot be detec-
Important safety notes ted
G WARNING Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes
Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly branch off, cross one another or merge
detect lane markings. Rthe road is narrow and winding
Rthere are highly variable shade conditions on
In such cases, Lane Keeping Assist can:
the roadway
Rgive an unnecessary warning
Switching on Lane Keeping Assist
Rnot give a warning
X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using
There is a risk of an accident. the on-board computer; to do so, select
Always pay particular attention to the traffic Standard or Adaptive (Y page 162).
situation and keep within the lane, especially If you drive at speeds above 40 mph
if Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. (60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,
the lines in the assistance graphic are shown
in green (Y page 173). Lane Keeping Assist is
G WARNING ready for use.
The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not If Standard is selected, no warning vibration
return the vehicle to the original lane. There is occurs if:
a risk of an accident. Ryou have switched on the turn signal. In this
You should always steer, brake or accelerate event, the warnings are suppressed for a cer-
yourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keep- tain period of time.
ing Assist. Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS,
BAS or ESP®.
Driving systems 163
When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibra-

tion occurs if:
Ryou have switched on the turn signal. In this
event, the warnings are suppressed for a cer-
tain period of time.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS,
BAS or ESP®.
Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.
Driving and parking

Ryou brake hard.
Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an
obstacle or change lanes quickly.
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.
In order that you are warned only when neces-
sary and in good time if you cross the lane mark-
ing, the system detects certain conditions and
warns you accordingly.
The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a
bend
Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a freeway
Rthe system detects solid lane markings
The warning vibration occurs later if:
Rthe road has narrow lanes.
Ryou cut the corner on a bend
Z
164 Displays and operation
Important safety notes The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the dis-
plays and the controls in the vehicle interior can
be adjusted using the brightness control knob.
G WARNING The brightness control knob is located on the
On-board computer and displays
If you operate information systems and com- bottom left of the instrument cluster
munication equipment integrated in the vehi- (Y page 31).
cle when driving, you may be distracted from X Turn the brightness control knob clockwise or
the traffic situation. You could also lose con- counter-clockwise.
trol of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci- If the light switch is set to the Ã, T or
dent. L position, the brightness is dependent
upon the brightness of the ambient light.
Only operate this equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention Speedometer with segments
to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
ment when the vehicle is stationary. The speedometer is divided into segments on
vehicles with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC.
You must observe the legal requirements for the The segments in the speedometer indicate
country in which you are currently driving when which speed range is available.
operating the on-board computer. RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated
G WARNING (Y page 140):
One or two segments in the set speed range
If the instrument cluster has failed or mal-
light up.
functioned, you may not recognize function
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a vehicle in
restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The front moving more slowly than the stored
operating safety of your vehicle may be speed:
impaired. There is a risk of an accident. The segments between the speed of the vehi-
Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked cle in front and the stored speed light up.
at a qualified specialist workshop immedi-
ately.
Tachometer
The on-board computer only shows messages or
warnings from certain systems in the multifunc- ! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as this
tion display. You should therefore make sure could damage the engine.
your vehicle is operating safely at all times. The red band in the tachometer indicates the
If the operating safety of your vehicle is engine's overrevving range.
impaired, pull over as soon as it is safe to do so. The engine is limited within a range to protect
Contact a qualified specialist workshop. the engine when the red band is reached.
For an overview, see the instrument panel illus-
tration (Y page 31).
Outside temperature display
Displays and operation You should pay special attention to road condi-
tions when temperatures are around freezing
Instrument cluster lighting point.
Bear in mind that the outside temperature dis-
The light sensor in the instrument cluster auto- play indicates the temperature measured and
matically controls the brightness of the multi- does not record the road temperature.
function display. In daylight, the displays in the The outside temperature display is in the multi-
instrument cluster are not illuminated. function display (Y page 167).
Displays and operation 165
There is a short delay before a change in outside ! A display message is shown if the coolant
temperature appears in the multifunction dis- temperature is too high.
play. If the coolant temperature is over 248 ‡
(120 †), do not continue driving. The engine

will otherwise be damaged.
Coolant temperature gauge The coolant temperature gage is in the instru-
ment cluster on the right-hand side (Y page 31).
G WARNING
The H marking in the coolant temperature gauge
Opening the hood when the engine is over- corresponds to a coolant temperature of
heated or when there is a fire in the engine approximately 248 ‡ (120 †).
compartment could expose you to hot gases Under normal operating conditions and at the
or other service products. There is a risk of correct coolant level, the coolant temperature
injury. gauge may rise to the H marking.
Let an overheated engine cool down before
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the
engine compartment, keep the hood closed
and contact the fire department.
Operating the on-board computer

Overview
: Multifunction display
; Right control panel
= Left control panel
X To activate the on-board computer: turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock.
You can control the multifunction display and the settings in the on-board computer using the
buttons on the multifunction steering wheel.
Z
166 Displays and operation
Left control panel
= RCalls up the menu and menu bar

;
9 Press briefly:
: RScrolls in lists
RSelects a submenu or function
RIn the Audio menu: selects the previous or next station, when the preset list
or station list is active, or an audio track or video scene
RIn the Tel (telephone) menu: switches to the phone book and selects a name
or telephone number
9 Press and hold:
: RIn the Audio menu: selects a preset list or a station list in the desired fre-
quency range, or an audio track or video scene using rapid scrolling
RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu: starts rapid scrolling if the phone book is open
a RConfirms the selection or display message

RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu: switches to the telephone book and starts
dialing the selected number
% Press briefly:
RBack
RVehicles with Audio 20: switches off voice-operated control for navigation
(see the manufacturer's operating instructions)
RVehicles with COMAND: switches off the Voice Control System (see the sep-
arate operating instructions)
RHides display messages or calls up the last Trip menu function used
RExits the phone book/redial memory
% Press and hold:

RCalls up the standard display in the Trip menu
Right control panel
ó RVehicles with Audio 20:

Switches on voice-operated control for navigation (see the manufacturer's
operating instructions)
RVehicles with COMAND:
Switches off the Voice Control System (see the separate operating instruc-
tions)
8 RMute
WX RAdjusts the volume

Menus and submenus 167
~ RRejects or ends a call

RExits the phone book/redial memory
6 RMakes or accepts a call

RSwitches to the redial memory
Multifunction display ? Menu bar

A Drive program (Y page 121)
Black and white multifunction display B Transmission position (Y page 123)
Overview
X To display menu bar ?: press the =
or ; button on the steering wheel.
If you do not press the buttons any longer,
menu bar ? is faded out after a few seconds.
Text field = shows the selected menu or sub-
menu as well as display messages.
The following menu illustrations differ in vehi-
cles with black and white and color multifunc-
tion display. The examples given in this Opera-
tor's Manual apply to vehicles equipped with
color multifunction display.
i You can set the time using Audio 20 or
COMAND (see Digital Operator's Manual).
Further displays
Color multifunction display The following messages may appear in the mul-
tifunction display:
Z Gearshift recommendation when shift-
ing manually (Y page 125)
j Parking Pilot (Y page 151)
CRUISE Cruise control (Y page 138)
è ECO start/stop function (Y page 118)
ë HOLD function (Y page 146)
Menus and submenus

Menu overview
Using the = or ; button on the steering
wheel, open the menu bar.
Operating the on-board computer (Y page 165).
: Permanent display: outside temperature or

speed (Y page 175)
; Time
= Text field
Z
168 Menus and submenus
Depending on the equipment installed in the X Press the = or ; button on the steering
vehicle, you can call up the following menus: wheel to select the Trip menu.
RTrip menu (Y page 168) X Press the 9 or : button to select
RNavi menu (navigation instructions) From Start or From Reset
Reset.
(Y page 169) The values in the From Start submenu are cal-
RAudio menu (Y page 170) culated from the start of a journey whilst the
RTel menu (telephone) (Y page 171) values in the From Reset submenu are calcu-
lated from the last time the submenu was reset
RDriveAssist menu (assistance)
(Y page 169).
(Y page 172)
In the following cases, the trip computer is auto-
RServ. menu (Y page 174)
matically reset From Start:
Start
RSett. menu (settings) (Y page 175) Rthe ignition has been switched off for more
The displays for the Audio,
Audio Navi and Tel menus than four hours.
may differ slightly from those in your vehicle. R999 hours have been exceeded.
The examples given in this Operator's Manual R9,999 miles have been exceeded.
apply to vehicles equipped with COMAND.
When 9,999 hours or 99,999 miles have been
exceeded, the trip computer is automatically
reset From Reset.
Reset
Trip menu
Standard display ECO display
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select ECO
DISPLAY
DISPLAY.
If the ignition remains switched off for longer
than four hours, the ECO display will be auto-
matically reset.
For more information on the ECO display, see
X Press and hold the % button on the steer- (Y page 133).
ing wheel until the Trip menu with trip odom-
eter : and odometer ; appears.
Displaying the range and current fuel
consumption
Trip computer "From Start" or "From
Reset"

: Distance
X Press 9 or : to select the display with
; Driving time approximate range : and current fuel con-
= Average speed sumption ;.
? Average fuel consumption Approximate range : that can be covered is
calculated according to your current driving
style and the amount of fuel in the tank. If
there is only a small amount of fuel left in the
fuel tank, a vehicle being refueled C Navigation system menu

appears instead of approximate range :.
Recuperation display = shows you if energy Displaying navigation instructions
has been recuperated from the kinetic energy
In the Navi menu, the multifunction display

in overrun mode and saved in the battery.
Recuperation display = depends on the shows navigation instructions.
engine installed and is therefore not available You can find further information on navigation in
in all vehicles. the Digital Operator's Manual for the multimedia
system.
X Switch on the multimedia system (see the
Digital speedometer
Digital Operator's Manual)
wheel to select the Navi menu.
Route guidance not active

X Press the 9 or : button to select the
digital speedometer ;.
A gear shift recommendation : Z can also
follow. : Direction of travel
Observe the information on gearshift recom- ; Current road
mendation : when shifting manually
(Y page 125). Route guidance active
Resetting values No change of direction announced

function that you wish to reset.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press : to select Yes and press a to
confirm.
: Distance to destination
You can reset the values of the following func-
; Distance to the next change of direction
tions:
= Current road
RTrip odometer
? "Follow the road's course" symbol
R"From Start" trip computer
R"From Reset" trip computer
RECO display
If you reset the values in the ECO display, the
values in the "From Start" trip computer are also
reset. If you reset the values in the "From Start"
trip computer, the values in the ECO display are
also reset.
Z
Change of direction without lane recom- Other status indicators of the naviga-
mendation tion system
: Road into which the change of direction

The navigation system displays additional infor-
leads mation and the vehicle status.
; Distance to change of direction and visual
Possible displays:
distance display
= Change-of-direction symbol RNew Route... or Calculating Route
When a change of direction is to be made, you A new route is calculated.
will see symbol = for the change of direction RRoad Not Mapped
and distance graphic ;. The distance indicator The vehicle position is inside the area of the
shortens towards the top of the display as you digital map but the road is not recognized, e.g.
approach the point of the announced change of newly built streets, car parks or private land.
direction. The change of direction starts once RNo Route
the distance display reaches zero. No route could be calculated to the selected
Change of direction announced with a destination.
RO
lane recommendation
You have reached the destination or an inter-
mediate destination.
Audio menu
Selecting a radio station
: Road into which the change of direction

leads
; Distance to change of direction and visual
distance display
= Lanes not recommended
? Recommended lane and new lane during a
change of direction
A Change-of-direction symbol : Active station list
; Station frequency with memory position
On multilane roads, new lane recommendations
can be displayed for the next change of direction The multifunction display shows station ; with
if the digital map supports this data. During the station frequency or station name. The preset
change of direction, new lanes may be added. position is only displayed along with station ; if
Lane not recommended =: you will not be able this has been stored.
to complete the next change of direction if you X Switch on the multimedia system and select
stay in this lane. radio (see the Digital Operator's Manual).
Recommended lane and new lane during a X Press the = or ; button on the steering
change of direction ?: in this lane you will be wheel to select the Audio menu.
able to complete the next two changes of direc- X To select a preset list or station list: press
tion without changing lane. and briefly hold the 9 or : button until
the preset list or station list in the desired Video DVD operation
frequency range is shown.
X To select a station: briefly press 9
or :.

i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a
normal radio.
You can find further information on operation
in the "Satellite radio" section of the Digital
Operator's Manual for the multimedia sys-
tem. You can only operate DVD videos in the Audio
menu in vehicles with COMAND.
X Switch on COMAND and select DVD Video
Operating an audio player or audio
(see the Digital Operator's Manual).
media
wheel to select the Audio menu.
X To select the next or previous scene:
briefly press the 9 or : button.
X To select a scene from the scene list
(rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9
or : button until desired scene :
appears.
: Current title
Audio data from various audio devices or media
can be played, depending on the equipment Telephone menu
installed in the vehicle.
Introduction
X Switch on the multimedia system and switch
on CD or MP3 mode (see the Digital Opera- G WARNING
tor's Manual).
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
wheel to select the Audio menu.
cle when driving, you may be distracted from
X To select the next/previous track: briefly
press the 9 or : button. the traffic situation. You could also lose con-
trol of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci-
X To select a track from the track list (rapid
scrolling): press and hold the 9 or : dent.
button until desired track appears. Only operate this equipment when the traffic
If you press and hold 9 or :, the rapid situation permits. If you are not sure that this
scrolling speed is increased. Not all audio is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
drives or data carriers support this function. to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
If track information is stored on the audio device ment when the vehicle is stationary.
or medium, the multifunction display will show
the number and title of the track. When telephoning, you must observe the legal
requirements for the country in which you are
currently driving.
X Switch on the mobile phone (see the manu-
facturer’s operating instructions).
X Switch on the multimedia system (see the
Digital Operator's Manual)
Z
X Establish a Bluetooth® connection to the mul- X If there is more than one number for a
timedia system (see the Digital Operator's particular name: press the 6 or a
Manual). button to display the numbers.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering X Press the 9 or : button to select the
wheel to select the Tel menu. number you want to dial.

You will see one of the following display mes- X Press the 6 or a button to start dialing.
sages in the multifunction display: or
RPhone READY or the name of the network X If you do not want to make a call: press the
provider: the mobile phone has found a net- ~ or % button.
work and is ready to receive.
RPhone No Service:
Service there is no network Redialing
available or the mobile phone is searching for
a network. The on-board computer saves the last names or
numbers dialed in the redial memory.
Accepting a call X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Tel menu.
If someone calls you when you are in the Tel X Press the 6 button to switch to the redial
menu, a display message appears in the multi- memory.
function display.
You can accept a call at any time, even if you are desired name or number.
not in the Tel menu.
X Press the 6 or a button to start dialing.
X Press the 6 button on the steering wheel
or
to accept an incoming call.
X If you do not want to make the call: press
the ~ or % button.
Rejecting or ending a call
You can end or reject a call anytime, even if you
are not in the Tel menu. Assistance menu
X Press the ~ button on the steering wheel
to reject or end a call. Introduction
Depending on the equipment installed in the
Selecting an entry in the phone book vehicle, you have the following options in the
DriveAssist menu:
X Press the = or ; button on the steering ROnly vehicles with black and white multifunc-
wheel to select the Tel menu. tion display: showing status overview
X Press the 9, : or a button to (Y page 173)
switch to the phone book. ROnly vehicles with black and white multifunc-
X Authorize access to the phone book on the tion display: showing distance display
phone. (Y page 173)
X Press the 9 or : button to select the ROnly vehicles with color multifunction display:
desired name. showing the assistance graphic
or (Y page 173)
X To begin rapid scrolling: press and hold the RDeactivating/activating ESP® (Y page 173)
9 or : button for longer than one sec- RActivating/deactivating Active Brake Assist
ond. (Y page 174)
Rapid scrolling stops when you release the RActivating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST
button or reach the end of the list. (Y page 174)
X If only one telephone number is stored for
RActivating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist
a name: press the 6 or a button to (Y page 174)
start dialing.
RActivating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assist
or (Y page 174)
Showing the status overview X Press a to confirm.

The multifunction display shows the Distance
The Status Overview is only available in vehi- Pilot DISTRONIC distance display in the assis-
cles with black and white multifunction displays. tance graphic display.

X Press the = or ; button on the steering The assistance graphic displays the status of
wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. and information from the following driving
X Press 9 or : to select Status Over‐ systems or driving safety systems:
view.
view RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 140)
X Press a to confirm. RActive Brake Assist (Y page 58)
The Status Overview shows you the status RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 158)
of and/or information from the following driv- RLane Keeping Assist (Y page 162)
ing systems or driving safety systems:
RRear window wiper (Y page 101)
RActive Brake Assist (Y page 58)
X Press : to display the ATTENTION ASSIST
RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 158)
assessment.
RLane Keeping Assist (Y page 162)
RRear window wiper (Y page 101)
X Press : to display the ATTENTION ASSIST
Deactivating/activating ESP®
assessment. Observe the important safety notes on ESP®
(Y page 60).
Showing the distance display G WARNING
The distance display is only available in vehicles If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-
with a black and white multifunction display and bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC.
of skidding and an accident.
wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-
X Press 9 or : to select Distance Dis‐ bed in the following.
play
play.
It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the follow-
The distance display of Distance Pilot ing situations:
DISTRONIC appears in the multifunction dis- Rwhen using snow chains
play (Y page 140). Rin deep snow
Ron sand or gravel
Displaying the assistance graphic For further information about ESP®, see
(Y page 60).
X Start the engine.
wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
X Press 9 or : to select ESP ESP.
The current selection appears.
X To activate/deactivate: press the a but-
The Assistance graphic is only available in vehi-
cles with a color multifunction display. ton again.
ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp
in the instrument cluster lights up continu-
wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. ously when the engine is running.
X Press 9 or : to select Assist.
Graphic.
Graphic If the ÷ and å warning lamps light up
continuously, ESP® is not available due to a mal-
function.
Z
Observe the information on warning lamps Activating/deactivating Blind Spot

(Y page 207). Assist
Observe the information on display messages
(Y page 179). X Press the = or ; button on the steering
X Press the 9 or : button to select

Activating/deactivating Active Brake
Blind Spot Assist.
Assist
Assist
X Press the = or ; button on the steering The current selection appears.
wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. X To activate/deactivate: press the a but-
X Press the 9 or : button to select ton again.
Brake Assist.
Assist For further information about Blind Spot Assist,
X Press a to confirm. see (Y page 160).
X To activate/deactivate: press the a but- Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping
ton again. Assist
Vehicles with a black and white multifunction
display: when Active Brake Assist is activated, X Press the = or ; button on the steering
the multifunction display shows the Ä wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
symbol in the status overview. X Press the 9 or : button to select
Vehicles with a color multifunction display: Lane Keeping Assist.
Assist
when Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the X Press a to confirm.
multifunction display shows the æ symbol The current selection appears.
in the assistance graphic.
X Press a again to confirm.
Further information on Active Brake Assist X Press the : or 9 button to set Off, Off
(Y page 58). Standard or Adaptive
Adaptive.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
Activating/deactivating ATTENTION Vehicles with a black and white multifunction
ASSIST display: when Lane Keeping Assist is activa-
ted, the multifunction display in the status
X Press the = or ; button on the steering overview shows the Ã symbol.
Vehicles with a color multifunction display:
X Press the 9 or : button to select
when Lane Keeping Assist is activated, the
Assist
Attention Assist. multifunction display shows the lane mark-
X Press a to confirm. ings as bright lines in the assistance graphic.
For further information about Lane Keeping
Assist, see (Y page 162).
X Press the : or 9 button to set Off, Off
Standard or Sensitive.
Sensitive
X Press the a button to save the setting. Service menu
Vehicles with black and white multifunction
display: when Lane Keeping Assist is activa- Depending on the equipment installed in the
ted, the multifunction display in the status vehicle, you have the following options in the
overview shows the À symbol. Serv. menu:
Vehicles with color multifunction display: RCalling up display messages in message
when Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated, the memory (Y page 178)
multifunction display shows the é symbol RRestarting the tire pressure loss warning sys-
in the assistance graphic. tem (Canada only) (Y page 276)
For further information about ATTENTION RCalling up the service due date
ASSIST, see (Y page 158). (Y page 243)
Settings menu
Introduction
Depending on the equipment installed in the

vehicle, you have the following options in the
Sett. menu:
RChanging the instrument cluster settings
RChanging the vehicle settings The speed display : is an alternative to your
RChanging the convenience settings
speedometer.
RRestoring the factory settings X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Instrument cluster
Instrument Cluster submenu.
Selecting the distance unit X Press a to confirm.
The Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: func-
tion allows you to choose whether certain dis- Speedometer [km/h] or Speedometer
plays appear in kilometers or miles in the mul- [mph] function.
tifunction display. You will see the selected setting: On or Off
Off.
wheel to select the Sett. menu. Selecting permanent display
Instrument Cluster submenu. The Permanent Display: function allows you
to choose whether the multifunction display
always shows the outside temperature or the
X Press the : or 9 button to select the speed.
Display Unit Speed-/Odometer function.
You will see the selected setting: km or miles.
miles
The selected unit of measurement for distance
applies to:
RDigitalspeedometer in the Trip menu
ROdometer and the trip odometer
RTrip computer The speed display : is an alternative to your
RCurrent fuel consumption and approximate speedometer.
range X Press the = or ; button on the steering
RNavigation instructions in the Navi menu wheel to select the Sett. menu.
RCruise control X Press the : or 9 button to select the
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC Instrument Cluster submenu.
RASSYST PLUS service interval display X Press a to confirm.
Switching the additional speedometer Permanent Display: function.
on/off The current setting, Outside Temperature
If the additional speedometer is switched on, or Speedometer [km/h]
[km/h]/Speedometer
Speedometer
the speed is shown in the status bar in the mul- [mph],
[mph] appears.
tifunction display instead of the outside tem- X Press the a button to save the setting.
perature.
Z
Lights vehicle is centrally locked above a speed of

approximately 9 mph (15 km/h).
Switching the daytime running lamps on/ For further information on the automatic locking
off feature, see (Y page 71).
This function is not available in Canada. Activating/deactivating the acoustic

X Press the = or ; button on the steering locking verification signal
If you activate the Acoustic Lock Feedback:
function (vehicles with a black and white multi-
Light submenu. function display) or the Acoustic Lock func-
X Press a to confirm. tion (vehicles with a color multifunction display),
X Press the : or 9 button to select the an acoustic tone sounds when you lock the vehi-
Daytime Running Lights function. cle.
Vehicles with black and white multifunction X Press the = or ; button on the steering
display: the current setting: Enabled or Dis‐ wheel to select the Sett. menu.
abled appears. X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Vehicles with a color multifunction display: if Vehicle submenu.
the Daytime Running Lights function has X Press a to confirm.
been switched on, the multifunction display
X Press : or 9 to select the Acoustic
shows the cone of light and the W symbol
in orange. Lock Feedback: function (vehicles with a
black and white multifunction display) or the
Acoustic Lock function (vehicles with a
Further information on daytime running lamps color multifunction display).
(Y page 93). Vehicles with black and white multifunction
display: the current setting: Enabled or Dis‐
Vehicle abled appears.
Vehicles with a color multifunction display: if
Activating/deactivating the automatic the Acoustic Lock function is activated, the
door locking mechanism multifunction display shows the & symbol
in orange.
Vehicle submenu. Comfort
X Press : or 9 to select the Automatic
Switching the fold-in mirrors when lock-
Door Lock: function (vehicles with a black ing feature on/off
and white multifunction display) or the Auto‐ This function is only available when the vehicle is
matic Door Lock function (vehicles with a equipped with the electrical fold-in function.
color multifunction display). If you switch on the Auto. Mirror Folding
Vehicles with black and white multifunction function (vehicles with black and white multi-
display: the current setting: Enabled or Dis‐ function display) or the Auto. Mirror Fold‐
abled appears. ing function (vehicles with color multifunction
Vehicles with color multifunction display: if display), the exterior mirrors fold in when you
the Automatic Door Lock function is lock the vehicle. If you unlock the vehicle and
switched on, the multifunction display shows then open the driver's or front-passenger door,
the doors in orange. the exterior mirrors fold out again.
X Press the a button to save the setting. If you have switched on the Auto. Mirror
If you select the Automatic Door Lock: func- Folding (vehicles with black and white multi-
tion (vehicles with black and white multifunction function display) or Auto. Mirror Folding
display) or the Automatic Door Lock function (vehicles with color multifunction display) func-
(vehicles with color multifunction display), the tion and you fold in the exterior mirrors using the
button on the door (Y page 89), they will not fold
Display messages 177
out automatically. The exterior mirrors can then Restoring the factory settings
only be folded out using the button on the door.

Factory Setting submenu.
Convenience submenu.
The Reset All Settings? function
X Press : or 9 to select the Auto. Mir‐ appears.
ror Folding function (vehicles with a black X Press the : or 9 button to select No or
and white multifunction display) or the Yes.
Yes
Auto. Mirror Folding function (vehicles
X Press the a button to confirm the selec-
with a color multifunction display).
Vehicles with black and white multifunction tion.
display: the current setting: Enabled or Dis‐ If you have selected Yes,
Yes the multifunction
abled appears. display shows a confirmation message.
Vehicles with color multifunction display: if For safety reasons, the Daytime Running
the Auto. Mirror Folding function is Lights function in the Light submenu is only
switched on, the multifunction display shows reset if the vehicle is stationary.
the exterior mirror in orange.
Display messages
Introduction
General notes
Display messages appear in the multifunction display.
Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's Manual
and may therefore differ from the multifunction display.
Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this
Operator's Manual.
Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.
When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-priority
display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been rectified, the
corresponding display messages are also deleted.
When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:
RHOLD function (Y page 146)
RParking (Y page 129)
Hiding display messages

X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel.
The multifunction display hides the display message.
The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority display
messages cannot be hidden.
The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages
have been remedied.
Z
178 Display messages
Message memory
The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can call up
the display messages:
X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu.
If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages,
Messages for example.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages.
Messages
X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages.
Safety systems
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
!÷

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), BAS (Brake Assist), ESP® (Electronic
Stability Program), the HOLD function and hill start assist are tempo-
Currently Unavaila‐ rarily unavailable.
ble See Operator's Active Brake Assist may have also failed.
Manual
In addition, the !, ÷ and å warning lamps may light up in
the instrument cluster.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
Possible causes are:
RSelf-diagnosis is not yet complete
RThe on-board voltage may be insufficient
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake
hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making gentle steering
movements at speeds of above 12 mph (20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above
If the multifunction display still shows the display message:
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
!÷ ABS, BAS, ESP®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are not avail-
able due to a malfunction.
Inoperative See Active Brake Assist may have also failed.
Operator's Manual
The !, ÷, å and $ (USA only) or J (Canada only)
warning lamps in the instrument cluster may also light up.
G WARNING
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake
hard, for example.
Z
÷ ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarily
unavailable.
Currently Unavaila‐ Active Brake Assist may have also failed.

ble See Operator's
Manual In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps may light up in the
instrument cluster.
The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.
G WARNING
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-
ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above
÷ ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are unavailable due
to a malfunction.
Inoperative See Active Brake Assist may have also failed.
Operator's Manual
In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps may light up in the
instrument cluster.
G WARNING
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
T! EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, BAS, ESP®, the HOLD
function and hill start assist are not available due to a malfunction.
÷

Active Brake Assist may have also failed.
Inoperative See A warning tone sounds.
Operator's Manual In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps may light up in
the instrument cluster.
G WARNING
functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock
if you brake hard, for example.
F (USA The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp lights
up.
only) ! (Canada You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the ignition
only) was switched off.
Turn On the Igni‐ X SmartKey: turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock.
tion to Release the X KEYLESS-GO: switch on the ignition.
Parking Brake
F (USA The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes
and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automatic release of the
only) ! (Canada electric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 131).
only) You are driving with the electric parking brake applied.
Please Release Park‐ X Release the electric parking brake manually.
ing Brake
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes
and a warning tone sounds.
You are using the electric parking brake for emergency braking
(Y page 131).
F (USA The yellow ! warning lamp lights up.

The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
only) ! (Canada To apply:
only) X Switch the ignition off.
Parking Brake See X Push and hold the electric parking brake handle for at least ten
Operator's Manual seconds.
Z

The yellow ! warning lamp and the red F (USA only) or !
(Canada only) indicator lamp light up.

To release:
X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X Release the electric parking brake manually.
or
X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 130).
If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:
X Do not drive on.
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes

and the yellow ! warning lamp lights up.
To release:
X Release the electric parking brake manually.
To apply:
X Apply the electric parking brake manually.
If the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp con-
tinues to flash:
X Do not drive on.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 287).
X Turn the front wheels towards the curb.

The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red indicator lamp F
(USA only) or ! (Canada only) flashes for about ten seconds after

the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then goes
out or remains lit.
If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake:

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake manually:

X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 130).
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply or
release the electric parking brake, the red F (USA only) or !
(Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to apply
the electric parking brake manually.
X Shift the transmission to position j as the electric parking brake is
not applied automatically.
F (USA The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red indicator lamp F
(USA only) or ! (Canada only) flashes for about ten seconds after
only) ! (Canada the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then goes
only) out or remains lit.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of over-
Parking Brake Inop‐
voltage or undervoltage.
erative
X Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by
charging the battery or restarting the engine.
X Apply or release the electric parking brake.
If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parking brake:

X Apply or release the electric parking brake.

If the electric parking brake still cannot be applied:

Z

The yellow ! warning lamp lights up and the red F (USA only)
or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.
It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually.

$ (USA only) There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
A warning tone sounds. The $ (USA only) or J (Canada only)
J (Canada only) warning lamps in the instrument cluster may also light up.
Check Brake Fluid G WARNING
Level
The braking effect may be impaired.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.
# The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.

Check Brake Pad Wear
Active Brake Assist Active Brake Assist is temporarily inoperative.
Functions Currently Possible causes are:
Limited See Opera‐
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-
tor's Manual
tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or
other sources of electromagnetic radiation
Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range
Rthe on-board voltage is too low
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message
disappears.
Active Brake Assist is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Restart the engine.
Active Brake Active Brake Assist is unavailable due to a malfunction. Situation-

Assist: System Inop‐ dependent braking assistance may also have failed.
erative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Radar Sensors Dirty The radar sensor system is malfunctioning.
See Operator's Man‐ Possible causes are:

ual
Rdirt on sensors
Rheavy rain or snow
Rwhen driving on inter-urban roads without traffic or infrastructure,
e.g. in desert-like areas
At least one driving system or driving safety system is malfunctioning
or is temporarily unavailable:
RActive Brake Assist
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC
A warning tone also sounds.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving and
drive safety systems will be available again. The display message dis-
appears.
X Clean all sensors (Y page 248).
The display message disappears.
6 The restraint system is malfunctioning. The 6 warning lamp also

lights up in the instrument cluster.
SRS Malfunction Ser‐
vice Required G WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered
unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 37).
6 The restraint system is malfunctioning at the front on the left or right.

The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
Front Left Malfunc‐
tion Service G WARNING
Required or Front The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered
Right Malfunction unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
Service Required There is an increased risk of injury.
Z
6 The rear left-hand or right-hand restraint system is malfunctioning.

Rear Left Malfunc‐

Required or Rear The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered
Right Malfunction unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
Service Required There is an increased risk of injury.
6 The rear center restraint system is malfunctioning. The 6 warning

lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
Rear Center Malfunc‐
Required The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered
unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
6 The left-hand or right-hand window curtain air bag is malfunctioning.

Left Side Curtain
Airbag Malfunction G WARNING
Service Required or The left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered unin-
Right Side Curtain tentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
Airbag Malfunction There is an increased risk of injury.
Service Required

Front Passenger Air‐ The front-passenger front air bag is deactivated during the journey,
bag Disabled See even though:

Operator's Manual Ran adult
or
Ra person of the corresponding stature is on the front-passenger seat
If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may interpret
the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.
G WARNING
The front-passenger front air bag does not deploy during an accident.
X Switch the ignition off.
X Have the occupant on the front-passenger seat get out of the vehi-
cle.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center
console and the multifunction display and check the following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps light up simultaneously
for approximately six seconds
Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up
and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on,
OCS (Occupant Classification System) has disabled the front-
passenger front air bag (Y page 45)
Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's
Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Opera‐
tor's Manual display messages must not be shown on the mul-
tifunction display
X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system
checks have been completed.
X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multi-
function display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occu-
pied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicator
lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occu-
pant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.
For further information about the Occupant Classification System, see
(Y page 45).
Z

Front Passenger Air‐ The front-passenger front air bag is activated during the journey, even
bag Enabled See though:
Operator's Manual Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system's
weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seat
or
Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied
The system may detect objects or forces applying additional weight on
the seat.
G WARNING
The front-passenger front air bag may deploy unintentionally.
X Switch the ignition off.
X Open the front-passenger door.
X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-
passenger seat.
X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the
weight.
The system might otherwise detect the additional weight and inter-
pret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center
console and the multifunction display and check the following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps light up simultaneously
for approximately six seconds
Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up
and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on,
OCS has disabled the front-passenger front air bag (Y page 45)
Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's
Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Opera‐
tor's Manual display messages must not be shown on the mul-
tifunction display
X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system
checks have been completed.
X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multi-
function display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occu-
pied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicator
lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occu-
pant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.

For further information about the Occupant Classification System, see

(Y page 45).
Lights
i Vehicles with LED bulbs in the light clusters:
The display message for the corresponding lamp only appears when all of the LEDs in the lamp
have failed.
b The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective.

X Halogen headlamp: replace the bulb (Y page 96).
Check Left Low Beam
X LED headlamps: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
or Check Right Low
Beam
b The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective.

X Tail lamps (vehicles with halogen headlamps): replace the bulb
Check Rear Left (Y page 96).
Turn Signal or
X Tail lamps (vehicles with LED headlamps): consult a qualified
Check Rear Right
Turn Signal specialist workshop.
b The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective.

X Halogen headlamp: replace the bulb (Y page 96).
Check Front Left
Turn Signal or
Check Front Right
Turn Signal
b The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is defec-

tive.
Check Left Mirror X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Turn Signal or
Check Right Mirror
Turn Signal
b The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty.

Check Center Brake
Lamp
b The left or right-hand brake lamp is defective.

Check Left Brake
Lamp or Check Right
Brake Lamp
Z
b The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is defective.

Check Left Tail and

Brake Lamps or
Check Right Tail
and Brake Lamps
b The left or right-hand high beam is defective.

Halogen headlamp: replace the bulb (Y page 96).
X
Check Left High Beam
or Check Right
High Beam
b The left or right-hand license plate lamp is faulty.

X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
License Plate Lamp (Y page 96).
or
b The rear fog lamp is faulty.

Rear Fog Lamp (Y page 96).
specialist workshop.
b The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective.

Check Front Left
Parking Lamp or
Check Front Right
Parking Lamp
b The backup lamp is defective.

Backup Light (Y page 96).
b The left or right-hand tail lamp is defective.

Check Left Tail
Lamp or Check Right
Tail Lamp
b The front left-hand or front right-hand side marker lamp is faulty.

Check Front Left
Sidemarker Lamp or
Check Front Right
Sidemarker Lamp
b The rear left-hand or rear right-hand side marker lamp is faulty.


Check Rear Left
Sidemarker Lamp or
Check Rear Right
Sidemarker Lamp
b The left or right-hand daytime running lamp is faulty.

Check Left Daytime
Running Light or
Check Right Daytime
Running Light
b The exterior lighting is malfunctioning.

Malfunction See
Operator's Manual
b The light sensor is defective.

Auto Lamp Function
Inoperative
b The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A warning
tone also sounds.
Switch Off Lights X Turn the light switch to the Ã position.
b You are driving with low-beam headlamps switched off.

X Turn the light switch to the L or Ã position.
Switch On Headlamps
Engine
+ The coolant level is too low.
Check Coolant Level ! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine
See Operator's Man‐ cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.
ual X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so
(Y page 242).
If you have to add coolant frequently:
X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine cooling
system checked.
? The fan motor is malfunctioning.

X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the nearest
X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in moun-
tainous terrain and stop-and-go traffic.
Z
? The coolant is too hot.

Coolant Too Hot

Stop Vehicle Turn G WARNING
Engine Off Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some
fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch
fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which
can occur just by opening the hood.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-
ing attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Wait until the engine has cooled down.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked,
e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out and
the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †). Otherwise, the
engine could be damaged.
X Pay attention to the coolant temperature gauge.
If the temperature increases again:

Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant
level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).
# The battery is not being charged.

See Operator's Man‐ Possible causes are:
ual
Ra defective alternator
Ra torn poly-V-belt
Ra malfunction in the electronics
! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.

# The battery is no longer being charged and the condition of charge is

too low.

Stop Vehicle See A warning tone also sounds.
Operator's Manual
X Observe the instructions in the display message # See Oper‐
ator's Manual
Manual.
4 The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

Check Engine Oil At
Next Refueling ! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will oth-
erwise be damaged.
X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 240).
X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 241).
If the engine oil needs topping up more often:

X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine
checked.
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any quali-
fied specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-
benz.com.
æ The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.

X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
Fuel Level Low
ç There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.

X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.
æ The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
Gas Cap Loose
If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:
X Close the fuel filler cap.
If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:
Z
Driving systems
À
Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or

a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone also
Attention Assist: sounds.
Take a Break! X If necessary, take a break.
During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get
enough rest.
À ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.

Attention Assist
Inoperative
ë The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding.

Off
X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 147).
The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmly

depressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled.
X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function
(Y page 147).
Lane Keeping Assist Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.
Currently Unavaila‐ Possible causes are:
ble See Operator's
Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty
Manual
Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog
Rthere have been no lane markings for an extended period
Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or
snow.
disappears.
Lane Keeping Assist is operational again.
X Clean the windshield.
Lane Keeping Assist Lane Keeping Assist is faulty.

Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative.
Currently Unavaila‐ Possible causes are:

ble See Operator's
Manual
Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature range
The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors.
disappears.
Blind Spot Assist is operational again.
Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.

Inoperative The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors.
Parking Pilot Can‐ The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not been fas-
celed tened.
X Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and the
driver's door closed.
You have inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheel while

steering intervention was active.
X While steering intervention is active, make sure that the multifunc-
tion steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.
The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened.

X Use Parking Pilot again later (Y page 151).
Parking Pilot Inop‐ You have just carried out a large number of turning or parking maneu-
erative vers.
Parking Pilot will become available again after approximately ten
minutes (Y page 151).
X Switch off and restart the engine.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning.

Z

Parking Pilot Fin‐ The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.
ished The display message disappears automatically.
Distance Pilot Off Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated (Y page 144).

If it was not deactivated by the driver, a warning tone also sounds.
Distance Pilot Now Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is operational again after having been tem-
Available porarily unavailable. You can now reactivate Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC (Y page 141).
Distance Pilot Cur‐ Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is temporarily inoperative.
rently Unavailable Possible causes are:
See Operator's Man‐
ual
Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range
Rthe on-board voltage is too low.
disappears.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is operational again.
Distance Pilot Inop‐ Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is malfunctioning. Adaptive Brake Assist
erative may also have failed.
Distance Pilot Sus‐ You have depressed the accelerator pedal. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
pended is no longer controlling the speed of the vehicle.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
Distance Pilot A condition for activating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC has not been met.
- - - mph X Check the activation conditions for Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
(Y page 141).

Cruise Control Inop‐ Cruise control is malfunctioning.
erative A warning tone also sounds.

Cruise Control RA condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled.
- - - mph You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), for exam-
ple.
RESP® is deactivated. The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit.
X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and store
the speed.
or
X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 139).
or
X Reactivate ESP® (Y page 173).
Z
Tires
Check Tire Pressure The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss
Soon in pressure.
Possible causes:
Ryou have changed the positions of the wheels and tires or installed
new wheels and tires
Rthe tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped
G WARNING
Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:
Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be
greatly impaired.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat
tire (Y page 253).
X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire pressure.
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire pres-
sure is correct (Y page 276).
Check Tire Pressure The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display message
Then Restart Run and has not been restarted since.
Flat Indicator X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires.
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 276).
Run Flat Indicator The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty.
Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Vehicle

Depress Brake to You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in posi-
Start Engine tion i without depressing the brake pedal.
To Deselect P or N, You have attempted to shift the transmission to position k or h

Depress Brake and without starting the engine.
Start Engine X Start the engine.
i It is possible to shift the transmission from position j to the

desired position only if you depress the brake pedal. Only then can
the parking lock be deactivated. If you do not depress the brake
pedal, the DIRECT SELECT lever can still be moved but the parking
lock remains engaged.
i At transmission fluid temperatures below Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †) you can
only shift out of position P into another transmission position when
the engine is running.
Apply Brake to You attempted to shift the transmission to position k, i or h
Shift from 'P' without depressing the brake pedal.
Transmission Not in The driver's door is open or not fully closed and the transmission is in
P Risk of Vehicle position k, i or h.
Rolling Away A warning tone also sounds.
G WARNING
The vehicle may roll away.
X Close the driver's door completely.
Service Required Do You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction.
Not Shift Gears A warning tone also sounds.
Visit Dealer
If transmission position h is selected:
X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the trans-
mission from position h.
If position k, i or j is selected:
X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.
Only Shift to 'P' The vehicle is moving.

when Vehicle is Sta‐ X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
tionary attention to road and traffic conditions.
Z

To Engage Trans‐ You have attempted to shift from position h or i to position k.
miss. Position R X Shift the transmission to position k with the brake pedal
First Depress the depressed.

Brake
Reversing Not Possi‐ The automatic transmission is malfunctioning. You cannot back up.
ble Service Required X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Transmission Mal‐ The automatic transmission is malfunctioning.

function X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Transmission Mal‐ The automatic transmission is malfunctioning.

function Stop X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
Stop Vehicle Shift The automatic transmission has overheated.

to P Leave Engine X Drive on carefully.
Running The automatic transmission is available again when the display
message goes out.
X Wait until the automatic transmission has cooled down and the dis-
play message has disappeared.
Auxiliary Battery The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longer being
Malfunction charged.
X Until then, always shift the transmission to position j before you
switch off the engine.
X Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.
4matic Currently 4MATIC has overheated. The vehicle is only driven by the front wheels.
Unavailable X Drive on.
The airflow cools 4MATIC more quickly.
When the display message goes out, 4MATIC is available again and
the vehicle is driven by all four wheels.
4matic Inoperative 4MATIC is malfunctioning. The vehicle is only driven by the front
wheels.
A The tailgate is open

G WARNING

When the engine is running, exhaust gases can enter the vehicle inte-
rior if the tailgate is open.
X Close the tailgate.
? The hood is open.

G WARNING
The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.
X Close the hood.
C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.

X Close all the doors.
Ð The power steering is malfunctioning.

Power Steering Mal‐
function See Opera‐ G WARNING
tor's Manual You will need to use more force to steer.
X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.
If you are able to steer safely:

If you are unable to steer safely:
X Do not drive on.
Phone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiver

range.
X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appears
in the multifunction display.
¥ The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below
the minimum.
Check Washer Fluid X Add washer fluid (Y page 242).
Z

Wiper Malfunction‐ The windshield wipers are malfunctioning.
ing X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Hazard Warning The hazard warning lamps are faulty.

Flashers Malfunc‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
tioning
SmartKey
Â You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.

X Use the correct SmartKey.
Key Does Not Belong
to Vehicle
Â The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.

A warning tone sounds
Take Your Key from
X Remove the SmartKey.
Ignition
Â The SmartKey needs to be replaced.

Obtain a New Key
Â The SmartKey battery is discharged.

X Change the battery (Y page 67).
Replace Key Battery
Â The display message is shown for a maximum of 60 seconds and is

only a reminder.
Don't Forget Your You have opened the driver's door with the engine switched off. The
Key SmartKey is not in the ignition lock. A warning tone sounds.
X Take the SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle.
Â The SmartKey is not in the vehicle.

Key Not Detected If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle cen-
(red display message) trally or start the engine.
X Locate the SmartKey.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 203

Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, the
SmartKey is not detected whilst the engine is running.

X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and drive in SmartKey
mode.
Â The SmartKey is currently undetected.

X Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle.
Key Not Detected
(white display message) If the SmartKey still cannot be detected:
X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Â The SmartKey is continually undetected.

The SmartKey detection function has a temporary malfunction or is
Remove 'Start' But‐ faulty. A warning tone also sounds.
ton and Insert Key
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired
position.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

General notes
Some systems carry out a self-diagnosis when the ignition is switched on. Therefore, some indicator
and warning lamps may light up or flash temporarily. This behavior is non-critical.
These indicator and warning lamps only indicate a malfunction if they light up or flash after starting
the engine or whilst driving.
Z
204 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
Safety
Seat belts
Warning/ N Signal type

indicator Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
lamp
ü N After engine start, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds.
The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their
seat belts.
X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 41).
ü N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up. In addition, a
warning tone sounds for up to six seconds.
The driver's seat belt is not fastened.
The warning tone ceases.
ü N The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon as the
driver's or the front-passenger door is closed.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.
The warning lamp goes out.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat.
X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure
place.
The warning lamp goes out.
ü N The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warning
sounds.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The vehicle is being
driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph
(25 km/h).
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being driven faster
than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).
X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure
place.
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.
Safety systems

lamp
$J N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is lit
while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds.
G WARNING
The brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be
affected.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road
and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
$J N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is lit
while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds.
There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
G WARNING
The braking effect may be impaired.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road
and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not correct the malfunction.
Z

lamp
! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to a malfunction. Therefore,
BAS (Brake Assist), Active Brake Assist, ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), the
HOLD function and hill start assist, for example, are also deactivated.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed
above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking
distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, such
as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be available.
! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ABS is temporarily unavailable. Therefore, BAS, Active Brake Assist, ESP®, EBD
(electronic brake force distribution), the HOLD function and hill start assist, for
example, are also deactivated.
Possible causes are:
Rself-diagnosis is not yet complete
Rthe on-board voltage may be insufficient
G WARNING
above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for exam-
ple.
X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed
above 12 mph (20 km/h).
The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes
out.
If the warning lamp is still on:

lamp

! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warning tone
also sounds.
EBD is malfunctioning. Therefore, ABS, BAS, Active Brake Assist, ESP®, the HOLD
function and hill start assist, for example, are not available either.
G WARNING
ple.
! N $(USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake warning lamp and the yellow
÷å ABS, ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running.
$J ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Therefore, BAS, Active Brake Assist, EBD, the
HOLD function and hill start assist, for example, are not available either.
G WARNING
ple.
Z

lamp
÷ N The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.
ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of skidding or at
least one wheel has started to spin.
Cruise control or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated.
X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary.
X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
X Do not deactivate ESP®.
In rare cases (Y page 61) , it may be best to deactivate ESP®.
Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 60).
å N The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ESP® is deactivated. ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle if it starts to skid or if a
wheel starts to spin.
G WARNING
If ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
Further driving systems or driving safety systems are thus restricted.
X Reactivate ESP®.
In rare cases (Y page 61) , it may be best to deactivate ESP®.
Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 60).
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
If ESP® cannot be activated:

X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have ESP® checked.
÷å N The yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running.
ESP®, BAS, Active Brake Assist, the HOLD function and hill start assist are not
available due to a malfunction.
G WARNING
above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.

lamp

÷å N The yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running.
ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarily unavailable.
Active Brake Assist may have also failed.
Self-diagnosis is not yet complete
G WARNING
above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.
X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed
above 12 mph (20 km/h).
The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes
out.
If the warning lamp is still on:
!F N F (USA only), ! (Canada only): the red indicator lamp for the electric
parking brake flashes or lights up and/or the yellow warning lamp for the electric
parking brake lights up.
6 N The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The restraint system is malfunctioning.
G WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered uninten-
tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the restraint system checked.
For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 37).
Z
Engine
lamp
; N The yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.
There may be a malfunction, for example:
Rin the engine management
Rin the fuel injection system
Rin the exhaust system
Rin the ignition system
Rin the fuel system
The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergency
mode.
i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified specialist workshop as

soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. This is due to the legal
requirements in effect in these states. If in doubt, check whether such legal
regulations apply in the state in which you are currently driving.
æ N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.
The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.
X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
æ N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.
In addition, the ; Check Engine warning lamp may light up.
The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler cap.
X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist workshop.
? N The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and the
coolant temperature gage is at the start of the scale.
The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is malfunctioning.
The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of engine
damage if the coolant temperature is too high.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention
to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

lamp

? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running.
The coolant level is too low.
If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or
the electric engine radiator fan may be defective.
The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently.
to road and traffic conditions.
X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has
cooled down.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes
(Y page 242).
X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow,
slush or ice.
X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡
(120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.
X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain
and stop-and-go traffic.
? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warning
tone also sounds.
The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). The airflow to the engine
radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low.
G WARNING
The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.
Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which
may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur
just by opening the hood.
to road and traffic conditions.
X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has
cooled down.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes
(Y page 242).
X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow,
slush or ice.
Z

lamp
X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the nearest qualified
X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain
and stop-and-go traffic.
Driving systems
lamp
· N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. A warning
tone also sounds.
You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line of travel at too
high a speed.
X Be prepared to brake immediately.
X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take
evasive action.
Further information on the distance warning function of Active Brake Assist
(Y page 58).
Function restrictions 213
General notes Navigation announcements are intended to

direct you while driving without diverting your
attention from the road and driving.
The multimedia system section in this Opera-
tor's Manual describes the basic principles for Please always use this feature instead of con-
operation. More information can be found in the sulting the map display for directions. Looking
Digital Operator's Manual. at the icons or map display can distract you from
traffic conditions and driving, and increase the
risk of an accident.
Important safety notes This equipment complies with FCC radiation
exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equip-
ment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF)
G WARNING Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65.
If you operate information systems and com- This equipment has very low levels of RF energy
munication equipment integrated in the vehi- that is deemed to comply without maximum
permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). How-
Multimedia system
ever, it is recommended to install it at a distance
the traffic situation. You could also lose con- of at least 8 inches (approx. 20 cm) between the
trol of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci- radiation source and a person's body (not
dent. including limbs such as hands, wrists, feet and
Only operate this equipment when the traffic legs).
situation permits. If you are not sure that this G WARNING
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention Modifications to electronic components, their
to traffic conditions and operate the equip- software as well as wiring can impair their
ment when the vehicle is stationary. function and/or the function of other net-
You must observe the legal requirements for the worked components. In particular, systems
country in which you are currently driving when relevant to safety could also be affected. As a
operating the multimedia system. result, these may no longer function as inten-
The multimedia system calculates the route to ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of
the destination without taking the following into the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an
account, for example: accident and injury.
Rtraffic lights Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-
Rstop and yield signs tronic components or their software. You
Rparking or stopping restrictions should have all work to electrical and elec-
Rroad narrowing tronic equipment carried out at a qualified
Rother road and traffic rules and regulations specialist workshop.
The multimedia system may give incorrect nav-
igation recommendations if the actual street/
traffic situation does not correspond with the Function restrictions
digital map's data.
For example: For safety reasons, some functions are restric-
Ra diverted route ted or unavailable while the vehicle is in motion.
Rthe road layout or the direction of a one-way You will notice this, for example, because either
street has been changed you will not be able to select certain menu items
or a message will appear to this effect.
For this reason, you must always observe road
and traffic rules and regulations during your
journey. Road and traffic rules and regulations
always have priority over multimedia system
driving recommendations.
Z
214 Operating system
Operating system the media source or set the volume, the sound
is automatically switched on.
Overview i Navigation announcements will be heard
even if the sound is muted.
General notes
! Do not use the space in front of the display Functions
for storage. Objects placed here could dam- The multimedia system has the following func-
age the display or impair its function. Avoid tions:
any direct contact with the display surface.
Pressure on the display surface may result in RRadio mode
impairments to the display, which could be RMedia mode with media search
irreversible. RSound systems
Wearing polarized sunglasses may impair your RNavigation system
ability to read the display. COMAND: navigation via the hard drive
Multimedia system
The display has an automatic temperature-con- Audio 20: navigation via SD card
trolled switch-off feature. The brightness is RCommunication functions
automatically reduced if the temperature is too
high. The display may temporarily switch off RSIRIUS Weather (COMAND)
completely. RVehicle functions with system settings
RFavorites functions
Cleaning instructions
Controller
! Do not touch the display. The display has a
very sensitive high-gloss surface; there is a The controller in the center console lets you:
risk of scratching. If you have to clean the Rselect menu items on the display
screen, however, use a mild cleaning agent
Renter characters
and a soft, lint-free cloth.
Rselect a destination on the map
The display must be switched off and have
Rsave entries
cooled down before you start cleaning. Do not
apply pressure to the display surface when The controller can be:
cleaning it, as this could cause irreversible dam- Rturned 3
age to the display.
Rslid left or right 1
Rslid forwards or back 4
Switching the multimedia system
Rslid diagonally 2
on/off
Rpressed briefly or pressed and held7
X Press the q control knob.
Back button
Adjusting the volume
You can use the % button to exit a menu or to
X Turn the q control knob. call up the main menu of the current operating
The volume is adjusted: mode.
X To exit the menu: briefly press the %
Rfor the currently selected media source
button.
Rduring traffic or navigation announcements
The multimedia system changes to the next
Rin hands-free mode during an active call higher menu level in the current operating
mode.
Switching the sound on or off X To call up the main menu: press the %
button for longer than two seconds.
X Press the 8 button on the control panel. The multimedia system changes to the main
If the audio output is switched off, the status menu of the current operating mode.
line will show the 8 symbol. If you switch
Operating system 215
Favorites button Navigation mode

You can assign predefined functions using the Important safety notes
g favorites button and call them up by press-
ing the button (Y page 215). G WARNING
If you operate information systems and com-
Favorites munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
Calling up and exiting favorites the traffic situation. You could also lose con-
trol of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci-
X To call up: press the g button on the con-
troller. dent.
X Select a favorite, e.g. Vehicle
Vehicle. Only operate this equipment when the traffic
The favorites are displayed. situation permits. If you are not sure that this
Multimedia system
X To exit: press the g button again. is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
Adding favorites ment when the vehicle is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the

Adding predefined favorites country in which you are currently driving when
X Press the g button. operating the navigation system.
X COMAND: slide 6 the controller.
X Audio 20: slide 5 or 6 the controller. General notes
The menu bar is displayed.
Among other things, correct functioning of the
X Select Reassign.
Reassign navigation system depends on GPS reception. In
The categories are displayed. certain situations, GPS reception may be
X Select a category. impaired, there may be interference or there
The favorites are displayed. may be no reception at all, e.g. in tunnels or
X Select a favorite. parking garages.
X COMAND: to add the favorite to the desired Audio 20 is equipped with Garmin® MAP PILOT
position, turn and press the controller. (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
If a favorite has already been added at this The Garmin® MAP PILOT operating instructions
position, it will be overwritten. are stored on the SD card as a PDF file. The SD
X Audio 20: to add the favorite to the desired card box contains a quick guide.
position, turn, slide 5 or 6 and press the The following descriptions apply to navigation
controller. with COMAND. Further information can be
If a favorite has already been added at this found in the Digital Operator's Manual.
position, it will be overwritten.
Selecting a route type and route options
Adding your own favorites
You can add climate control as a favorite, for Multimedia system:
example. X NaviQNavigation
Select Navi Navigation.
X Select VehicleQVehicle
Vehicle Vehicle Settings.
Settings The map shows the vehicle's current position.
X Press and hold the g button until the X Slide 6 the controller.
favorites are displayed. X Select Options
OptionsQRoute
Route Settings.
Settings
X Add a favorite to the desired position. Notes for route types:
If a favorite has already been added at this
REco Route
position, it will be overwritten.
RDynamic Traffic Route
Z
Traffic reports on the route for the route guid- X Select the location.
ance are taken into account (not available in If available, the ZIP code is shown. If there are
all countries). different ZIP codes available for the location,
RDynamic TRF. Route After Request the corresponding digits are displayed with an
You can decide whether or not current traffic X.
reports should be included in the route cal- X Enter the street and house number.
culation (not available in all countries). The address is in the menu.
RCalculate Alternative Routes Further options for destination entry:
Different routes are being calculated. In order Rsearch for a keyword
to do so, instead of Start
Start, select the menu The keyword search finds destinations using
item Continue.
Continue fragments of words.
X To avoid/use route options: select Avoid
Rselect the last destination
Options.
Options
Rselect a contact
X Select a route option.
Rselect a POI
Multimedia system
Notes for route options:

You can search for a POI by location, name or
RUse Toll Roads telephone number.
The route calculation includes roads which Rselect destination on the map
require you to pay a usage fee (toll). Renter intermediate destination
RNumber of Occupants in the Vehicle:
You can map the route to the destination
(only available in the USA) yourself with up to four intermediate destina-
Prerequisite: your vehicle meets the access tions.
conditions for carpool lanes. Rselect destinations from Mercedes-Benz
Carpool lanes will be included if the carpool Apps
lanes option is activated. Rselect geo-coordinates
Entering an address Calculating the route

Multimedia system: Prerequisite: the address has been entered and
X NaviQNavigation
Select Navi Navigation. is in the menu.
The map shows the vehicle's current position. X Select Start or Continue
Continue.
X Slide 6 the controller. The route is calculated with the selected route
X Select Destination
DestinationQAddressAddress Entry.
Entry type and the selected route options.
Enter an address, e.g. as follows: If route guidance has already been activated,
a prompt will appear asking whether you wish
Rcity or ZIP code, street, house number
to end the current route guidance.
Rstate/province, city or ZIP code X Select Cancel Active Route Guidance or
Rcity or ZIP code, center Set as Intermediate Destination.
Destination
Rstreet, city or ZIP code, intersection Cancel Active Route Guidance cancels
X Select City
City. the current route guidance and starts route
The city in which the vehicle is currently loca- calculation to the new destination.
ted (current vehicle position) is at the top. Set as Intermediate Destination adds
Below this, you will see locations for which the new destination in addition to the existing
route guidance has already been carried out. destination and opens the intermediate des-
X Enter the city. tinations list.
The G symbol: the location is contained on
the digital map multiple times.
X To switch to the list: slide the 5 control-
ler.
Connecting a mobile phone procedure that is relevant for your mobile phone
(COMAND) available. The mobile phone is always connec-
ted automatically after authorization. Further
Requirements information on using a mobile phone with the
multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's
For telephony via the Bluetooth® interface, you Manual).
require a Bluetooth®-capable mobile phone. The If the multimedia system does not detect your
mobile phone must support Hands-Free Profile mobile phone, this may be due to particular
1.0 or above. security settings on your mobile phone (see the
Multimedia system: manufacturer's operating instructions).
Only one mobile phone can be connected to the
X Select Vehicle
VehicleQSystem
System Set‐ multimedia system at any one time.
tingsQActivate
tings Activate Bluetooth.
Bluetooth
Searching for a mobile phone
X Activate Bluetooth® O.
Multimedia system:
Mobile phone:
Multimedia system
X Select Tel/®QConn.
Tel/ Conn.
X Activate Bluetooth® and, if necessary, Blue- Device Search for PhonesQStart
DeviceQSearch Phones Start
tooth® visibility for other devices (see the Search.
Search
manufacturer's operating instructions). The available mobile phones are displayed.
The Bluetooth® device names for all of one man- Symbols in the device list
ufacturer's products might be identical. To
make it possible to clearly identify your mobile Sym- Explanation
phone, change the device name (see the man- bol
ufacturer's operating instructions). Ï New mobile phone found, not yet
If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (Phone authorized.
Book Access Profile) and MAP (Message
Access Profile) Bluetooth® profiles, the follow- Ñ Mobile phone is authorized, but is
ing information will be transmitted after you not connected.
connect:
RPhone book Connecting a mobile phone
RCall lists Authorization using Secure Simple Pairing:
RText messages and e-mail X Select mobile phone.
A code is displayed in the multimedia system
i Further information on suitable mobile and on the mobile phone.
phones can be found at: http://
X If codes match: select Yes on the multimedia
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
system.
i In the USA, you can get in touch with the X Confirm code on the mobile phone. Depend-
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center ing on the mobile phone used, confirm the
on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372). connection to the multimedia system and for
In Canada, you can get in touch with the Cus- the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® profiles. The
tomer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100. prompt to confirm may take up to two
minutes to be displayed (see the manufactur-
Searching for and authorizing (connect- er's operating instructions).
ing) a mobile phone X If the codes are different: select No on the
multimedia system.
Before using your mobile phone with the multi- The process is canceled.
media system for the first time, you will need to Repeat authorization.
search for the phone and then authorize (con-
nect) it. Depending on the mobile phone, author-
ization either takes place by means of Secure
Simple Pairing or by entering a passkey. The
multimedia system automatically makes the
Z
Authorization by entering a passkey (passcode): If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (Phone
X Select the Bluetooth® name of the mobile Book Access Profile) and MAP (Message
phone. Access Profile) Bluetooth® profiles, the follow-
The input menu for the passkey is displayed. ing information is transmitted after you connect
X Choose a one to sixteen-digit number combi-
the main telephone:
nation as a passkey. RPhone book
X Enter the passkey on the multimedia system. RCall lists
X Press ¬ to confirm. RText messages and e-mail
X Enter and confirm the passkey on the mobile
i Further information on suitable mobile
phone. Depending on the mobile phone used, phones can be found at: http://
confirm the connection to the multimedia sys- www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
tem and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth®
profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up i In the USA, you can get in touch with the
to two minutes to be displayed (see the man- Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
Multimedia system
ufacturer's operating instructions). on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372).

In Canada, you can get in touch with the Cus-
tomer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100.
Connecting a mobile phone (Audio 20)
Searching for and authorizing (connect-
Requirements ing) a mobile phone
For telephony via the Bluetooth® interface, you Before using your mobile phone with the multi-
require at least one Bluetooth®-capable mobile media system for the first time, you will need to
phone depending on use of one-telephone search for the phone and then authorize (con-
mode or two-telephone mode. The mobile nect) it. Depending on the mobile phone, author-
phone must support Hands-Free Profile 1.0 or ization either takes place by means of Secure
above. Simple Pairing or by entering a passkey. The
In two-telephone mode you can use all the multimedia system automatically makes the
functions of the multimedia system with the procedure that is relevant for your mobile phone
main telephone. With the additional tele- available. The mobile phone is always connec-
phone, you can receive incoming calls. ted automatically after authorization. Further
information on using a mobile phone with the
Multimedia system: multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's
X Select Vehicle
VehicleQSystem
System Set‐ Manual).
tings
tingsQActivate
Activate Bluetooth.
Bluetooth If the multimedia system does not detect your
X Activate Bluetooth® O. mobile phone, this may be due to particular
security settings on your mobile phone (see the
Mobile phone: manufacturer's operating instructions).
X Activate Bluetooth® and, if necessary, Blue- Searching for a mobile phone
tooth® visibility for other devices (see the Multimedia system:
manufacturer's operating instructions). X Select Tel/®QConn.
Tel/ Conn. DeviceQCon‐
Device Con‐
The Bluetooth® device names for all of one man- nect New Device
Device.
ufacturer's products might be identical. To X Select Connect via Vehicle.
Vehicle
make it possible to clearly identify your mobile X Select mobile phone.
phone, change the device name (see the man-
ufacturer's operating instructions). Connecting a mobile phone
X One-telephone mode: select Connect as
New Main Phone.
Phone
X Two-telephone mode: select Connect as
Additional Phone when a mobile phone is
already connected.
X Authorization using Secure Simple Pair- The following external media sources can be
ing: used:
A code is displayed in the multimedia system RApple® devices (e.g. iPhone®)
and on the mobile phone. RUSB devices (e.g. USB stick, MP3 player)
X Confirm code on the mobile phone. Depend- (Y page 220)
ing on the mobile phone used, confirm the RCD
connection to the multimedia system and for
RDVD (COMAND)
the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® profiles. The
prompt to confirm may take up to two RSD cards
minutes to be displayed (see the manufactur- Rvia devices connected by Bluetooth®
er's operating instructions).
X If the codes are different: select No on the
i Information on single CD/DVD drive or DVD
multimedia system. changer (see the Digital Operator's Manual).
The process is canceled.
Repeat authorization. Selecting using the device list
Multimedia system
or Multimedia system:
X Authorization by entering a passkey
X Select Media
MediaQDevices
Devices.
(passcode): enter any one- to sixteen-digit The available media sources will be shown.
number sequence which you have chosen The # dot indicates the current setting.
yourself into the passkey input menu.
X Select the media source.
X Press ¬ to confirm.
Playable files are played.
X Enter and confirm the passkey on the mobile
phone. Depending on the mobile phone used,
confirm the connection to the multimedia sys- Inserting/removing an SD card
tem and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth®
profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up Important safety notes
to two minutes to be displayed (see the man- G WARNING
ufacturer's operating instructions).
SD cards are small parts. They can be swal-
lowed and cause choking. This poses an
Symbols in the device manager increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
The symbols are shown in color depending on Keep the SD card out of the reach of children.
their use. If a SD card is swallowed, seek medical atten-
Symbol Explanation tion immediately.
Mobile phone connected to the ! If you are no longer using the SD card, you
multimedia system should remove it and store it outside the vehi-
cle. High temperatures can damage the card.
Main telephone with full range of
functions Inserting an SD card
Additional telephone for incoming The SD card slot is located on the control panel.
calls in two telephone mode X Insert the SD card into the SD card slot until
the SD card engages. The side with the con-
tacts must face down.
Media mode Removing an SD card
General notes X Press the SD card.
The SD card is ejected.
If you wish to play external media sources, the X Remove the SD card.
appropriate media mode must already be turned
on. Further information on media mode (see the
Digital Operator's Manual).
Z
Connecting USB devices
X Connect the USB device to the USB port.

Multimedia system
There are two USB ports in the stowage space

under the armrest.
X Select the media source (Y page 219).
Stowage areas 221
Loading guidelines RPosition heavy loads as far forward as possi-

ble and as low down in the cargo compart-
ment as possible.
G WARNING RThe load must not protrude above the upper
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or edge of the seat backrests.
not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip RAlways place the load against the rear or front
over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle seat backrests. Make sure that the seat
occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu- backrests are securely locked into place.
larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud- RAlways place the load behind unoccupied
den change in direction. seats if possible.
RUse the cargo tie-down rings and the parcel
Always store objects so that they cannot be
nets to transport loads and luggage.
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
RUse cargo tie-down rings and fastening mate-
loads against slipping or tipping before the rials appropriate for the weight and size of the
journey. load.
RHook in the cargo net when loading.
Stowage and features

G WARNING RThe maximum load capacity of the stowage
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust well under the cargo compartment floor is
gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate 55 lbs (25 kg).
is open when the engine is running, particu- RSecure the load with sufficiently strong and
larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes wear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edges for
could enter the passenger compartment. protection.
There is a risk of poisoning. ! Do not position the load on one part of the
Turn off the engine before opening the tail- folding cargo compartment floor only. The
maximum load capacity of the folding cargo
compartment floor is 220 lbs (100 kg). Dis-
tribute the weight evenly to avoid damaging
G WARNING the cargo compartment floor. Place a solid
The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can board under the load if necessary. Please
become very hot. If you come into contact note that the load on the cargo compartment
floor will be increased when the load is lashed
with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn
down.
yourself. There is a risk of injury.
Always be particularly careful around the
exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow Stowage areas
these components to cool down before touch-
ing them. Stowage spaces
The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle Important safety notes

are dependent on the distribution of the load
within the vehicle. G WARNING
Observe the following notes when loading and If you transport objects in the vehicle interior
transporting a load: and these are not adequately secured, they
RNever exceed the maximum permissible could slip or be flung around and thereby
gross vehicle mass or the gross axle weight strike vehicle occupants. In addition, cup
rating for the vehicle (including occupants). holders, open stowage spaces and mobile
The values are specified on the vehicle iden- phone brackets may not always be able to
tification plate on the B-pillar of the driver's hold the objects placed in them in the event of
door. an accident. There is a risk of injury, particu-
RThe cargo compartment is the preferred place
larly in the event of sharp braking or sudden
to carry objects.
changes of direction.
Z
222 Stowage areas
RAlways stow objects in such a way that they X To open: press marking :.
cannot be tossed about in these or similar Make sure that the eyeglasses compartment is
situations. always closed while the vehicle is in motion.
RAlways make sure that objects do not pro- Stowage compartment in the front center
trude out of the stowage spaces, luggage console
nets or stowage nets.
REnsure that closable stowage spaces are
shut before beginning your journey.
RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-
ted, sharp-edged, fragile or large objects in
the cargo compartment.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 221).

Stowage compartments in the front

Glove box
X To open: press the marking on cover :.
i Depending on the vehicle equipment, there
may be an ashtray in the center console
instead of a storage compartment.
Stowage compartment in front of the arm-
rest (vehicles with automatic transmis-
sion)
X To open: pull handle : and open glove box

flap ;.
X To close: fold glove box flap ; upwards until
it engages.
There is a pen holder at the top of the glove box
flap.
Eyeglasses compartment
X To open: press the marking on cover :.
i You can remove the non-slip mat and the

insert for cleaning. When removing the insert
you will have to overcome some slight resist-
ance.
Stowage areas 223
Stowage compartment under the armrest Folding table

G WARNING
If the folding table is folded out while the vehi-
cle is in motion, passengers can be thrown
against it, particularly in the event of an acci-
dent, heavy braking or a sudden change of
direction. There is a risk of injury.
Fold the folding table away before each jour-
ney.
! Do not load the folding table with more than

the maximum permissible load of 4.4 lbs
X To open: on vehicles with movable armrests, (2 kg).
make sure that the armrest is in the rearmost
position.

X Press button : and fold the armrest up.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the arm-
rest can be moved backwards or forwards in a
longitudinal direction.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the fol-
lowing may be in the stowage compartment: a
multimedia connector unit with an SD card slot
and 2 USB ports, e.g. for use with an iPod®,
iPhone® or MP3 player (see the Digital Opera-
tor's Manual).
X To fold out: pull folding table : up in the
Stowage spaces in the rear passenger direction of the arrow to the desired position.
compartment X To fold away: push folding table : down
onto the backrest.
Stowage compartment in the rear center
console
Parcel nets
Stowage nets are located:
Rin the front-passenger footwell
Ron the back of the driver's and the front-
passenger seat
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 221)
and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces
(Y page 221).
Folding backrest on the front-

X To open: pull down the top of stowage com- passenger seat (Canada only)
partment : by the edge of the handle.
G WARNING
i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, If the backrest of the front-passenger seat is
there may be an open stowage space above
the stowage compartment. folded forward, rear seat passengers can
come in contact with parts of the seat mech-
Z
224 Stowage areas
anism. particularly in the event of an accident, X To open: fold down seat armrest :.
heavy braking or a sudden change of direc- X Pull the center head restraint on the rear
tion. There is a risk of injury. bench seat into the uppermost position
(Y page 86).
If a passenger travels in the vehicle while the
front-passenger seat is folded forward, they
must sit in the rear seat behind the driver.
The backrest of the front-passenger seat can be

folded forwards to increase the cargo compart-
ment capacity.
Once you no longer need the backrest on the
front-passenger side to be used as a load sur-
face, fold the backrest back into place.
X Slide locking mechanism = in the direction

of the arrow.
X Swing flap ; fully to the side.
Flap ; is held open by a magnet.
X To close: swing flap ; in the cargo compart-
ment back until it engages.
X Fold armrest : up fully if necessary.
X To fold forward: gently push the backrest
back.
X Pull release handle : and fold the backrest Cargo compartment enlargement
fully onto the seat cushion until it engages.
X To fold back: gently push the backrest down
and pull release handle :. G WARNING
X Fold the seat backrest back until it engages.
If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat
backrest are not engaged they could fold for-
wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the
Through-loading facility in the rear event of an accident.
passenger compartment
RThe vehicle occupant would thereby be
pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench
seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The
seat belt can no longer offer the intended
level of protection and could even cause
injuries.
RObjects or loads in the trunk/cargo com-
partment cannot be restrained by the seat
backrest.
Before every trip, make sure that the seat
backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat
are engaged.
Stowage areas 225
! Before folding the backrest in the rear com-

partment forwards, make sure that the rear
compartment armrest and the cup holder are
folded in. They may otherwise be damaged.
The left-hand and right-hand rear seat backrests
can be folded forwards separately to increase
the cargo compartment capacity.
Vehicles without the EASY-VARIO-PLUS

system
X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
Folding the rear seat backrests forward forward if necessary.
X Fold seat backrest : back until it engages.
Red lock status indicator ; is no longer visi-

ble.
X Adjust the head restraints if necessary
(Y page 86).
back if necessary.
Vehicles with the EASY-VARIO-PLUS

system
X Fully insert the backrest head restraints if Folding the rear seat backrests forward
necessary (Y page 86).
forward if necessary.
X Pull left-hand or right-hand release handle ;
of the seat backrest forward.
Corresponding seat backrest : is released.
X Fold backrest : forward.
back if necessary.
Folding the rear seat backrest back

! Make sure that the seat belt does not X Fully insert the backrest head restraints
become trapped when folding the rear seat (Y page 86).
backrest back. Otherwise, it could be dam-
X Move the rear seat as far back as possible
aged.
(Y page 226).
X Pull right or left loop ; on the backrest in the
direction of the arrow.
X Fold down backrest : fully.
back if necessary.
Z
226 Stowage areas
Folding the rear seat backrest back X Move the rear bench seat as far forwards as
possible (Y page 226).
! Make sure that the seat belt does not The load area is increased.
become trapped when folding the rear seat
backrest back. Otherwise, it could be dam- X Fold the rear seat backrest forwards.
aged. The load area is lengthened.
X Fold the folding backrest on the front-
passenger seat (Y page 223) and the corre-
sponding backrest in the rear forwards.
The load area is lengthened.
Adjusting the angle of the rear seat backr-

ests

X Swing backrest : back.
X Adjust the backrest to the desired angle by
pulling the loop (Y page 226).
X Adjust the head restraints if necessary
(Y page 86).
You can set the angle of the seat backrests to
one of 13 detent positions.
back if necessary.
X Pull right or left release loop ; forwards in
Notes on using the cargo compartment the direction of the arrow.
X Pull backrest : forward in the direction of
the arrow, or push it back and let it engage.
X To ensure that the backrest has engaged, lean
firmly against backrest :.
The angle and fore/aft position of the left and
right rear seats can be separately adjusted for
each seat in order to make better use of the
cargo compartment.
Depending on the angle of the backrest, there-
fore, the right and left rear seats can be pushed
back varying distances until the backrest is rest-
Making the best use of your cargo compart- ing against the cargo compartment cover.
ment: If the backrest comes into contact with sur-
X Set seat backrest : to the load position (90°
rounding parts of the cargo compartment pan-
eling, reduce the angle of the backrest.
position) (Y page 226).
The load capacity is increased. Adjusting the seat fore-and-aft position
X Vehicles with a height-adjustable cargo com-
partment floor: move the cargo compartment
! When moving the rear seats back, make
sure there are no objects in the footwell or
floor to the upper position (Y page 229).
behind the seats. The rear seats and/or the
The load surface becomes flat.
objects could otherwise be damaged.
Stowage areas 227
Bag hook
G WARNING
The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects
or items of luggage. Objects or items of lug-
gage could be flung around and thereby hit
vehicle occupants when braking or abruptly
changing directions. There is a risk of injury.
Only hang light objects on the bag hooks.
Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile
objects on the bag hooks.
X Lift the left or right release handle and slide
the corresponding seat forwards or back- ! The bag hook can bear a maximum load of
wards. 6.6lbs (3kg) and should not be used to secure
X Let go of the release handle again. a load.

Make sure that you hear the seat engage in
position.
Securing loads
Cargo tie-down rings
Observe the following notes on securing loads:
RObserve the loading guidelines (Y page 221).
RSecure the load using the cargo tie-down
rings.
RDistribute the load on the cargo tie-down : Bag hook
rings evenly.
RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure a
load, as these are only intended as an anti-slip Cargo compartment cover
protection for light loads.
RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edges or Important safety notes
corners.
G WARNING
RPad sharp edges for protection.
On its own, the cargo compartment cover
cannot secure or restrain heavy objects,
items of luggage and heavy loads. You could
be hit by an unsecured load during sudden
changes in direction, braking or in the event of
an accident. There is an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
Always store objects so that they cannot be
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by
using tie downs, even if you are using the
: Cargo tie-down rings cargo compartment cover.
! When loading the vehicle, make sure that

you do not stack the load in the cargo com-
Z
228 Stowage areas
partment higher than the lower edge of the right or left-hand side using grip = on the
side windows. Do not place heavy objects on lower edge.
top of the cargo compartment cover. X Push cargo compartment cover : into oppo-
! When removing and installing the cargo site anchorage ;.
compartment cover, ensure that its end caps X Remove cargo compartment cover :
do not scrape the light-colored parts of the upwards.
vehicle. X To install: set cargo compartment cover :
The cargo compartment cover is located behind on the right or left-hand side in anchorage ;.
the rear bench seat backrest. X Push in the opposite end cap of cargo com-
partment cover : and insert cargo compart-
Extending/retracting the cargo com- ment cover : into opposite anchorage ;.
partment cover
Stowage well under the cargo com-
partment floor

G WARNING
If you drive when the cargo compartment floor
is open, objects could be flung around, thus
striking vehicle occupants. There is a risk of
injury, particularly in the event of sudden
braking or a sudden change in direction.
X To extend: pull the cargo compartment cover Always close the cargo compartment floor
back by grab handle : and clip it into retain- before a journey.
ers ; on the left and right.
X To retract: unhook the cargo compartment ! The maximum load capacity of the stowage
cover from retainers ; on the left and right well under the cargo compartment floor is
and guide it forwards by grab handle : until 55 lbs (25 kg).
it is fully retracted. There is a stowage area for TIREFIT, the vehicle
tool kit, a folding box, etc. underneath the cargo
Installing/removing the cargo compart- compartment floor.
ment cover
Opening/closing the cargo compart-
ment floor
X To remove: make sure that the cargo com-

partment cover is rolled up.
X Push in the end cap of cargo compartment
cover : in the direction of the arrow on the
Stowage areas 229
X To open: open the tailgate.

X Holding ribbing ;, press handle : down-
wards.
Handle : folds up.
X Swing the cargo compartment floor up using
handle : until it rests against the cargo com-
partment cover.
X To raise: using handle :, lift up cargo com-

partment floor ; in the direction of arrow =
and pull it upwards.
X Lower cargo compartment floor ; again. To

do this, push the cargo compartment floor
away so that it engages in the guide on the
upper level.
Cargo compartment floor ; engages in the
X Fold out hook = on the underside of the upper position.
cargo compartment floor. i Carry out this step using both hands.
X To lower: raise cargo compartment floor ;
slightly using handle : and pull it towards
you.
X Lower cargo compartment floor ; again
slowly. Whilst doing so, press the cargo com-
partment floor into the lower level.
Cargo compartment floor ; engages in the
lower position.
Roof carrier
X Attach hook = to the cargo compartment's Important safety notes
upper seal ?.
X To close: detach hook = from upper seal ?. G WARNING
X Fasten hook = to the bracket on the under- When you load the roof, the center of gravity
side of the cargo compartment floor. of the vehicle rises and the driving character-
X Fold the cargo compartment floor down. istics change. If you exceed the maximum roof
X Press the cargo compartment floor down until load, the driving characteristics, as well as
it engages. steering and braking, will be greatly impaired.
Setting the height of the cargo compart- Never exceed the maximum roof load and
ment floor adjust your driving style.
The stowage well under the cargo compartment
floor can be increased or decreased in size as ! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only
necessary. To do this, you can lock the floor at use roof carriers that have been tested and
two different heights. The upper catch gives a approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. This
flat load surface when the rear bench seat is helps to prevent damage to the vehicle.
folded forward.
Z
230 Features
Position the load on the roof rack in such a be distracted from the traffic conditions and
way that the vehicle will not sustain damage you could lose control of the vehicle. There is
even when it is in motion.
a risk of an accident and injury.
Ensure that, depending on the vehicle's
equipment, you can raise the panorama roof Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is
with power tilt/sliding panel fully and open stationary. Only use the cup holder for con-
the tailgate fully when the roof carrier is tainers of the right size. Always close the con-
installed. tainer, particularly if the liquid is hot.
You will find information on the maximum roof
load in the "Technical data" section G WARNING
(Y page 300).
The heating elements of the cup holder can
An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roof load become very hot. You could burn yourself on
may become detached from the vehicle. You
must therefore ensure that you observe the roof them.
carrier manufacturer's installation instructions. There is a risk of injury.
Do not touch the hot heating elements of the
Attaching the roof carrier cup holder. Always make sure that children
cannot access the hot heating elements of the
cup holder. Never leave children unsuper-
vised in the vehicle.
G WARNING
If you transport objects in the vehicle interior
and these are not adequately secured, they
could slip or be flung around and thereby
strike vehicle occupants. In addition, cup
holders, open stowage spaces and mobile
phone brackets may not always be able to
X Open and fold the covers : upwards care- hold the objects placed in them in the event of
fully in the direction of the arrow. an accident. There is a risk of injury, particu-
X Only secure the roof carrier to the anchorage larly in the event of sharp braking or sudden
points under covers :. changes of direction.
X Observe the manufacturer's installation RAlways stow objects in such a way that they
instructions. cannot be tossed about in these or similar
situations.
RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-
Features trude out of the stowage spaces, luggage
nets or stowage nets.
Cup holder
REnsure that closable stowage spaces are
Important safety notes shut before beginning your journey.
RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-
G WARNING
ted, sharp-edged, fragile or large objects in
The cup holder cannot hold a container secure the cargo compartment.
whilst traveling. If you use a cup holder whilst
traveling, the container may be flung around ! Only use the cup holders for containers of
and liquid may be spilled. The vehicle occu- the right size and which have lids. The drinks
pants may come into contact with the liquid could otherwise spill.
and if it is hot, they may be scalded. You may Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 221).
Features 231
The stowage compartments in the doors provide ! Close the cup holder before folding the rear
space for bottles: seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup holder
Rfront: capacity up to 51 fl. oz. (1.5 l) could be damaged.
Rrear: capacity up to 17 fl. oz. (0.5 l)
Cup holder in the front center console
X Fold down the rear seat armrest.

X To open: press the front of cup holder :
or ;.
Cup holder : or ; extends automatically.
The cup holder and the rubber mat underneath X To close: slide cup holder : or ; back until
can be removed for cleaning. Clean them with it engages.
clean, lukewarm water only.
X To remove: carefully pull in upper sections of
cup holder : on the driver's and front-
passenger sides until they release. Sun visors
X Lift the cup holder upwards ; until it can be Overview
removed.
G WARNING
If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is folded
up when the vehicle is in motion, you could be
blinded by incident light. There is a risk of an
accident.
Always keep the mirror cover folded down
while driving.
X To install: insert cup holder into lateral

curved sections ; in the stowage compart-
ment. Insert the cup holder so that the wedge
of the upper section of cup holder : faces
forwards.
X Press the cup holder downwards until it
engages on the right and left-hand sides.
Cup holder in the rear seat armrest : Mirror light

; Bracket
! Do not sit on or support your body weight on = Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket
the rear seat armrest when it is folded down,
as you could otherwise damage it.
Z
232 Features
? Vanity mirror Rear compartment ashtray

A Mirror cover
Vanity mirror in the sun visor

Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor is
clipped into bracket ; and mirror cover A has
been folded up.
Glare from the side

X Fold down the sun visor.
X Pull the sun visor out of retainer ;.
X Swing the sun visor to the side.
X To open: pull cover = out by its top edge.
X To remove: pull insert ; by recess : in the
direction of arrow ? until it audibly releases.

Ashtray X Lift insert ; up and out.
Front ashtray X To install the insert: install insert ; from
above into the holder and press down until it
! The stowage space under the ashtray is not engages.
heat resistant. Before placing lit cigarettes in
the ashtray, make sure that the ashtray is
properly engaged. Otherwise, the stowage
space could be damaged. Cigarette lighter
G WARNING
You can burn yourself if you touch the hot
heating element or the socket of the cigarette
lighter.
In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:
Rthe hot cigarette lighter falls
Ra child holds the hot cigarette lighter to
objects, for example
There is a risk of fire and injury.
Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.
X Vehicles with a stowage compartment
cover: press the lower section of cover :. Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is
The stowage compartment opens. out of reach of children. Never leave children
X To remove the insert: lift insert = up ; and unsupervised in the vehicle.
out.
Your attention must always be focused on the
X To re-install the insert: press insert = into
traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighter
the holder until it engages. when road and traffic conditions permit.
i If you remove the ashtray insert, you can use
the resulting compartment for stowage.
Features 233
Socket in the rear compartment center

console
X Pull the cover out by the top of the handle
edge.
X Lift up the cover of the socket.
Socket in the cargo compartment

cover: press the lower section of cover :.

The stowage compartment opens.
X Press in cigarette lighter ;.
Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automatically
when the heating element is red-hot.
X Lift up the cover of socket :.
12 V sockets
General notes Garage door opener
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni- General notes
The sockets can be used for accessories with a The HomeLink® garage door opener integrated
maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accessories in the rear-view mirror allows you to operate up
include such items as chargers for mobile to three different door and gate systems.
phones. Use the integrated garage door opener only on
If you use the sockets for long periods when the garage doors that:
engine is switched off, the battery may dis- Rhave safety stop and reverse features and
charge. Rmeet current U.S. federal safety standards
An emergency cut-out ensures that the on- Once programed, the integrated garage door
board voltage does not drop too low. If the on- opener in the rear-view mirror will assume the
board voltage is too low, the power to the sock- function of the garage door system's remote
ets is automatically cut. This ensures that there control. Please also read the operating instruc-
is sufficient power to start the engine. tions for the garage door system.
When programming a garage door opener, park
Socket in the front center console the vehicle outside the garage. Do not leave the
engine running while programming.
cover: press the lower section of the cover. Certain garage door drives are incompatible
The stowage compartment opens. with the integrated garage door opener. If you
have difficulty programing the integrated garage
X Lift up the cover of the socket. door opener, contact a Mercedes-Benz Service
Center.
Z
234 Features
Alternatively, you can call the following tele-

phone assistance services:
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
RCanada: Customer Service at
1-800-387-0100
RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free of
charge)
More information on HomeLink® and/or com-
patible products is also available online at
http://www.homelink.com.
Notes on the declaration of conformity Garage door remote control A is not included
(Y page 26). with the integrated garage door opener.
USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4 X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4 lock (Y page 114).
X Select one of buttons ; to ? to control the

Important safety notes garage door drive.
X To start program mode: press and hold one
G WARNING of buttons ; to ? on the integrated garage
When you operate or program the garage door door opener.
with the integrated garage door opener, per- The garage door opener is now in program
mode. After a short time, indicator lamp :
sons in the range of movement of the garage
lights up yellow.
door can become trapped or struck by the
Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soon as
garage door. There is a risk of injury. button ;, = or ? is stored for the first time.
When using the integrated garage door If the selected button has already been pro-
opener, always make sure that nobody is gramed, indicator lamp : will only light up
within the range of movement of the garage yellow after ten seconds have elapsed.
door. X Release button ;, = or ?. Indicator
lamp : flashes yellow.
G WARNING X To program the remote control: point
garage door remote control A towards but-
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust tons ; to ? on the rear-view mirror at a dis-
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling tance of 2 to 8 in (5 to 20 cm).
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There X Press and hold button B on remote control
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave A until indicator lamp : lights up green.
the engine running in enclosed spaces with- When indicator lamp : lights up green: pro-
out sufficient ventilation. gramming is finished.
When indicator lamp : flashes green: pro-
gramming was successful. The next step is to
Programming synchronize the rolling code (Y page 235).
X Release button B on remote control A for
Programming the buttons
the garage door drive system.
Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the
(Y page 234). programing procedure for the corresponding
button on the rear-view mirror. When doing
so, vary the distance between remote control
A and the rear-view mirror.
The required distance between remote con-
trol A and the integrated garage door opener
depends on the garage door drive system.
Features 235
Several attempts might be necessary. You Proceed as follows:

should test every position for at least Rif you live in Canada
25 seconds before trying another position.
Rif you have difficulties programming the
Synchronizing the rolling code garage door opener (regardless of where you
live) as you follow the programming steps.
Pay attention to the "Important safety notes"
X Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on the
(Y page 234).
integrated garage door opener.
If the garage door system uses a rolling code, After a short time, indicator lamp : lights up
you will also have to synchronize the garage yellow.
door system with the integrated garage door
X Release the button.
opener in the rear-view mirror. To do this you will
need to use the programming button on the door Indicator lamp : flashes yellow.
drive control panel. The programming button X Press button B of garage door remote con-
may be located in different places depending on trol A for two seconds, then release it for two
the manufacturer. It is usually located on the seconds.
door drive unit on the garage ceiling. X Press button B again for two seconds.

Familiarize yourself with the garage door drive X Repeat this sequence on button B of remote
operating instructions, e.g. under "Program- control A until indicator lamp : lights up
ming additional remote controls", before carry- green.
ing out the following steps. When indicator lamp : lights up green: pro-
Your vehicle must be within reach of the garage gramming is finished.
door or gate opener drive. Make sure that nei- When indicator lamp : flashes green: pro-
ther your vehicle nor any persons/objects are gramming was successful. The next step is to
present within the sweep of the door or gate. synchronize the rolling code.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition X Release button B of remote control A of the
lock (Y page 114). garage door drive.
X Get out of the vehicle. If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the
X Press the programming button on the door
programming process for the corresponding
button on the rear-view mirror. When doing
drive unit.
so, vary the distance between remote control
Usually, you now have 30 seconds to initiate A and the rear-view mirror.
the next step.
The required distance between remote con-
X Get into the vehicle. trol A and the integrated garage door opener
X Press previously programed button ;, = depends on the garage door drive system.
or ? on the integrated garage door opener Several attempts might be necessary. You
repeatedly and in quick succession until the should test every position for at least
door closes. 25 seconds before trying another position.
The rolling code synchronization is then com-
plete. Problems when programming
If you are experiencing problems programming
Notes on programming the remote con- the integrated garage door opener on the rear-
trol view mirror, take note of the following instruc-
Canadian radio frequency laws require a "break" tions:
(or interruption) of the transmission signals RCheck the transmitter frequency used by
after broadcasting for a few seconds. Therefore, garage door drive remote control A and
these signals may not last long enough for the whether it is supported. The transmitter fre-
integrated garage door opener. The signal is not quency can usually be found on the back of
detected during programming. Comparable with remote control A for the garage door drive.
Canadian law, some U.S. garage door openers
also feature a "break". The integrated garage door opener is com-
patible with devices that have units which
Z
236 Features
operate in the frequency range of 280 to Clearing the memory

433 MHz.
RReplace the batteries in garage door remote
Make sure that you clear the memory of the
control A. This increases the likelihood that integrated garage door opener before selling the
garage door remote control A will transmit a vehicle.
strong and precise signal to the integrated X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
garage door opener. lock (Y page 114).
RWhen programming, hold remote control A X Press and hold buttons ; and ?.
at varying distances and angles from but- The indicator lamp initially lights up yellow
tons ; to ? which you are programming. Try and then green.
various angles at a distance between 2and X Release buttons ; and ?.
8 inches (5to 20 cm) or at the same angle but The memory of the integrated garage door
at varying distances. opener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.
RIf another remote control A is available for
the same garage door drive, repeat the same
programming steps with this remote control Compass
A. Before performing these steps, make sure

that new batteries have been installed in Calling up the compass
garage door drive remote control A.
RNote that some remote controls only transmit
for a limited amount of time (the indicator
lamp on the remote control goes out). Press
button B on remote control A again before
transmission ends.
RAlign the antenna cable of the garage door
opener unit. This can improve signal recep-
tion/transmission.
Opening/closing the garage door

After it has been programmed, the integrated
garage door opener performs the function of the : Rear-view mirror
garage door system remote control. Please also ; Compass display
read the operating instructions for the garage = Opening
door system.
The compass displays in which compass direc-
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
tion the vehicle is currently traveling: N, NE
NE, E,
lock (Y page 114). SE,
SE S, SW,
SW W or NW
NW.
X Press button ;, = or ? which you have
To receive a correct compass display reading,
programmed to operate the garage door. the magnetic field zone must be set and the
Garage door system with a fixed code: indi- compass calibrated.
cator lamp : lights up green.
Garage door system with a rolling code: indi-
cator lamp : flashes green.
The transmitter will transmit a signal as long
as the button is pressed. The transmission is
halted after a maximum of ten seconds and
indicator lamp : lights up yellow.
X Press button ;, = or ? again if necessary.
Features 237
Setting the compass Magnetic field zone maps

X Set your location using the magnetic field North America
zone maps (Y page 237).
X Push a round pen into opening = for approx-
imately three seconds.
The magnetic field zone currently selected
appears in compass display ;.
X To select the magnetic field zone: push a
round pen into opening = until the desired
magnetic field zone is selected.
If, after a few seconds, the display in compass
display ; changes direction, the magnetic
field zone has been selected.
Calibrating the compass

Notes
In order to calibrate the compass correctly, do
the following:
Rcalibrate the compass in the open and not in
the vicinity of steel structures or high-voltage South America
transmission lines.
Rswitch off electrical consumers such as the
climate control, windshield wipers or rear win-
dow defroster.
Rclose all doors and the tailgate.
Calibrating
X Make sure that there is sufficient space for
you to drive in a circle without impeding traf-
fic.
X Switch on the ignition.
X Push a round pin into opening = for approx-
imately six seconds, until symbol C is shown in
compass display ;.
X Drive your vehicle in a full circle at approx-
imately 3 mph (5 km/h) to 6 mph (10 km/h).
When the calibration has been successfully
completed, the current direction is shown in
compass display ;.
Floormats
G WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
Z
238 Features
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats

securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
top of one another.
X Slide the seat back.

X To install: place the floormat in the footwell.
X Press safety catch knobs : onto retain-
ers ;.
X To remove: pull the floormat off retainers ;.
X Remove the floormat.
Engine compartment 239
Engine compartment Rremove jewelry and watches

Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-
Hood
ple, away from moving parts
G WARNING
G WARNING The ignition system and the fuel injection sys-
If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when tem work under high voltage. If you touch
the vehicle is in motion and block your view. components which are under voltage, you
There is a risk of an accident. could get an electric shock. There is a risk of
Never unlatch the hood while driving. Before injury.
every trip, ensure that the hood is locked. Never touch components of the ignition sys-
tem or fuel injection system when the ignition
G WARNING is switched on.
When opening and closing the hood, it may
suddenly fall into the closed position. There is Opening the hood
a risk of injury to persons within range of
Maintenance and care

movement of the hood. G WARNING
Open and close the hood only when no one is Certain components in the engine compart-
within its range of movement. ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
G WARNING Working in the engine compartment poses a
Opening the hood when the engine is over- risk of injury.
heated or when there is a fire in the engine Where possible, let the engine cool down and
compartment could expose you to hot gases touch only the components described in the
or other service products. There is a risk of following.
injury.
Let an overheated engine cool down before G WARNING
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the When the hood is open and the windshield
engine compartment, keep the hood closed wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by
and contact the fire department. the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
G WARNING the ignition before opening the hood.
The engine compartment contains moving
components. Certain components, such as ! Make sure that the windshield wipers are
the radiator fan, may continue to run or start not folded away from the windshield. You
could otherwise damage the windshield wip-
again suddenly when the ignition is off. There
ers or the hood.
is a risk of injury.
If you need to do any work inside the engine
compartment:
Rswitch off the ignition
Rnever reach into the area where there is a
risk of danger from moving components,
such as the fan rotation area
Z
240 Engine compartment
Closing the hood

X Raise the hood slightly and, at the same time,
remove support strut ? from yellow retaining
clip =.
X Swing support strut ? down and press it into
bracket A until it engages.
X Lower the hood and let it fall from a height of
approximately 8 in (20 cm).
X Check that the hood has engaged properly.
If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not
properly engaged. Do not press the hood
X Make sure that the windshield wipers are closed. Open the hood again and close it with
switched off. a little more force.
X Pull release lever : on the hood.
The hood is released.
Engine oil
General notes
Depending on your driving style, the vehicle

consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per
600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumption may
be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if
you frequently drive at high engine speeds.
Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be
in a different location.
When checking the oil level:
Rpark the vehicle on a level surface
X Reach into the gap between the hood and the
Rthe engine should be switched off for approx-
radiator trim and press hood catch lever ; to
the left. imately five minutes if the engine is at normal
operating temperature
X Raise the hood.
Rif the engine is not at normal operating tem-
perature, e.g. if the engine was only started
briefly, wait about 30 minutes before carrying
out the measurement
Checking the oil level using the oil dip-

stick
G WARNING
Certain components in the engine compart-
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
X Pull support strut ? out of bracket A. Working in the engine compartment poses a
X Lift up support strut ? and insert it into yel- risk of injury.
low retaining clip =. Where possible, let the engine cool down and
touch only the components described in the
following.
Engine compartment 241
! Use only engine oils and oil filters that are

approved for vehicles with a service system. A
list of the engine oils and oil filters that have
been tested and approved in accordance with
Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service
Products is available at any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
The following cause engine failure or damage
to the exhaust system:
RUse of engine oils and oil filters that have
not been expressly approved for the service
system
X Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick guide RReplacement of engine oil and oil filter after
tube. the replacement interval specified by the
X Wipe off oil dipstick :. service system has expired
X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide tube RUse of engine oil additives
to the stop, and take it out again.
If the level is between MIN mark = and MAX ! Do not add too much oil. adding too much
mark ;, the oil level is correct. engine oil can result in damage to the engine

X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark = or
or to the catalytic converter. Have excess
below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engine oil. engine oil siphoned off.
Adding engine oil

G WARNING
Certain components in the engine compart-
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
Working in the engine compartment poses a
risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
Example: engine oil cap
following.
X Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove it.
G WARNING X Add engine oil.
If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on
If engine oil comes into contact with hot com- the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of
ponents in the engine compartment, it may engine oil.
ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn
Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next to clockwise.
the filler neck. Let the engine cool down and Ensure that the cap locks into place securely.
thoroughly clean the engine oil off the com- X Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick
ponents before starting the engine. (Y page 240).
Further information on engine oil (Y page 297).
H Environmental note
When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If
oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to
the environment.
Z
242 Engine compartment
Checking and adding other service X If necessary, add coolant that has been tested
products and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far as
Checking coolant level it will go.
For further information on coolant, see
G WARNING (Y page 298).
The cooling system is pressurized, particularly
when the motor is warm. If you open the cap, Windshield washer system
you could be scalded if hot coolant sprays out.
There is a risk of injury. G WARNING
Let the engine cool down before you open the Certain components in the engine compart-
cap. Wear gloves and eye protection. Slowly ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
open the cap to relieve pressure. of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
Working in the engine compartment poses a
! The coolant may only be checked and cor- risk of injury.
rected when the engine is cool (coolant tem- Where possible, let the engine cool down and
perature below 104 ‡ (40 †). Checking the
coolant when the coolant temperature is
above 104 ‡ (40 †) may result in damage to following.

the engine or to the engine cooling system.
G WARNING
Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if
it comes into contact with hot engine compo-
nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk of
fire and injury.
Make sure that no windshield washer con-
centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.
X Park the vehicle on a level surface.

Only check the coolant level when the vehicle
is on a level surface and the engine has cooled
down.
X Check the coolant temperature display in the
instrument cluster.
The coolant temperature must be below X To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab.
104 ‡ (40 †).
X Add the premixed washer fluid.
X Turn the SmartKey to position g
X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck
(Y page 114) in the ignition lock .
until it engages.
X Slowly turn cap : counter-clockwise and to
relieve excess pressure. If the washer fluid level drops below the recom-
X Turn cap : further counter-clockwise and mended minimum of 1 liter, a message appears
remove it. in the multifunction display prompting you to
If the coolant is at the level of marker bar = add washer fluid (Y page 201).
in the filler neck when cold, there is enough Further information on windshield washer fluid/
coolant in coolant expansion tank ;. antifreeze (Y page 299).
ASSYST PLUS 243
ASSYST PLUS Displaying service messages

Service message X Switch on the ignition.
X Press the = or ; button to select the
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display Serv. menu.
informs you of the next service due date.
You can find information on the type of service ASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm by press-
and service intervals in the Maintenance Book- ing the a button.
let. The service due date appears in the multi-
You can obtain further information from an function display.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
i The ASSYST PLUS service interval display Information about Service
does not show any information on the engine
oil level. Observe the notes on the engine oil Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service
level (Y page 240). interval display
The multifunction display shows a service mes-
sage for several seconds, e.g.:
! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval display
has been inadvertently reset, this setting can

RService A in .. days be corrected at a qualified specialist work-
RService A due shop.
RService A overdue by .. days Have service work carried out as described in
Depending on the operating conditions of the the Maintenance Booklet. This may otherwise
vehicle, the remaining time or distance until the lead to increased wear and damage to the
next service due date is displayed. major assemblies or the vehicle.
The letter A or B, possibly in connection with a A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an author-
number or another letter, indicates the type of ized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset the
service. A stands for a minor service and B for a ASSYST PLUS service interval display after the
major service. service work has been carried out. You can also
You can obtain further information from an obtain further information on maintenance
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. work, for example.
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does
not take into account any periods of time during Special service requirements
which the battery is disconnected. The specified maintenance interval takes only
Maintaining the time-dependent service sched- the normal operation of the vehicle into
ule: account. Under arduous operating conditions or
X Note down the service due date displayed in increased load on the vehicle, maintenance
the multifunction display before disconnect- work must be carried out more frequently, for
ing the battery. example:
or Rregular city driving with frequent intermediate
X After reconnecting the battery, subtract the stops
battery disconnection periods from the ser- Rif the vehicle is primarily used to travel short
vice date shown on the display. distances
Ruse in mountainous terrain or on poor road
surfaces
Hiding a service message Rif the engine is often left idling for long periods
Rin particularly dusty conditions, or if air-recir-
X Press the a or % button on the steering culation mode is frequently used
wheel.
In these or similar operating conditions, have
the interior filter, engine air cleaner, engine oil
and oil filter, for example, changed more fre-
Z
244 Care
quently. Under arduous operating conditions, Washing the vehicle and cleaning the
the tires must be checked more often. Further paintwork
information can be obtained at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes- Automatic car wash
Benz Center.
G WARNING
Driving abroad Braking efficiency is reduced after washing
An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network is the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
also available in other countries. You can obtain After the vehicle has been washed, brake
further information from any authorized carefully while paying attention to the traffic
Mercedes-Benz Center.
conditions until full braking power is restored.
! When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or the

Care HOLD function is activated, the vehicle
brakes automatically in certain situations.
General notes
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
H Environmental note Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and the HOLD
Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning

Rwhen towing the vehicle
cloths in an environmentally responsible man-
Rin the car wash
ner.
! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless
! When cleaning your car, do not use: Automatic Car Wash as these use special
Rdry, coarse or hard cloths cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can
Rabrasive
damage the paintwork or plastic parts.
cleaning agents
Rsolvents ! Make sure that the automatic transmission
Rcleaning agents containing solvents is in transmission position i when washing
your vehicle in a tow-through car wash. The
Do not scrub.
vehicle may be damaged in another transmis-
Do not touch the surfaces and films with hard sion position.
objects, e.g. rings or ice scrapers. Otherwise,
you may scratch or damage the surfaces and ! Make sure that:
films. Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroof
are fully closed.
! Do not park your vehicle for a long period of
Rthe blower is switched off.
time directly after cleaning, particularly after
cleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner. Rthe windshield wiper switch is at position
Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased cor- u
rosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore, The vehicle may otherwise be damaged.
drive for a few minutes after cleaning. By
heating up the brakes, the brake discs and You can clean the vehicle in an automatic car
pads dry. The vehicle can then be parked for a wash from the very start.
long period of time. Preferably, you should wash the vehicle in a car
wash that uses fabric washing elements without
Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for brushes. This will prevent fine scratches to the
retaining the quality in the long term. paintwork or decorative films.
Use care products and cleaning agents recom- If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before
mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. cleaning it in an automatic car wash.
After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wax
from the windshield and the wiper blades. This
will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises
caused by residue on the windshield.
Care 245
i Vehicles with decorative films: when using a The water temperature of the high-pressure
car wash, choose a wash program without hot cleaner must not exceed 140 °F (60 °C).
wax.
! Always maintain a distance of at least
11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the
Washing by hand power washer nozzle. Information about the
correct distance is available from the equip-
In some countries, washing by hand is only
ment manufacturer.
allowed at specially equipped washing bays.
Observe the legal requirements in each country. Move the power washer nozzle around when
cleaning your vehicle.
X Do not use hot water and do not wash the
vehicle in direct sunlight. Do not aim directly at any of the following:
X Use a soft sponge to clean. Rtires
X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.
shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz. Relectrical components
X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gen- Rbattery
tle jet of water. Rplug-type couplings
X Do not point the water jet directly towards the Rlights
air inlet or the edges of decorative foils. Rseals

X Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge
Rtrim
frequently.
Rventilation slots
X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry
thoroughly with a chamois. Damaged seals or electrical components can
lead to leaks or failures.
X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paint-
work or the decorative foils.
Cleaning the paintwork
Carefully remove all deposits of road salt as
soon as possible when driving in winter. ! Do not affix:
Rstickers
Power washers Rfilms
G WARNING Rmagnetic plates or similar items

The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt to painted surfaces. You could otherwise
damage the paintwork.
blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage
to the tires or chassis components. Compo- Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by
corrosion and damage caused by inadequate
nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-
care cannot always be completely repaired. In
edly. There is a risk of an accident. such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Do not use power washers with circular jet X Remove dirt immediately, where possible,
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged while avoiding rubbing too hard.
tires or chassis components replaced imme- X Soak insect remains with insect remover and
diately. rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off
! Vehicles with decorative foil: parts of your the treated areas afterwards.
vehicle are covered with decorative foil. Main- X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils,
tain a distance of at least 27.5 in (70 cm) fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a
between the foil-wrapped parts of the vehicle cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter
and the nozzle of the high pressure cleaner. fluid.
Information about the correct distance is X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.
available from the equipment manufacturer. X Use silicone remover to remove wax.
Move the power washer nozzle around when
cleaning your vehicle. If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint
surface, use the paint care products recommen-
ded and approved by Mercedes-Benz. This is the
Z
246 Care
case approximately every three to five months, Rstone impacts and dirt
depending on the climate conditions and the Rchemical cleaning agents
care product used. Rgreasy substances
If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or if the
paint has become dull, the paint cleaner recom- ! Do not use any types of polish on matt dec-
mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz orative film. Polishing surfaces covered with
should be used. film gives it a shiny finish.
Do not use these care products in the sun or on ! Do not treat matt or structured decorative
the hood while the hood is hot. film with wax. This may lead to marks that
X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB Touch- cannot be removed.
Up Stick, to repair slight damage to the paint- Observe the notes in the section on the care and
work quickly and provisionally. treatment of matte paintwork (Y page 246),
these notes also apply to matte decorative film.
Matte finish care To clean, use plenty of water and a mild cleaning
agent without additional or abrasive products,
! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy e.g. a car shampoo approved by Mercedes-
wheels. Polishing causes the finish to shine. Benz.
! The following can give the paint a glossy X Dry vehicles covered with film using a soft,
appearance and thus reduce the matt effect: absorbent cloth after every wash.
RRubbing hard with unsuitable agents
Water marks could otherwise form.
RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by
corrosion and damage caused by inadequate
! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or polishing care cannot always be completely repaired. In
products, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax, for the such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop.
purpose of paintwork care. These products X Remove dirt immediately, where possible,
are only suitable for high-gloss surfaces. Their while avoiding rubbing too hard.
use on vehicles with matte paintwork leads to The decorative film may be irreparably dam-
considerable surface damage or, more spe- aged.
cifically, to shiny, spotted areas.
X Soak insect remains with insect remover and
Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off
! Only use automatic car washes which cor- the treated areas afterwards.
respond to the latest technological stand- The cleaning product, Paint Cleaner, which has
ards. Never use wash programs which finish been approved and recommended by
by treating the vehicle with hot wax. Mercedes-Benz, should be used when dirt has
Observe these notes if your vehicle has a clear penetrated the decorative film surface or the
matte finish. This will help you to avoid damage decorative film has become dull.
to the paintwork due to incorrect treatment. The manufacturer can provide you with infor-
These notes also apply to light alloy wheels with mation on special care and cleaning products.
a clear matte finish. Laminated surfaces may exhibit optical differ-
Use only insect remover and car shampoo from ences to surfaces which were not protected by a
the range of approved Mercedes-Benz care decorative film when the decorative film is
products. removed.
i Have work or repairs on decorative film car-
Cleaning the decorative film ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an
! The following may have an effect on the ser- authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this
vice life and coloring of decorative film:
purpose.
Rsunlight
Rtemperature, e.g. hot-air fan
Rweather conditions
Care 247
Cleaning the vehicle parts ! Clean the water drainage channels of the
windshield and the rear window at regular
Cleaning the wheels intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and
pollen may under certain circumstances pre-
G WARNING vent water from draining away. This can lead
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt to corrosion damage and damage to elec-
tronic components.
blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage
to the tires or chassis components. Compo- X Clean the inside and outside of the windows
nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect- with a damp cloth and a cleaning product that
is recommended and approved by Mercedes-
edly. There is a risk of an accident. Benz.
Do not use power washers with circular jet
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged Cleaning wiper blades
tires or chassis components replaced imme-
diately. G WARNING
You could become trapped by the windshield
! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products wipers if they start moving while cleaning the
to remove brake dust. This could damage
wheel bolts and brake components. windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of

injury.
! Do not park your vehicle for a long period of Always switch off the windshield wipers and
time directly after cleaning, particularly after
cleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner. the ignition before cleaning the windshield or
Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased cor- wiper blades.
rosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore,
drive for a few minutes after cleaning. By ! Only fold the windshield wipers away from
heating up the brakes, the brake discs and the windshield when vertical. Otherwise, you
pads dry. The vehicle can then be parked for a will damage the hood.
long period of time.
! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, the
wiper blade could be damaged.
Cleaning the windows
! Do not clean wiper blades too often and do
G WARNING not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graph-
You could become trapped by the windshield ite coating could be damaged. This could
cause wiper noise.
wipers if they start moving while cleaning the
windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of ! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding
injury. back. The windshield could be damaged if the
wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.
X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from the
the ignition before cleaning the windshield or
windshield.
wiper blades.
X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a damp
cloth.
! Only fold the windshield wipers away from
the windshield when vertical. Otherwise, you X Fold the windshield wiper arms back again
will damage the hood. before switching on the ignition.
! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,

solvents or cleaning agents containing sol- Cleaning the exterior lighting
vents to clean the inside of the windows. Do ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths
not touch the insides of the windows with which are suitable for plastic light lenses.
hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. There Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths
is otherwise a risk of damaging the windows. could scratch or damage the plastic light len-
ses.
Z
248 Care
X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior lights

with a wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent,
e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning
cloths.
Cleaning the mirror turn signals

! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths
that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable
cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could
scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the
mirror turn signals.
X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn sig- X Make sure that the vehicle is at a standstill
nals in the exterior mirror housing using a wet and the SmartKey is in position 2 in the igni-
sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g. tion lock.
Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning X To clean the rear view camera: use clear
cloths. water and a soft cloth to clean camera
lens :.
Cleaning the sensors
Cleaning the exhaust pipes

! If you clean the sensors with a power
washer, make sure that you keep a distance G WARNING
of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle
and the power washer nozzle. Information The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can
about the correct distance is available from become very hot. If you come into contact
the equipment manufacturer. with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn
yourself. There is a risk of injury.
Always be particularly careful around the
exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow
these components to cool down before touch-
ing them.
! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-

based cleaning agents, such as bathroom
cleaner or wheel cleaner.
Impurities combined with the effects of road grit
and corrosive environmental factors may cause
flash rust to form on the surface. You can
restore the original shine of the exhaust pipe by
cleaning it regularly, especially in winter and
after washing.
X Clean the exhaust pipe with a care product
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
X Clean sensors : of the driving systems with
water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.
Cleaning the rear view camera

! Do not clean the camera lens and the area
around the rear view camera with a power
washer.
Care 249
Interior care Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or

selector lever
Cleaning the display
X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use
! For cleaning, do not use any of the following: leather care agents that have been recom-
Ralcohol-based thinner or gasoline mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Rabrasive cleaning agents
Rcommercially-available household cleaning Cleaning genuine wood and trim ele-
agents ments
These may damage the display surface. Do ! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents
not put pressure on the display surface when such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishes
cleaning. This could lead to irreparable dam- or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damag-
age to the display. ing the surface.
X Before cleaning the display, make sure that it
is switched off and has cooled down. ! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces.
The trim pieces have a chrome look but are
X Clean the display surface using a commer-
mostly made of anodized aluminum and can
cially available microfiber cloth and TFT/LCD lose their shine if chrome polish is used. Use
display cleaner. a damp, lint-free cloth instead when cleaning

X Dry the display surface using a dry microfiber the trim pieces.
cloth. If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very
dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you are
Cleaning the plastic trim unsure as to whether the trim pieces are
chrome-plated or not, consult an authorized
G WARNING Mercedes-Benz Center.
Care products and cleaning agents containing X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with a
solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.
become porous. As a result, plastic parts may X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod-
come loose in the event of air bag deploy- ucts recommended and approved by
ment. There is a risk of injury. Mercedes-Benz.
Do not use any care products and cleaning
agents to clean the cockpit. Cleaning the seat covers
General notes
! Never attach the following to plastic surfa-
ces: ! Do not use a microfiber cloth to clean covers
Rstickers
made out of real leather, artificial leather or
DINAMICA. If used often, these can damage
Rfilms the cover.
Rperfume oil container or similar
Note that regular care is essential to ensure that
You could otherwise damage the plastic. the appearance and comfort of the covers is
! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or retained over time.
sunscreen to come into contact with the plas-
tic trim. This maintains the high-quality look of
the surfaces.
X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free
cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.
X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod-
ucts recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
The surface may change color temporarily.
Wait until the surface is dry again.
Z
250 Care
Genuine leather seat covers ! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical
! To retain the natural appearance of the cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts by
leather, observe the following cleaning heating at temperatures above 176 ‡ (80 †)
instructions: or in direct sunlight.
RClean genuine leather covers carefully with X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solution.
a damp cloth and then wipe the covers
down with a dry cloth. Cleaning the headliner and carpets
RMake sure that the leather does not
become soaked. It may otherwise become X Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush or
rough and cracked. dry shampoo.
ROnly use leather care agents that have X Carpets: use the carpet and textile cleaning
been tested and approved by Mercedes- agents recommended and approved by
Benz. You can obtain these from a qualified Mercedes-Benz.
Leather is a natural product.
It exhibits natural surface characteristics, for
example:
Rdifferences in the texture
Rmarks caused by growth and injury

Rslight nuances of color
These are characteristics of leather and not
material defects.
Seat covers of other materials
! Observe the following when cleaning:
Rclean artificial leather covers with a cloth
moistened with a solution containing 1%
detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).
Rclean cloth covers with a microfiber cloth
moistened with a solution containing 1%
detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rub
carefully and always wipe entire seat sec-
tions to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave
the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning results
depend on the type of dirt and how long it
has been there.
Rclean DINAMICA covers with a damp cloth.
Make sure that you wipe entire seat sec-
tions to avoid leaving visible lines.
Cleaning the seat belts

G WARNING
Seat belts can become severely weakened if
bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat
belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event of
an accident. This poses an increased risk of
injury or fatal injury.
Never bleach or dye the seat belts.
Where will I find...? 251
Where will I find...? Information on reflective safety jackets

Reflective safety jacket
Removing/replacing the reflective
safety jacket
: Maximum number of washes

; Maximum wash temperature
= Do not bleach
? Do not iron
A Do not use a laundry dryer
The reflective safety jackets are located in front B Do not dry-clean
door stowage compartments :. Reflective
C This is a class 2 vest
safety jackets can also be stored in the rear door
Breakdown assistance
stowage compartments. RThe reflective safety jackets meet the require-
X To remove: pull out the safety jacket bag ments defined by the legal standard only:
containing the reflective safety jacket. - if the correct size is used and
X Open the safety jacket bag and pull out the - if the reflective safety jackets are correctly
reflective safety jacket. fastened
X To stow: fold the reflective safety jacket, roll RBefore use, ensure that the reflective safety
it up and stow it in the safety jacket bag. jackets are clean and intact. The special prop-
X Replace the safety jacket bag into stowage
erties may otherwise be compromised.
compartment :. RThe reflective safety jackets should be stored
in their original packaging in a dry place away
i Remove a new reflective safety jacket from from sources of heat and light.
its packaging material before sliding it into
RThe maximum number of washes specified is
the stowage compartment. The packaging
material may otherwise cause it to slip out or not the only factor influencing the life span of
make removing it difficult. the reflective safety jackets. Their life span
also depends on use, care, storage, etc.
Observe the legal requirements in each country.
RThe reflective safety jackets should be dis-
posed of and replaced with new ones:
- after 15 washes, and/or
- if the reflective strips have become
scratched, and/or
- if the backing material and/or reflective
strips have become soiled and cannot be
cleaned off, and/or
- if the fluorescence has faded e.g. due to the
effects of sunlight
RDispose of reflective safety jackets in an envi-
ronmentally responsible manner. To do so,
contact your local waste disposal company.
252 Where will I find...?
Warning triangle First-aid kit

Removing/replacing the warning trian-
gle

X To open the stowage compartment: turn
rotary knob : clockwise and fold down
X To remove: open the tailgate. cover ;.
X Lift the cargo compartment floor upwards
(Y page 228).
X To release warning triangle :, push back the
retainers on the bracket.

X Remove warning triangle : from the bracket.
X To replace: place warning triangle : back
into the bracket and push down to secure.
X Fold the cargo compartment floor down.
X Close the tailgate.
Setting up the warning triangle

X Remove first-aid kit =.
Check the expiration date on the first-aid kit at
least once a year. Replace the contents if nec-
essary, and replace missing items.
Vehicle tool kit

General notes
Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: the TIREFIT kit is
located in the stowage well under the cargo
X Fold feet = out to the side. compartment floor.
X Pull side reflectors ; upwards to form a tri- Vehicles with a tire-change tool kit: the tire-
angle and lock them at the top using upper change tool kit is in the stowage well under the
press-stud :. cargo compartment floor.
Apart from certain country-specific variations,
the vehicles are not equipped with a tire-change
tool kit. Some tools for changing a wheel are
specific to the vehicle. For more information on
which tire changing tools are required and
Flat tire 253
approved to perform a wheel change on your Flat tire

vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Tools required for changing a wheel may Preparing the vehicle
include, for example:
Your vehicle may be equipped with:
RJack
RMOExtended tires (tires with run-flat proper-
RWheel chock
ties) (Y page 254)
RLug wrench
Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehi-
RAlignment bolt cles with MOExtended tires
Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 252)
Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It
is therefore recommended that you additionally
equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount
tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.
winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from
a qualified specialist workshop.
Information on changing and mounting wheels
(Y page 286).
X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
level ground, as far away as possible from
traffic.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.
: Tire inflation compressor X Secure the vehicle against rolling away
; Tire sealant filler bottle (Y page 129).
= Towing eye X If possible, bring the front wheels into the
X Open the tailgate. straight-ahead position.
X Lift the cargo compartment floor up
(Y page 228). X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the
X Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 254) or remove it. SmartKey from the ignition lock.
Towing eye = is located under tire inflation X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function
compressor :. or KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door.
The vehicle electronics are now in position
i Example: equipment and country-specific g. This is the same as the SmartKey having
variations possible. been removed.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function
Vehicles with a tire-change tool kit or KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop but-
ton from the ignition lock (Y page 114).
X Make sure that the engine cannot be started
X Lift the cargo compartment floor up via your smartphone (Y page 129).
(Y page 228).
X Make sure that the passengers are not endan-
X Remove the tire-change tool kit.
gered as they do so. Make sure that no one is
The tire-change tool kit contains: near the danger area while a wheel is being
RJack
changed. Anyone who is not directly assisting
in the wheel change should, for example,
RLug wrench stand behind the barrier.
RPair of gloves X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traffic
RFolding wheel chock conditions when doing so.
X Close the driver's door.
254 Flat tire
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat you use the proper size and type (summer or
properties) winter tire).
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
General notes not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It
is therefore recommended that you additionally
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat char- equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount
acteristics), you can continue to drive your vehi- tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.
cle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from
or more tires. The affected tire must not show a qualified specialist workshop.
any clearly visible damage.
You can recognize a MOExtended tire by the Important safety notes
MOExtended marking which appears on the
sidewall of the tire. You will find this marking G WARNING
next to the tire size designation, the load-bear-
ing capacity and the speed index (Y page 281). When driving in emergency mode, the driving
MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunc- characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when corner-
tion with an active tire pressure loss warning ing, accelerating quickly and when braking.
system. There is a risk of an accident.
If a pressure loss warning message appears Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.
in the multifunction display: Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers,
Robserve the instructions in the display mes- and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes,
sages (Y page 198). off-road). This applies in particular to a laden

Rcheck the tire for damage vehicle.
Rif driving on, observe the following notes Stop driving in emergency mode if:
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is
Ryou hear banging noises.
approximately 50 miles (80 km) when the vehi-
cle is partially laden. When the vehicle is fully Rthevehicle starts to shake.
laden it is approximately 19 miles (30 km). Ryou see smoke and smell rubber.
In addition to the vehicle load, the driving dis- RESP®
tance possible depends upon: is intervening constantly.
Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.
Rvehicle speed
Rroad condition After driving in emergency mode, have the
Routside temperature wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode workshop with regard to their further use. The
may be reduced by extreme driving conditions defective tire must be replaced in every case.
or maneuvers, or it can be increased through a
moderate style of driving.
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is TIREFIT kit
counted from the moment the tire pressure loss
warning appears in the multifunction display. Important safety notes
You must not exceed a maximum speed of
50 mph (80 km/h). TIREFIT is a tire sealant.
When replacing one or all tires, please observe For USA only: You can use TIREFIT to seal punc-
the following specifications for your vehicle's tures of up to 0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those
tires: in the tire tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside
temperatures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †).
Rsize
Rtype and
Rthe "MOExtended" marking
If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced
with a MOExtended tire, a standard tire may be
used as a temporary measure. Make sure that
Flat tire 255
G WARNING ! Do not operate the tire inflation compressor

for longer than ten minutes at a time without
In the following situations, the tire sealant is a break. It may otherwise overheat.
unable to provide sufficient breakdown assis-
The tire inflation compressor can be operated
tance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly: again once it has cooled down.
Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire larger Comply with the manufacturer’s safety instruc-
than those mentioned above. tions on the sticker on the tire inflation com-
Rthe wheel rim is damaged. pressor.
Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures or
Using the TIREFIT kit
on a flat tire.
Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualified
G WARNING
The tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita-
tion. It must not come into contact with your
skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not
inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant away
from children. There is a risk of injury.
If you come into contact with the tire sealant, X Do not remove any foreign objects which have
observe the following: penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or nails.
RRinse X Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accompa-
off the tire sealant from your skin
nying TIREFIT sticker and the tire inflation
immediately with water.
compressor from the stowage well under-
RIf the tire sealant comes into contact with neath the cargo compartment floor
your eyes, immediately rinse them thor- (Y page 253).
oughly with clean water. X Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker to the
RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediately instrument cluster within the driver's field of
vision.
rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink
X Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near the
plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting,
valve on the wheel with the defective tire.
and seek medical attention immediately.
has come into contact with tire sealant.
RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical
attention immediately.
! Residue from the tire sealant may come out

of the filler hose after use. This could cause
stains.
Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic
bag which contained the TIREFIT kit.
Have the used tire sealant bottle disposed of
professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Z
256 Flat tire
X Remove filler hose B and connector = from If tire sealant has escaped, clean it off affected
the bottom section of the tire inflation com- areas as quickly as possible. Use plain water if
pressor housing ;. possible.
X Slide the yellow filler hose connector into the If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant, have
mounting on yellow cap A of tire sealant filler them cleaned with perchloroethylene at a dry
bottle : until the connector engages. cleaner as soon as possible.
X With the sealing rings in front, slide yellow cap
A of tire sealant bottle : into the mounting Tire pressure not reached
of tire inflation compressor ;.
Yellow cap A and both hooks must engage. If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has
not been attained after ten minutes:
X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the
faulty tire.
Note that tire sealant may escape when you
unscrew the filler hose.
X USA only: very slowly drive forwards or
reverse approximately 30 ft (10 m).
X Pump up the tire again.
After a maximum of ten minutes, the tire pres-
sure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/
29 psi).
X Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty
tire. G WARNING
X Screw filler hose D onto valve C. If the required tire pressure is not reached
X Insert plug = into a 12 V socket in your vehi- after the specified time, the tire is too badly
cle. damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the
Observe the notes on sockets (Y page 233). tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni- pressure that is too low can significantly
tion lock (Y page 114). impair the vehicle's braking and driving char-
X Press on and off switch ? on the tire inflation acteristics. There is a risk of accident.
compressor to ON. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified
The tire inflation compressor is switched on. specialist workshop.
The tire is inflated.
First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire. The
pressure can briefly rise to approximately Tire pressure reached
500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).
Do not switch off the tire inflation com- G WARNING
pressor during this phase. A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant
X Let the tire inflation compressor run for a impairs the driving characteristics and is not
maximum of ten minutes. The tire should then suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of
have attained a pressure of at least 200 kPa accident.
(2.0 bar/29 psi).
You should therefore adapt your driving style
If a pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed
been attained after five minutes, see "Tire pres-
the specified maximum speed with a tire that
sure reached" (Y page 256).
has been repaired using tire sealant.
If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has
not been attained after five minutes, see "Tire USA only: The maximum permissible speed for
pressure not reached" (Y page 256).
a tire sealed with tire sealant is 50 mph
(80 km/h). The upper part of the TIREFIT sticker
Flat tire 257
must be affixed to the instrument cluster in the

driver's field of vision.
If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has
been attained after ten minutes:
X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the
faulty tire.
Note that tire sealant may escape when you
X USA only: Stow the tire sealant bottle and the
tire inflation compressor.
X Pull away immediately. X To reduce the tire pressure: depress pres-
X Stop after driving for approximately ten sure release button : next to pressure
minutes and check the tire pressure with the gauge ;.
tire inflation compressor. X When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew the
The tire pressure must now be at least filler hose from the valve of the sealed tire.
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). Note that tire sealant may escape when you
G WARNING X Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve of the
If the required tire pressure is not reached sealed tire.
after driving for a short period, the tire is too
badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair
the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a
tire pressure that is too low can significantly
impair the vehicle's braking and driving char-
acteristics. There is a risk of accident.
Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified
i USA only: In cases such as the one men-

tioned above, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. Or call X To remove the tire sealant bottle from the tire
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or inflation compressor, press together the lock-
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). ing tabs on the yellow cap.
X USA only: Correct the tire pressure if it is still X Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire infla-
at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire tion compressor.
and Loading Information placard on the driv- The filler hose remains attached to the tire
er's side B-pillar or the tire pressure table in sealant bottle.
the fuel filler flap for values.
X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist work-
X To increase the tire pressure: switch on the
shop and have the tire changed there.
tire inflation compressor.
X Have the tire sealant bottle and the filler hose
replaced as soon as possible at a qualified
X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced every
four years at a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
258 Battery (vehicle)
Battery (vehicle) Always make sure that neither you nor the bat-
tery is electrostatically charged. A build-up of
Important safety notes electrostatic charge can be caused, for exam-
ple:
Special tools and expert knowledge are required
Rby wearing clothing made from synthetic
when working on the battery, e.g. removal and
installation. You should therefore have all work fibers
involving the battery carried out at a qualified Rdue to friction between clothing and seats
specialist workshop. Rif you push or pull the battery across the car-
pet or other synthetic materials
G WARNING Rif you rub the battery with a cloth
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery
can lead, for example, to a short circuit and G WARNING
thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can During the charging process, a battery produ-
lead to function restrictions applying to ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or
safety-relevant systems, e.g. the lighting sys- sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can
tem, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or the ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The oper- RMake sure that the positive terminal of a
ating safety of your vehicle may be restricted. connected battery does not come into con-
You could lose control of the vehicle, for tact with vehicle parts.
example: RNever place metal objects or tools on a bat-
Rwhen braking tery.

Rin RIt is important that you observe the descri-
the event of abrupt steering maneuvers
and/or when the vehicle's speed is not bed order of the battery terminals when
adapted to the road conditions connecting and disconnecting a battery.
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the
battery poles with identical polarity are
In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci-
connected.
dent, contact a qualified specialist workshop
RIt is particularly important to observe the
immediately. Do not drive any further. You
should have all work involving the battery car- described order when connecting and dis-
ried out at a qualified specialist workshop. connecting the jumper cables.
RNever connect or disconnect the battery
For further information about ABS and ESP®, terminals while the engine is running.
see (Y page 57) and (Y page 60).
G WARNING G WARNING
Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
of sparks, which could ignite the highly explo- Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do
sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over
explosion. the battery. Keep children away from batter-
Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle ies. Wash away battery acid immediately with
body to remove any existing electrostatic plenty of clean water and seek medical atten-
build-up. tion.
The highly flammable gas mixture forms when H Environmental note

charging the battery as well as when jump-start- Batteries contain pollutants.
ing. It is illegal to dispose of them
with the household rubbish.
Battery (vehicle) 259
They must be collected sep- Risk of explosion.

arately and disposed of in an
environmentally responsible
recycling system. Fire, open flames and smoking are
Dispose of batteries in an prohibited when handling the bat-
environmentally responsible tery. Avoid creating sparks.
manner. Take discharged
Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact
batteries to a qualified spe-
with skin, eyes or clothing.
cialist workshop or to a col-
Wear suitable protective clothing,
lection point for used batter- especially gloves, apron and face-
ies. guard.
Rinse any acid spills immediately
! Have the battery regularly checked at a with clear water. Contact a physician
qualified specialist workshop. if necessary.
Comply with the service intervals in the Main- Wear eye protection.
tenance Booklet, or contact a qualified spe-
cialist workshop for more information.
! You should have all work involving the bat-
tery carried out at a qualified specialist work- Keep children away.
shop. In the exceptional case that it is neces-
sary for you to disconnect the battery your-
self, make sure that:
Observe this Operator's Manual.
Rswitch off the engine and remove the
SmartKey. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO,
make sure that the ignition is switched off.
Check that all the indicator lamps in the
instrument cluster are off. Otherwise, elec- For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
tronic components, such as the alternator, mends that you only use batteries which have
may be damaged. been tested and approved for your vehicle by
Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide
Ryou first remove the negative terminal
increased impact protection to prevent vehicle
clamp and then the positive terminal occupants from suffering acid burns should the
clamp. Never swap the terminal clamps. battery be damaged in the event of an accident.
Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic system
may be damaged. In order for the battery to achieve the maximum
possible service life, it must always be suffi-
Rin vehicles with automatic transmission,
ciently charged.
the transmission is locked in position j
after the battery is disconnected. The vehi- Like other batteries, the vehicle battery may
cle is secured against rolling away. You can discharge over time if you do not use the vehicle.
then no longer move the vehicle. In this case, have the battery disconnected at a
qualified specialist workshop. You can also
The battery and the cover of the positive ter- charge the battery with a charger recommended
minal clamp must be installed securely during by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a qualified special-
operation. ist workshop for further information.
Comply with safety precautions and take pro- Have the battery condition of charge checked
tective measures when handling batteries. more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for
short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a
lengthy period. Consult a qualified specialist
workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle
parked for a long period of time.
Only replace a battery with a battery that has
been recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
Z
260 Jump-starting
Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehicle ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gases
and do not require any electrical consumers. can escape from the battery. There is a risk of
The vehicle will then use very little energy, thus
conserving battery power. an explosion.
If the power supply has been interrupted, e.g. if Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before
you reconnect the battery, you will have to: charging it or jump-starting.
Rset the clock using the multimedia system
(see the Digital Operator's Manual) ! Only use battery chargers with a maximum
charging voltage of 14.8 V.
Rreset the function for folding the exterior mir-
rors in/out automatically, by folding the mir- ! Only charge the battery using the jump-
rors out once (Y page 89) starting connection point.
The jump-starting connection point is in the
engine compartment (Y page 260).
Charging the battery X Open the hood.
G WARNING X Connect the battery charger to the positive

terminal and ground point in the same order
During charging and jump-starting, explosive as when connecting the donor battery in the
gases can escape from the battery. There is a jump-starting procedure (Y page 260).
risk of an explosion. If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up in
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating the instrument cluster at low temperatures, it is
sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient very likely that the discharged battery has fro-
ventilation while charging and jump-starting. zen. In this case you may neither jump-start the
Do not lean over a battery. vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of
a thawed-out battery may be shorter. The start-
ing characteristics can be impaired, particularly
G WARNING at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out bat-
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. tery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do Only charge the installed battery with a battery
not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over charger which has been tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz. A battery charger unit specially
the battery. Keep children away from batter- adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested
ies. Wash away battery acid immediately with and approved by Mercedes-Benz is available as
plenty of clean water and seek medical atten- an accessory. It permits the charging of the bat-
tion. tery in its installed position. Contact an author-
ized Mercedes-Benz Center for further informa-
G WARNING tion and availability. Read the battery charger's
operating instructions before charging the bat-
A discharged battery can freeze at tempera- tery.
tures below freezing point. When jump-start-
Jump-starting
For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of a pos-
itive terminal and a ground point, in the engine compartment.
G WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the
battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of
clean water and seek medical attention.
Jump-starting 261
G WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk
of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ven-
tilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.
G WARNING
During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks
are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with
vehicle parts.
RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.
RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting
and disconnecting a battery.
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.
RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting
the jumper cables.
RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.
G WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the
vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.
! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be
damaged by the non-combusted fuel.
If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up in the instrument cluster at low temperatures, it is very
likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor
charge the battery. Let the battery thaw first. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter.
The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out
battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the
engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper cables.
Observe the following points:
RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump-
start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.
RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.
RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.
ROnly jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating.
ROnly use jumper cables that are not damaged and have a sufficient cross-section and insulated
terminal clamps.
RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.
Z
262 Jump-starting
Make sure that:

RThe jumper cables are not damaged.
RNon-insulated parts of the terminal clamps do not come into contact with other metal parts while
the jumper cables are connected to the battery.
RThe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts that can move when the engine is running,
such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.
X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake.
X Turn the SmartKey to position g in the ignition lock and remove it.
X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc.
X Open the hood.
Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-starting
device.
X Press together cover : of positive clamp ; and slide it back.
X Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B using the
jumper cable, beginning with your own battery.
X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.
X Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to ground point A of your vehicle using the
jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to battery of other vehicle B first.
X If the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected for
a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.
X Start the engine.
X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.
X First, remove the jumper cables from ground point A and negative terminal ?, then from pos-
itive terminal ; and positive terminal =. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle
first.
X Close cover : of positive terminal ; after removing the jumper cables.
X Close the hood.
X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

Towing and tow-starting 263
i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any qualified
Towing and tow-starting the vehicle brakes automatically in certain

situations.
Important safety notes To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
these systems in the following or similar sit-
G WARNING uations:
Functions relevant to safety are restricted or Rwhen towing the vehicle
no longer available if: Rin the car wash
Rthe engine is not running. ! Make sure that the electric parking brake is
Rthe brake system or the power steering is released. If the electric parking brake is faulty,
malfunctioning. visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supply ! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at the
or the vehicle's electrical system. towing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle could be
damaged.
If your vehicle is being towed, much more
force may be necessary to steer or brake. ! Do not use the towing eyes for recovery pur-
There is a risk of an accident. poses as this could damage the vehicle. If in
doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.
In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing,
make sure that the steering moves freely. ! When towing, pull away slowly and
smoothly. If the tractive power is too high, the
G WARNING vehicles could be damaged.
You can no longer steer the vehicle if the ! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of
steering wheel lock has been engaged. There 30 miles (50km). The towing speed of 30 mph
is a risk of an accident. (50km/h) must not be exceeded.
If the vehicle has to be towed more than
Always switch off the ignition when towing the 30 miles (50km), the front axle must be raised
vehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar. or the entire vehicle raised and transported.
G WARNING ! Do not tow with sling-type equipment. This

could damage the vehicle.
When towing or tow-starting another vehicle
and its weight is greater than the permissible ! When towing away vehicles with KEYLESS-
GO, use the key instead of the Start/Stop
gross weight of your vehicle, the:
button. The automatic transmission may oth-
Rthe towing eye could detach itself erwise shift to position j when you open the
Rthe vehicle/trailer combination could roll- driver's or front-passenger door, which could
damage the transmission.
over.
There is a risk of an accident. ! Vehicles with automatic transmission must
not be started by tow-starting. This could oth-
When towing or tow-starting another vehicle, erwise damage the transmission.
its weight should not be greater than the per-
It is better to have the vehicle transported than
missible gross weight of your vehicle. to have it towed away.
Details on the permissible gross vehicle weight If the vehicle can no longer be driven because of
of your vehicle can be found on the vehicle iden- an accident or breakdown, you have the follow-
tification plate (Y page 294). ing options:
RTransporting the vehicle.
! When Active Brake Assist, Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC or the HOLD function is activated,
Z
264 Towing and tow-starting
As a rule, you should have the vehicle trans- X Remove the towing eye from the stowage
ported. space.
RTowing the vehicle with a tow rope or tow bar. The towing eye is located with the vehicle tool
Only tow the vehicle in exceptional cases. kit under the cargo compartment floor
The battery must be connected and charged. (Y page 252).
Otherwise, you: Vehicles with the TIREFIT kit: the towing eye is
beneath the tire inflation compressor
Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in
(Y page 253).
the ignition lock.
X Press the mark on cover : inwards in the
Rcannot release the electric parking brake.
Rcannot shift the transmission to position i.
X Take cover : off the opening.
The function of the electric parking brake and X Screw in the towing eye clockwise to the stop.
the parking lock is dependent on the on-board
voltage.
If the on-board voltage is low or if there is a sys- Removing the towing eye
tem malfunction: X Unscrew and remove the towing eye.
Rthe electric parking brake may not be applied X Attach cover : to the bumper and press until
in certain circumstances, or it engages.
Rit may no longer be possible to shift the trans- X Place the towing eye in the stowage well
mission to position j beneath the cargo compartment floor in the
Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. the cargo compartment (Y page 252).
radio. X Vehicles with the TIREFIT kit: put back the tire
Disarm the automatic locking feature before the inflation compressor (Y page 253).
vehicle is towed (Y page 176). You could other-
wise be locked out when pushing or towing the
vehicle.
Towing the vehicle with the front axle
raised
Installing/removing the towing eye Observe the important safety notes when tow-
ing your vehicle with the front axle raised
Installing the towing eye (Y page 263).
Only vehicles without 4MATIC can be towed
with the front axle raised.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed
with either the front or the rear axle raised, as
doing so will damage the transmission.
Vehicles with 4MATIC may either be towed away
with both axles on the ground or be loaded up
and transported.
! The ignition must be switched off if the vehi-
cle is being towed with the front axle raised.
Otherwise, ESP® may intervene and damage
the brake system.
X On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEY-
LESS-GO start function: you must use the
SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button
(Y page 115).
X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.
The brackets for the screw-in towing eye are
located in the bumpers. They are at the rear and
at the front, under covers :. tion lock.
Towing and tow-starting 265
X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the resetting the combination switch, the hazard
brake pedal and keep it depressed. warning lamp starts flashing again.
X Shift the automatic transmission to position
j.
X Release the brake pedal. Transporting the vehicle
Vehicles with automatic transmission
X Switch off the automatic locking
(Y page 176). ! When the vehicle is loaded for transport, the
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps front and rear axles must be stationary and on
(Y page 95). the same transportation vehicle. Positioning
X Turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to posi- over the connection point of the transport
tion g and leave the SmartKey in the ignition vehicle is not permitted. The drive train may
lock. otherwise be damaged.
Towing a vehicle with both axles on

the ground
It is important that you observe the safety
instructions when towing away your vehicle
(Y page 263).
X On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEY-
LESS-GO start function: you must use the
SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button
(Y page 115).
The automatic transmission automatically shifts All vehicles
to position j when you open the driver's or
front-passenger door or when you remove the ! You may only secure the vehicle by the
SmartKey from the ignition lock. In order to wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as
ensure that the automatic transmission stays in axle or steering components. Otherwise, the
position i when towing away the vehicle, you vehicle could be damaged.
must observe the following points:
X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. tion lock (Y page 114).
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- X Shift the transmission to position i.
tion lock.
X Depress and hold the brake pedal.
As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:
X Shift the automatic transmission to position X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by
i. applying the electric parking brake.
X Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the igni-
tion lock. X Turn the SmartKey to position g in the igni-

tion lock and remove it.
X Secure the vehicle.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle
(Y page 95). onto a trailer or transporter for transporting pur-
poses.
i In order to signal a change of direction when
towing the vehicle with the hazard warning
lamps switched on, use the combination
switch as usual. In this case, only the indicator
lamps for the direction of travel flash. After
Z
266 Fuses
Notes on 4MATIC vehicles wise, components or systems could be dam-

aged.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed
with either the front or the rear axle raised, as ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the
doing so will damage the transmission. fuse box when the cover is open.
Vehicles with 4MATIC may only either be towed ! When closing the cover, make sure that it is
away with both axles on the ground or be loaded lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seep-
up and transported. ing in or dirt could otherwise impair the oper-
If the vehicle's transmission, front, or rear axle is ation of the fuses.
damaged, have the vehicle transported on a The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down
truck or trailer. faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo-
In the event of damage to the electrical sys- nents on the circuit and their functions stop
tem: operating.
If the battery is defective, the automatic trans- Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the
mission will be locked in position j. To shift the same rating, which you can recognize by the
automatic transmission to position i, you color and value. The fuse ratings are listed in the
must provide power to the vehicle's on-board fuse allocation chart.
electrical system in the same way as when jump- The fuse allocation chart is in the fuse box in the
starting (Y page 260). front-passenger footwell (Y page 267).
Have the vehicle transported on a transporter or If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the
trailer. cause traced and rectified at a qualified special-
ist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center.
Tow-starting (emergency engine
starting)
Before changing a fuse
! Vehicles with automatic transmission must
not be tow-started. You could otherwise dam- X Secure the vehicle against rolling away
age the automatic transmission. (Y page 129).
X Switch off all electrical consumers.
i You can find information on "Jump-starting"
X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the
under (Y page 260).
SmartKey from the ignition lock.
or KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door.
Fuses
The vehicle electronics are now in position
Important safety notes g. This corresponds to the SmartKey being
removed from the ignition.
G WARNING The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:
If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if RFuse box in the engine compartment on the
you replace it with a fuse with a higher amper- left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in
age, the electric cables could be overloaded. the direction of travel
This could result in a fire. There is a risk of an RFuse box in the front-passenger footwell
accident and injury. The fuse allocation chart is on the fuse box in the
Always replace faulty fuses with the specified front-passenger footwell (Y page 267).
new fuses having the correct amperage.
! Only use fuses that have been approved for

Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the
correct fuse rating for the system concerned.
Only use fuses marked with an "S". Other-
Fuses 267
Fuse box in the engine compartment

G WARNING
When the hood is open and the windshield
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by
the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
the ignition before opening the hood.
X Hook clamps ; into the fuse box and close.

X Close the hood.
Fuse box in the front-passenger foot-

well
X Open the hood.
X Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture from
the fuse box.
X To open: open clamps ;.
X Fold up cover : in the direction of the arrow
and remove it.
X To open: open the front-passenger door.

X Remove the floormat.
X Fold out perforated floor covering : in the
X To close: check whether the seal is lying cor-

rectly in cover :.
X Insert cover : at the back into openings =
on the fuse box.
X Fold down cover :.
X To release cover =, press retaining

clamp ;.
X Fold out cover = in the direction of the arrow
to the catch.
Z
268 Fuses
X Remove cover = forwards.

Fuse allocation chart ? is located on the
lower right-hand side of cover =.
X To close: insert cover = on the left-hand side
of the fuse box into the retainer.
Cover = engages in the retainers.
X Fold down cover = until clamps ; lock audi-
bly.
X Fold back perforated floor covering :.
X Install the floormats.
Operation 269
Important safety notes Further information regarding wheels and tires

can be found under "Wheel/tire combinations"
(Y page 290).
G WARNING You can ask for information regarding permitted
If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used, wheel/tire combinations at an authorized
the wheel brakes or suspension components Mercedes-Benz Center.
may be damaged. There is a risk of an acci- Information on tire pressure can be found:
dent. Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
Always replace wheels and tires with those on the B-pillar on the driver's side
that fulfill the specifications of the original (Y page 276)
part. Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap
(Y page 127)
When replacing wheels, make sure to use the
Runder "Tire pressure" (Y page 272)
correct:
Rdesignation
Rmodel Operation
When replacing tires, make sure to use the Information on driving
correct:
Check the tire pressure when the vehicle is
Rdesignation heavily laden and adjust prior to a trip.
Rmanufacturer While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises
Rmodel and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pull-
ing to one side. This may indicate that the
wheels or tires are damaged. If you suspect that
G WARNING a tire is defective, reduce your speed immedi-
A flat tire severely impairs the driving, steer- ately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to
Wheels and tires

ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle. check the wheels and tires for damage. Hidden
There is a risk of accident. tire damage could also be causing the unusual
handling characteristics. If you find no signs of
Tires without run-flat characteristics: damage, have the tires and wheels checked at a
Rdo not drive with a flat tire. qualified specialist workshop.
Rimmediately replace the flat tire with your When parking your vehicle, make sure that the
tires do not get deformed by the curb or other
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or obstacles. If they cannot be avoided, drive over
consult a qualified specialist workshop. obstacles such as curbs slowly and at an obtuse
Tires with run-flat characteristics: angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels
or tires.
Rpay attention to the information and warn-
ing notices on MOExtended tires (tires with
run-flat characteristics). Regular checking of wheels and tires
Accessories that are not approved for your vehi- G WARNING
cle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used cor-
rectly can impair the operating safety. Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-
Before purchasing and using non-approved sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of
accessories, visit a qualified specialist work- your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
shop and inquire about: Check the tires regularly for signs of damage
Rsuitability and replace any damaged tires immediately.
Rlegal stipulations
Rfactory recommendations
Z
270 Operation
Check wheels and tires for damage at least once Minimum tire tread depth for:
a month. Check wheels and tires after driving
off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels RSummer tires: â in (3 mm)
can cause a loss of tire pressure. Pay particular RM+S tires: ã in (4 mm)
attention to damage such as:
For safety reasons, replace the tires before
RCuts in the tires
the legally prescribed limit for the minimum
RPunctures in the tires tire tread depth is reached.
RTears in the tires
RBulges on tires
RDeformation or severe corrosion on wheels
Regularly check the tire tread depth and the
condition of the tread across the whole width of
the tire (Y page 270). If necessary, turn the
front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the
inner side of the tire surface.
All wheels must have a valve cap to protect the
valve against dirt and moisture. Do not mount
anything onto the valve other than the standard
valve cap or other valve caps approved by
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Do not use any
other valve caps or systems, e.g. tire pressure Marking : shows where bar indicator ; for
monitoring systems. tread wear is integrated into the tire tread.
Regularly check the pressure of all the tires par- Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law.
ticularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire pres- Six indicators are positioned on the tire tread.
sure as necessary (Y page 272). They are visible once a tread depth of approx-
Observe the notes on the emergency spare imately á in (1.6 mm) has been reached. If this
wheel (Y page 290). is the case, the tire is so worn that it must be
Wheels and tires
replaced.
The service life of tires depends, among other
things, on the following factors:
RDriving style
Selecting, mounting and replacing
RTire pressure
tires
RDistance covered
G WARNING
Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa-
Notes on tire tread city and the approved maximum speed could
lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There
G WARNING
is a risk of accident.
Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.
Therefore, only use tire types and sizes
The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.
approved for your vehicle model. Observe the
This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk
tire load rating and speed rating required for
of hydroplaning increases, in particular where
your vehicle.
speed is not adapted to suit the driving con-
ditions. There is a risk of accident. ROnly mount tires and wheels of the same type
If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires and make.
may exhibit different levels of wear at differ- Exception: it is permissible to install a differ-
ent locations on the tire tread. Thus, you ent type or make in the event of a flat tire.
should regularly check the tread depth and Observe here the "MOExtended tires (tires
the condition of the tread across the entire
width of all tires.
Winter operation 271
with run-flat characteristics)" section braking power. Change the tires on your vehicle
(Y page 254). to M+S tires. Using summer tires at very cold
ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto the temperatures could cause cracks to form,
wheels. thereby damaging the tires permanently.
RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for the Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility for
first 60 miles (100 km). The new tires only this type of damage.
reach their full performance after this dis- G WARNING
tance.
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-
RDo not drive with tires which have too little
tread depth, as this significantly reduces the sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of
traction on wet roads (hydroplaning). your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
RReplace the tires after six years at the latest, Check the tires regularly for signs of damage
regardless of wear. and replace any damaged tires immediately.
Observe the notes on the emergency spare
wheel (Y page 290).
M+S tires
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat G WARNING
properties) M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat char- ã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter
acteristics), you can continue to drive your vehi- and do not provide sufficient traction. There is
cle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one a risk of an accident.
or more tires.
M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ã in
MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunc- (4 mm) must be replaced immediately.
tion with an active tire pressure loss warning
system and only on wheels specifically tested by
At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), use winter
Wheels and tires

Mercedes-Benz.
tires or all-season tires. Both types of tire are
Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with a identified by the M+S marking.
flat tire (Y page 254).
Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide
not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It the best possible grip in wintry road conditions.
is therefore recommended that you additionally Only these tires will allow driving safety systems
equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount such as ABS and ESP® to function optimally in
tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter. These tires have been developed specif-
winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from ically for driving in snow.
a qualified specialist workshop.
Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on all
wheels to maintain safe handling characteris-
tics.
Winter operation Always observe the maximum permissible
General notes speed specified for the M+S tires you have
mounted.
Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified When you have mounted the M+S tires:
specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
X Check the tire pressures (Y page 272).
Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system
section (Y page 286).
(Canada) (Y page 276)
Driving with summer tires

At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summer
tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and
Z
272 Tire pressure
Snow chains Tire pressure

G WARNING Tire pressure specifications
If snow chains are mounted on the rear
wheels, the snow chains could cause abrasion
to the vehicle body or to chassis components. G WARNING
This could cause damage to the vehicle or the Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the
tires. There is a risk of an accident. following risks:
To avoid hazardous situations:
Rthe tires may burst, especially as the load
Rnever mount snow chains on the rear and vehicle speed increase.
wheels Rthe tires may wear excessively and/or
Ronly mount snow chains in pairs on the unevenly, which may greatly impair tire
front wheels. traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steer-
! On some tire sizes there is not enough space
for snow chains. To avoid damage to the vehi- ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.
cle or tires, observe the "Wheel and tire com- There is a risk of an accident.
binations" section under "Tires and wheels". Follow recommended tire inflation pressures
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- and check the pressure of all the tires includ-
mends that you only use snow chains that have ing the spare wheel:
been specially approved for your vehicle by
Mercedes-Benz, or are of a corresponding Rmonthly, at least
standard of quality. For more information, Rif the load changes
please contact a qualified specialist workshop. Rbefore beginning a long journey
If you intend to mount snow chains, please bear
Runder different operating conditions, e.g.
Wheels and tires
the following points in mind:

off-road driving
RSnow chains may not be mounted on all
wheel/tire combinations. Permissible wheel- If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
tire combinations (Y page 290).
ROnly use snow chains when driving on roads i The data on the Tire and Loading Informa-
completely covered by snow. Remove the tion placard and tire pressure table shown
snow chains as soon as possible when you here are examples. Tire pressure specifica-
come to a road that is not snow-covered. tions are vehicle-specific and may deviate
RLocal regulations may restrict the use of snow
from the data shown here. The tire pressure
specifications that are valid for your vehicle
chains. Observe the appropriate regulations if
can be found on the Tire and Loading Infor-
you wish to mount snow chains.
mation placard and tire pressure table on the
RDo not exceed the maximum permissible vehicle.
speed of 30 mph (50 km/h).
RNever use Parking Pilot when snow chains are
General notes
installed (Y page 153).
You may wish to deactivate ESP® when pulling The recommended tire pressures for the tires
away with snow chains mounted (Y page 61). mounted at the factory can be found on the
You can thereby allow the wheels to spin in a labels described here.
controlled manner, achieving an increased driv- Operation with an emergency spare wheel:
ing force (cutting action). information on operation with an emergency
Information about driving with an emergency spare wheel can be found in the general notes in
spare wheel (Y page 290). the "Emergency spare wheel" section
(Y page 290).
Further information on tire pressures can be
obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
Tire pressure 273
Tire and Loading Information placard
The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully

laden" are defined in the table for different num-
: Recommended tire pressures
bers of occupants and amounts of luggage. The
The Tire and Loading Information placard is on actual number of seats may differ.
the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 276).
The Tire and Loading Information placard con-
tains the recommended tire pressures for cold
tires. The recommended tire pressures are valid
for the maximum permissible load and up to the
maximum permissible vehicle speed.
Tire pressure table

The tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuel
filler flap. It shows the tire pressure for all tires
permitted at the factory for this vehicle; see
Wheels and tires

illustration (example).
Some tire pressure tables show only the rim
diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g. R18.
Rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be
found on the tire sidewall (Y page 281).
If the tire pressures have been set to the lower
values for lighter loads and/or lower road
speeds, the pressures should be reset to the
higher values:
Rif you want to drive with an increased load
and/or
Rif you want to drive at higher speeds
i The tire pressures for increased loads and/

The tire pressure table contains the recommen- or higher road speeds, shown in the tire pres-
ded pressures for cold tires for various operat- sure table, may have a negative effect on driv-
ing conditions, i.e. differing load and speed con- ing comfort.
ditions.
If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the fol- If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this can
lowing tire pressure information is only valid for lead to an excessive build-up of heat and a sud-
that tire size; see illustration (example). den loss of pressure.
For more information, contact a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Z
274 Tire pressure
Important notes on tire pressure too low for the current operating conditions. If
you check the tire pressure when the tires are
G WARNING warm, the resulting value will be higher than if
the tires were cold. This is normal. Do not
If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the reduce the tire pressure to the value specified
wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire for cold tires. The tire pressure would otherwise
pressure that is too low may result in a tire be too low.
blow-out. There is a risk of an accident. Observe the recommended tire pressures for
RCheck the tire for foreign objects. cold tires:
RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
valve is leaking. on the B-pillar on the driver's side
Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap
If you are unable to rectify the damage, con-
(Y page 127)
tact a qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNING Underinflated or overinflated tires

If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire
valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and Underinflated tires
malfunction, which can cause tire pressure
G WARNING
loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pres-
sure monitors keep the tire valve open. This Tires with pressure that is too low can over-
can also result in tire pressure loss. There is a heat and burst as a consequence. In addition,
risk of an accident. they also suffer from excessive and/or irreg-
ular wear, which can severely impair the brak-
Only screw the standard valve cap or other
ing properties and the driving characteristics.
valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for
your vehicle onto the tire valve.
Wheels and tires
Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the

Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire tires, including the spare wheel.
pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does
not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire Underinflated tires may:
pressure. On vehicles equipped with the elec- Roverheat, leading to tire defects
tronic tire pressure monitor, the tire pressure
Radversely affect handling
can be checked in the on-board computer.
Rwear excessively and/or unevenly
The tire temperature and pressure increase
when the vehicle is in motion. This is dependent Rhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption
on the driving speed and the load.
Therefore, you should only correct tire pres- Overinflated tires
sures when the tires are cold.
The tires are cold: G WARNING
Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tires Tires with excessively high pressure can burst
out of direct sunlight for at least three hours because they are damaged more easily by
and road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they
Rif the vehicle has been driven less than 1 mile also suffer from irregular wear, which can
(1.6 km) severely impair the braking properties and the
The tire temperature changes depending on the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an
outside temperature, the vehicle speed and the accident.
tire load. If the tire temperature changes by
18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure changes by Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the
approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take tires, including the spare wheel.
this into account when checking the pressure of
warm tires. Only correct the tire pressure if it is
Tire pressure 275
Overinflated tires may: Checking tire pressures manually

Rincrease the braking distance
To determine and set the correct tire pressure,
Radversely affect handling proceed as follows:
Rwear excessively and/or unevenly X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to be
Rhave an adverse effect on ride comfort checked.
Rbe more susceptible to damage X Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto
the valve.
Maximum tire pressures X Read the tire pressure and compare it to the
recommended value on the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the tire pressure table
(Y page 272).
X If the tire pressure is too low, increase the tire
pressure to the recommended value.
X If the tire pressure is too high, release air. To
do so, press down the metal pin in the valve,
using the tip of a pen for example. Then check
the tire pressure again using the tire pressure
checker.
X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.
X Repeat these steps for the other tires.
: Example: maximum permissible tire pres-
sure
Never exceed the maximum permissible tire Tire pressure loss warning system
inflation pressure. Always observe the recom- (Canada only)
mended tire pressure for your vehicle when
adjusting the tire pressure (Y page 272). General notes
Wheels and tires

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe- While the vehicle is in motion, the tire pressure
cific and may deviate from the values in the loss warning system monitors the set tire pres-
illustration. sure using the rotational speed of the wheels.
This enables the system to detect significant
pressure loss in a tire. If the speed of rotation of
Checking the tire pressures a wheel changes as a result of a loss of pressure,
a corresponding warning message will appear in
Important safety notes the multifunction display.
You can recognize the tire pressure loss warning
The tire pressure monitor does not warn you of: by the Run Flat Indicator Active Press
Rincorrectly set tire pressure 'OK' to Restart message in the multifunction
Rsudden loss of tire pressure, e.g. from a for- display in the Serv. menu. Information on the
eign object that has penetrated the tire message display can be found in the "Restarting
Observe the notes on tire pressure the tire pressure loss warning" section
(Y page 272). (Y page 276).
Information on air pressure for the tires on your
vehicle can be found: Important safety notes
Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information The tire pressure warning system does not warn
placard on the B-pillar you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe
Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap the notes on the recommended tire pressure
(Y page 127) (Y page 272).
Rin the "Tire pressure" section The tire pressure loss warning does not replace
the need to regularly check the tire pressure. An
even loss of pressure on several tires at the
Z
276 Loading the vehicle
same time cannot be detected by the tire pres- If you wish to confirm the restart:
sure loss warning system. X Press the a button.
The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you The Tire Pressure Now OK? message
of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is appears in the multifunction display.
penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a X Press the 9 or : button to select Yes Yes.
sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a
X Press the a button.
halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering
movements. The Run Flat Indicator Restarted mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display.
The function of the tire pressure loss warning
system is limited or delayed if: After a teach-in period, the tire pressure loss
warning system will monitor the set tire pres-
Rsnow chains are mounted on your vehicle's sures of all four tires.
tires.
Rroad conditions are wintry.
If you wish to cancel the restart:
Ryou are driving on sand or gravel. X Press the % button.
Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (corner- or
ing at high speeds or driving with high rates of X If the Tire Pressure Now OK? message
acceleration). appears, press the 9 or : button to
Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the vehi- select Cancel.
Cancel
cle or on the roof) X Press the a button.
The tire pressure values stored at the last
Restarting the tire pressure loss warn- restart will continue to be monitored.
ing system
Restart the tire pressure loss warning system if Loading the vehicle
you have:
Rchanged the tire pressure Instruction labels for tires and loads
Wheels and tires
Rchanged the wheels or tires

G WARNING
Rmounted new wheels or tires
Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a
X Before restarting, make sure that the tire
pressures are set properly on all four tires for blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the
the respective operating conditions. steering and driving characteristics and lead
The recommended tire pressure can be found to brake failure. There is a risk of accident.
on the Tire and Loading Information placard Observe the load rating of the tires. The load
on the B-pillar. Additionally, a tire pressure rating must be at least half of the GAWR of
table is attached to the fuel filler flap. The tire your vehicle. Never overload the tires by
pressure loss warning system can only give
exceeding the maximum load.
reliable warnings if you have set the correct
tire pressure. If an incorrect tire pressure is
set, these incorrect values will be monitored. Two instruction labels on your vehicle show the
maximum possible load.
X Also observe the notes in the section on tire
pressures (Y page 272). (1) The Tire and Loading Information placard is
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2
on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The Tire
in the ignition lock (Y page 114). and Loading Information placard shows the
maximum permissible number of occu-
X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to
pants and the maximum permissible vehicle
select the Serv. menu. load. It also contains details of the tire sizes
X Press the 9 or : button to select and corresponding pressures for tires
Tire Pressure.
Pressure mounted at the factory.
X Press the a button. (2) The vehicle identification plate is on the B-
The Run Flat Indicator Active Press pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle iden-
'OK' to Restart message appears in the tification plate informs you of the gross
multifunction display. vehicle weight rating. It is made up of the
Loading the vehicle 277
vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the You can find the valid maximum permissible
fuel and the cargo. You can also find infor- gross vehicle weight rating for your vehicle on
mation about the maximum gross axle the Tire and Loading Information placard.
weight rating on the front and rear axle.
The maximum gross axle weight rating is
the maximum weight that can be carried by Number of seats
one axle (front or rear axle). Never exceed
the maximum load or the maximum gross
axle weight rating for the front or rear axle.
Maximum number of seats : indicates the

maximum number of occupants allowed to
travel in the vehicle. This information can be
: B-pillar, driver's side found on the Tire and Loading Information plac-
ard.
Maximum permissible gross vehicle i The specifications shown on the Tire and
weight rating Loading Information placard in the illustration
are examples. The number of seats is vehicle-
specific and can differ from the details shown.
Wheels and tires

The number of seats in your vehicle can be
found on the Tire and Loading Information
placard.
Determining the correct load limit

Step-by-step instructions
The following steps have been developed as
required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pur-
X Specification for maximum gross vehicle suant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle
weight : is listed in the Tire and Loading Safety Act of 1966".
Information placard: "The combined weight of
X Step 1: Locate the statement "The combined
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kilograms or XXX lbs." weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle’s
The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load Tire and Loading Information placard.
and luggage must not exceed the specified X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of
value. the driver and passengers that will be riding in
i The specifications shown on the Tire and your vehicle.
Loading Information placard in the illustration X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of the
are examples. The maximum permissible driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or
gross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-specific XXX lbs.
and may differ from that in the illustration.
Z
278 Loading the vehicle
X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the available cargo and luggage load capacity is
able amount of cargo and luggage load capa- 650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
city. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of
1400 lbs and there will be five 150-lb pas- luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehi-
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail- cle. That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity cal-
culated in step 4.
Example: steps 1 to 3
The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying
seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a load limit of
1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load
limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (Y page 276).
The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.
Step 1
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
Combined maximum 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)
weight of occupants
and cargo (data from
the Tire and Loading
Information placard)
Step 2
Wheels and tires

Number of people in 5 3 1
the vehicle (driver and
occupants)
Distribution of the Front: 2 Front: 1 Front: 1
occupants Rear: 3 Rear: 2
Weight of the occu- Occupant 1: 150 lbs Occupant 1: 200 lbs Occupant 1: 150 lbs
pants (68 kg) (91 kg) (68 kg)
Occupant 2: 180 lbs Occupant 2: 190 lbs
(82 kg) (86 kg)
Occupant 3: 160 lbs Occupant 3: 150 lbs
(73 kg) (68 kg)
Occupant 4: 140 lbs
(63 kg)
Occupant 5: 120 lbs
(54 kg)
Gross weight of all 750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
occupants
All about wheels and tires 279
Step 3
Permissible load (maxi- 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò
mum gross vehicle 750 lbs (340 kg) = 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg) =
weight rating from the 750 lbs (340 kg) =960 lbs (435 kg) 1350 lbs (612 kg)
Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard minus
the gross weight of all
occupants)
Vehicle identification plate All about wheels and tires

Even if you have calculated the total cargo care- Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand-
fully, you should still make sure that the gross ards
vehicle weight rating and the gross axle weight
rating are not exceeded. Details can be found on Overview of Tire Quality Grading Stand-
the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on ards
the driver's side of the vehicle (Y page 276).
Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR): the gross weight of the vehicle, all pas-
sengers, load and trailer load/noseweight (if
applicable) must not exceed the permissible
gross vehicle weight.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): the maxi-
mum permissible weight that can be carried by
one axle (front or rear axle).
Wheels and tires

To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed the
maximum permissible values (gross vehicle
weight and maximum gross axle weight rating),
have your loaded vehicle (including driver, occu-
pants, cargo, and full trailer load if applicable) Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are U.S.
weighed on a suitable vehicle weighbridge. government specifications. Their purpose is to
provide drivers with uniform reliable information
on tire performance data. Tire manufacturers
have to grade tires using three performance fac-
tors: : tread wear grade, ; traction grade and
= temperature grade. These regulations do not
apply to Canada. Nevertheless, all tires sold in
North America are provided with the corre-
sponding quality grading markings on the side-
wall of the tire.
Quality grades can be found, where applicable,
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width.
Example:
RTreadwear grade: 200
RTraction grade: AA
RTemperature grade: A
Z
280 All about wheels and tires
All passenger car tires must conform to the stat- are not icy or covered with snow. Take appro-
utory safety requirements in addition to these priate care when driving.
grades. Further information on winter tires (M+S tires)
i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe- (Y page 271).
cific and may deviate from the values in the
illustration. Temperature
Treadwear G WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified U.S. not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-
government course. For example, a tire graded tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
150 would wear one and one-half times as well in combination, can cause excessive heat
on the government course as a tire graded 100. build-up and possible tire failure.
The relative performance of tires depends upon
the actual conditions of their use, however, and The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
may depart significantly from the norm due to and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
variations in driving habits, service practices generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
and differences in road characteristics and cli- heat when tested under controlled conditions
mate. on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus-
tained high temperature can cause the material
Traction of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
G WARNING failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car tires must
The traction grade assigned to this tire is meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
based on straight-ahead braking traction Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent
Wheels and tires
tests, and does not include acceleration, cor- higher levels of performance on the laboratory
nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction char- test wheel than the minimum required by law.
acteristics.
! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage to

the drive train.
The traction grades – from highest to lowest –
are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the
tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as meas-
ured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and con-
crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy
road is always lower than on dry road surfaces.
You should pay special attention to road condi-
tions when temperatures are around freezing
point.
Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum tread
depth of ã in (4 mm) on all four winter tires.
Observe the legally required minimum tire tread
depth (Y page 270). Winter tires can reduce the
braking distance on snow-covered surfaces in
comparison with summer tires. The braking dis-
tance is still much further than on surfaces that
Tire labeling tire load rating and speed rating required for
your vehicle.
Overview
: Tire width
; Nominal aspect ratio in %
= Tire code
? Rim diameter
A Load bearing index
B Speed rating
: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
(Y page 284) General: depending on the manufacturer's
; Department of Transportation, Tire Identifi- standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall may
cation Number (Y page 283) not contain any letters or may contain one letter
= Maximum load rating (Y page 283) that precedes the size description.
? Maximum tire pressures (Y page 275) If there is no letter preceding the size descrip-
tion (as shown above): these are passenger
Wheels and tires

A Manufacturer vehicle tires according to European manufac-
B Tire material (Y page 284) turing standards.
C Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity If "P" precedes the size description: these are
and speed rating (Y page 281) passenger vehicle tires according to U.S. man-
D Load index (Y page 283) ufacturing standards.
E Tire name If "LT" precedes the size description: these are
The markings described above are on the tire in light truck tires according to U.S. manufacturing
addition to the tire name (sales designation) and standards.
the manufacturer's name. If "T" precedes the size description: compact
emergency wheels with high tire pressure that
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate are only designed for temporary use in an emer-
from the data in the example. gency.
Tire width: tire width : shows the nominal tire
Tire size designation, load-bearing width in millimeters.
capacity and speed rating Aspect ratio: aspect ratio ; is the size ratio
between the tire height and tire width and is
G WARNING shown in percent. The aspect ratio is calculated
Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa- by dividing the tire width by the tire height.
city and the approved maximum speed could Tire code: tire code = specifies the tire type.
lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There "R" represents radial tires; "D" represents diag-
is a risk of accident. onal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial tires.
Therefore, only use tire types and sizes Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of over
approved for your vehicle model. Observe the 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the size
Z
description, depending on the manufacturer ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed of

(e.g. 245/40 ZR 18). over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in
Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the diameter the size description, depending on the man-
of the bead seat, not the diameter of the rim ufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18).
flange. The rim diameter is specified in The service specification is made up of load-
inches (in). bearing index A and speed rating B.
Load-bearing index: load-bearing index A is a RIf the size description of your tire includes
numerical code that specifies the maximum "ZR" and there are no service specifications,
load-bearing capacity of a tire. ask the tire manufacturer in order to find out
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the the maximum speed.
specified load limit. The maximum permissible If a service specification is available, the max-
load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and imum speed is limited according to the speed
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on rating in the service specification. Example:
the driver's side (Y page 276). 245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this example, "97 Y" is
Example: the service specification. The letter "Y" rep-
resents the speed rating. The maximum
Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximum
speed of the tire is limited to 186 mph
load of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can bear.
(300 km/h).
For further information on the maximum tire
load in kilograms and lbs, see (Y page 283). RThe size description for all tires with maxi-
mum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h)
For further information on the load bearing
must include "ZR" and the service specifica-
index, see "Load index" (Y page 283).
tion must be given in parentheses. Example:
Speed rating: speed rating B specifies the 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)" indi-
approved maximum speed of the tire. cates that the maximum speed of the tire is
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the tire man-
from the data in the example. ufacturer about the maximum speed.
All-weather tires and winter tires
Regardless of the speed rating, always observe
Wheels and tires
the speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt your Index Speed rating
driving style to the traffic conditions.
Summer tires Q M+S1 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
Index Speed rating T M+S1 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h) H M+S1 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
R up to 106 mph (170 km/h) V M+S1 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
i Not all tires with the M+S marking provide
T up to 118 mph (190 km/h) the driving characteristics of winter tires. In
addition to the M+S marking, winter tires also
H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
have the i snowflake symbol on the tire
V up to 149 mph (240 km/h) wall. Tires with this marking fulfill the require-
ments of the Rubber Manufacturers Associa-
W up to 168 mph (270 km/h) tion (RMA) and the Rubber Association of
Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on
Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) snow. They have been especially developed
ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) for driving on snow.
An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehi-
ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)
cle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph
ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h) (210 km/h).
1 Or M+S i for winter tires.

The speed rating of tires mounted at the factory Maximum load rating
may be higher than the maximum speed that the
electronic speed limiter permits.
Make sure that your tires have the required
speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The
required speed rating for your vehicle can be
found in the "Tires" section (Y page 290).
Further information about reading tire data can
be obtained from any qualified specialist work-
shop.
Load index
Maximum tire load : is the maximum permis-

sible weight for which the tire is approved.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit. The maximum permissible
load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on
the driver's side (Y page 276).
i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-
cific and may deviate from the values in the
illustration.
In addition to the load-bearing index, load
index : may be imprinted after the letters that
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
identify speed rating on the sidewall of the tire. US tire regulations stipulate that every tire man-
Wheels and tires

Speed rating (Y page 281). ufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on
RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the the sidewall of each tire produced.
example above), represents a standard load
(SL) tire
RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced tire
RLight Load: represents a light load tire
RC, D, E: represents a load range that depends
on the maximum load that the tire can carry at
a certain pressure
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate
from the data in the example.
The TIN is a unique identification number. The

TIN enables the tire manufacturers or retreaders
to inform purchasers of recalls and other safety-
relevant matters. It makes it possible for the
purchaser to easily identify the affected tires.
The TIN is made up of manufacturer identifica-
tion code ;, tire size =, tire type code ? and
manufacturing date A.
DOT (Department of Transportation): tire
symbol : marks that the tire complies with the
Z
requirements of the U.S. Department of Trans- Bar

portation. Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds
Manufacturer identification code: manufac- per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa)
turer identification code ; provides details on are the equivalent of 1 bar.
the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code
with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code DOT (Department of Transportation)
with four symbols. DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements of the
For further information about retreaded tires, U S Department of Transportation.
see (Y page 290).
Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size. Normal occupant weight
Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used by The number of occupants for which the vehicle
the manufacturer as a code to describe specific is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lbs).
characteristics of the tire. Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
Date of manufacture: date of manufacture A
A uniform standard to grade the quality of tires
provides information about the age of a tire. The with regards to tread quality, tire traction and
first and second positions represent the week of temperature characteristics. The quality grad-
manufacture, starting with "01" for the first cal- ing assessment is made by the manufacturer
endar week. Positions three and four represent following specifications from the U.S. govern-
the year of manufacture. For example, a tire that ment. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of
is marked with "3208", was manufactured in the tire.
week 32 in 2008.
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate Recommended tire pressures
from the data in the example. The recommended tire pressure applies to the
tires mounted at the factory.
Tire characteristics The Tire and Loading Information placard con-
tains the recommended tire pressures for cold
tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the maxi-
Wheels and tires
mum permissible vehicle speed.

The tire pressure table contains the recommen-
ded pressures for cold tires for various operat-
ing conditions, i.e. differing load and speed con-
ditions.
Increased vehicle weight due to optional
equipment
The combined weight of all standard and
optional equipment available for the vehicle,
regardless of whether it is actually installed on
This information describes the type of tire cord the vehicle or not.
and the number of layers in sidewall : and
under tire tread ;. Rim
This is the part of the wheel on which the tire is
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate mounted.
from the data in the example.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
Definition of terms for tires and loading The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight
rating. The actual load on an axle must never
Tire ply composition and material used exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross
Describes the number of plies or the number of axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle
layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's
and sidewall. These are made of steel, nylon, side.
polyester and other materials.
Speed rating Maximum load rating

The speed rating is part of the tire identification. The maximum tire load is the maximum permis-
It specifies the speed range for which the tire is sible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire is
approved. approved.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) Maximum permissible tire pressure
The gross vehicle weight includes the weight of Maximum permissible tire pressure for one tire.
the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare wheel,
accessories installed, occupants, luggage and Maximum load on one tire
the drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by
vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehi- dividing the maximum axle load of one axle by
cle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehi- two.
cle identification plate on the B-pillar on the
driver's side. PSI (pounds per square inch)
A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross Aspect ratio
weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of the Relationship between tire height and tire width
vehicle including all accessories, occupants, in percent.
fuel, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if
applicable). The gross vehicle weight rating is Tire pressure
specified on the vehicle identification plate on This is pressure inside the tire applying an out-
the B-pillar on the driver's side. ward force to each square inch of the tire's sur-
Maximum loaded vehicle weight face. The tire pressure is specified in pounds per
square inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar.
The maximum weight is the sum of: The tire pressure should only be corrected when
Rthe curb weight of the vehicle the tires are cold.
Rthe weight of the accessories
Wheels and tires

Cold tire pressure
Rthe load limit
The tires are cold:
Rthe weight of the factory installed optional
Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tires
equipment
out of direct sunlight for at least three hours
Kilopascal (kPa) and
Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corre- Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than
sponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is 1 mile (1.6 km)
bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of
1 bar. Tread
The part of the tire that comes into contact with
Load index the road.
In addition to the load-bearing index, the load
index may also be imprinted on the sidewall of Bead
the tire. This specifies the load-bearing capacity The tire bead ensures that the tire sits securely
more precisely. on the wheel. There are several steel wires in the
bead to prevent the tire from coming loose from
Curb weight the wheel rim.
The weight of a vehicle with standard equipment
including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and Sidewall
coolant. It also includes the air-conditioning sys- The part of the tire between the tread and the
tem and optional equipment if these are instal- bead.
led in the vehicle, but does not include passen-
gers or luggage.
Z
286 Changing a wheel
Weight of optional extras Rotating the wheels

The combined weight of those optional extras
that weigh more than the replaced standard G WARNING
parts and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs). These Interchanging the front and rear wheels may
optional extras, such as high-performance severely impair the driving characteristics if
brakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-per-
the wheels or tires have different dimensions.
formance battery, are not included in the curb
weight and the weight of the accessories. The wheel brakes or suspension components
may also be damaged. There is a risk of acci-
TIN (Tire Identification Number) dent.
This is a unique identifier which can be used by Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels
a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example and tires are of the same dimensions.
for a product recall, and thus identify the pur-
chasers. The TIN is made up of the manufactur- Observe the instructions and safety notes in the
er's identity code, tire size, tire type code and "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 286).
the manufacturing date.
The wear patterns on the front and rear tires
Load bearing index differ, depending on the operating conditions.
The load bearing index (also load index) is a code Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern
that contains the maximum load bearing capa- has formed on the tires. Front tires typically
city of a tire. wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires in
the center.
Traction On vehicles that have the same size front and
Traction is the result of friction between the tires rear wheels, you can rotate the wheels accord-
and the road surface. ing to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's
warranty book in your vehicle documents. If no
Treadwear indicators warranty book is available, the tires should be
Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distrib- rotated every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to
10,000 km). Depending on tire wear, this may
Wheels and tires
uted over the tire tread. If the tire tread is level

with the bars, the wear limit of á in (1.6 mm) be required earlier. Do not change the direction
of wheel rotation.
has been reached.
Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the
Occupant distribution brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is rota-
The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at their ted. Check the tire pressure and, if necessary,
designated seating positions. restart the tire pressure loss warning system.
Total load limit

Nominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg Direction of rotation
(150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats in
Tires with a specified direction of rotation have
the vehicle.
additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydro-
planing. These advantages can only be gained if
the tires are installed corresponding to the
Changing a wheel direction of rotation.
An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates its
Flat tire correct direction of rotation.
The "Breakdown assistance" section
(Y page 253) contains information and notes on
how to deal with a flat tire. Information on driv- Storing wheels
ing with MOExtended tires in the event of a flat
tire can be found under "MOExtended tires (tires Store wheels that are not being used in a cool,
with run-flat characteristics" (Y page 254). dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tires
from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.
Changing a wheel 287
Mounting a wheel Securing the vehicle to prevent it from

rolling away
Preparing the vehicle
X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
level ground.
X Apply the electric parking brake manually.
X Bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead
position.
X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the
SmartKey from the ignition lock.
or KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door. If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, it
The vehicle electronics are now in position can be found in the tire-change tool kit
u. This is the same as “key removed”. (Y page 252).
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function The folding wheel chock is an additional safety
or KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop but- measure to prevent the vehicle from rolling
ton from the ignition lock (Y page 114). away, for example when changing a wheel.
X Make sure that the engine cannot be started X Fold both plates up :.
via your smartphone (Y page 76).
X Fold out lower plate ;.
X If included in the vehicle equipment, remove
X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into the
the tire-change tool kit from the vehicle.
openings in base plate =.
X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away
(Y page 129).
Wheels and tires

i Apart from certain country-specific varia-
tions, the vehicles are not equipped with a
tire-change tool kit. Some tools for changing a
wheel are specific to the vehicle. For more
information on which tools are required to
perform a wheel change on your vehicle, con-
sult a qualified specialist workshop.
Necessary tire-changing tools can include, for
example:
RJack
RWheel chock X Place chocks or other suitable items under
RLug wrench the front and rear of the wheel that is diago-
nally opposite the wheel you wish to change.
Raising the vehicle

G WARNING
If you do not position the jack correctly at the
appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the
jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.
Only position the jack at the appropriate jack-
ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jack
Z
288 Changing a wheel
must be positioned vertically, directly under

the jacking point of the vehicle.
! Only position the jack at the appropriate

jacking point of the vehicle. Otherwise, you
could damage the vehicle.
Observe the following when raising the vehi-
cle:
RTo raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-spe-
cific jack that has been tested and approved
by Mercedes-Benz. If used incorrectly, the
jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. X Using lug wrench :, loosen the bolts on the
RThe jack is designed only to raise and hold the wheel you wish to change by about one full
vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely.
changed. It must not be used for performing
maintenance work under the vehicle.
RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill and down-
hill slopes.
RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it from roll-
ing away by applying the parking brake and
inserting wheel chocks. Do not disengage the
parking brake while the vehicle is raised.
RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and
non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large,
flat, load-bearing underlay must be used. On a
slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be
used, e.g. rubber mats.
Wheels and tires
Jacking points
RDo not use wooden blocks or similar objects
as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack will not The jacking points are located just behind the
be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity front wheel housings and just in front of the rear
due to the restricted height. wheel housings (arrows).
RMake sure that the distance between the
underside of the tires and the ground does not
exceed 1.2 in (3 cm).
RNever place your hands and feet under the
raised vehicle.
RDo not lie under the vehicle.
RDo not start the engine when the vehicle is
raised.
RNever open or close a door or the tailgate
when the vehicle is raised.
RMake sure that no persons are present in the
vehicle when the vehicle is raised. X Take ratchet wrench ? out of the vehicle tool
kit and place it on the hexagon nut of jack =
so that the letters AUF are visible.
X Position jack = at jacking point ;.
Changing a wheel 289
Always pay attention to the instructions and

safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section
(Y page 286).
Only use wheel bolts that have been designed
for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea-
sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
only use wheel bolts which have been approved
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective
wheel.
! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold
the wheel securely against the wheel hub
while screwing in the first wheel bolt.
X Make sure the foot of the jack is directly
beneath the jacking point.
X Turn ratchet wrench ? until jack = sits
completely on jacking point ; and the base
of the jack lies evenly on the ground.
X Turn ratchet wrench ? until the tire is raised
a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.
Removing a wheel
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty
surface. The bolt and wheel hub threads could
otherwise be damaged when you screw them X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact sur-
in. faces.
X Unscrew the wheel bolts. X Place the new wheel on the wheel hub and
Wheels and tires

X Remove the wheel. push it on.
X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger-
tight.
Mounting a new wheel
G WARNING Lowering the vehicle
Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged
G WARNING
wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel
bolts to come loose. As a result, you could The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts
lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of and bolts are not tightened to the specified
accident. tightening torque. There is a risk of accident.
Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of Have the tightening torque immediately
damage to the threads, contact a qualified checked at a qualified specialist workshop
specialist workshop immediately. Have the after a wheel is changed.
damaged wheel bolts or hub threads
X Place the ratchet wrench onto the hexagon
replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving. nut of the jack so that the letters AB are visi-
ble.
G WARNING X Turn the ratchet wrench until the vehicle is
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts once again standing firmly on the ground.
when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip X Place the jack to one side.
over. There is a risk of injury.
Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is on the ground.
Z
290 Wheel and tire combinations
These tires have been specially adapted for

use with the control systems, such as ABS or
ESP®, and are marked as follows:
RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original
RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)
RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-
tain AMG tires)
Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires may
only be used on wheels that have been spe-
cifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.
X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise Only use tires, wheels or accessories tested
pattern in the sequence indicated (: to A). and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certain
The specified tightening torque is 96 lb-ft characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise
(130 Nm). emissions or fuel consumption, may other-
wise be adversely affected. In addition, when
X Turn the jack back to its initial position.
driving with a load, tire dimension variations
X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle tools could cause the tires to come into contact
in the vehicle again. with the bodywork and axle components. This
X Check the tire pressure of the newly mounted could result in damage to the tires or the vehi-
wheel and adjust it if necessary. cle.
Observe the recommended tire pressure Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for dam-
(Y page 272). age resulting from the use of tires, wheels or
When you are driving with the emergency spare accessories other than those tested and
wheel mounted, the tire pressure loss warning approved.
system cannot function reliably. Only restart the Information on tires, wheels and approved
tire pressure loss warning system when the combinations can be obtained from any quali-
Wheels and tires
defective wheel has been replaced with a new fied specialist workshop.
wheel. ! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec-
ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previ-
ous damage cannot always be detected on
Wheel and tire combinations retreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes-Benz
cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded
General notes tires are mounted. Do not mount used tires if
You can ask for information regarding permitted you have no information about their previous
wheel/tire combinations at an authorized usage.
Mercedes-Benz Center. The recommended pressures for various oper-
You should regularly check the pressure of the ating conditions can be found:
emergency spare wheel, particularly prior to Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
long trips, and correct the pressure as neces- on the B-pillar on the driver's side
sary (Y page 272). The value on the wheel is Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap
valid.
Observe the notes on recommended tire pres-
! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- sures under various operating conditions
mends that you only use tires and wheels (Y page 272).
which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz Check tire pressures regularly, and only when
specifically for your vehicle. the tires are cold. Comply with the maintenance
recommendations of the tire manufacturer in
the vehicle document wallet.
Emergency spare wheel 291
Notes on the vehicle equipment – always equip You should regularly check the pressure of the
the vehicle: emergency spare wheel, particularly prior to
Rwith tires of the same size on a given axle (left long trips, and correct the pressure as neces-
and right) sary (Y page 272). The value on the wheel is
valid.
Rwith the same type of tire (summer tires,
MOExtended tires, winter tires) Snow chains must not be mounted on emer-
gency spare wheels.
Exception: it is permissible to install a differ-
ent type or make in the event of a flat tire.
Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires with
run-flat characteristics" section (Y page 254). General notes
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are You can ask for information regarding permitted
not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It emergency spare wheels at an authorized
is therefore recommended that you additionally Mercedes-Benz Center.
equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount An emergency spare wheel may also be moun-
tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. ted against the direction of rotation. Observe
winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from the time restriction on use as well as the speed
a qualified specialist workshop. limitation specified on the emergency spare
wheel.
Replace the tires after six years at the latest,
Emergency spare wheel regardless of wear. This also applies to the
emergency spare wheel.
When you are driving with the emergency spare
G WARNING wheel mounted, the tire pressure loss warning
system cannot function reliably. Only restart the
The wheel or tire size as well as the tire type of tire pressure loss warning system when the
the spare wheel or emergency spare wheel defective wheel has been replaced with a new
and the wheel to be replaced may differ. wheel.
Wheels and tires

Mounting an emergency spare wheel may
severely impair the driving characteristics.
There is a risk of an accident. Removing the emergency spare wheel
To avoid hazardous situations:
Radapt your driving style accordingly and
drive carefully.
Rnever mount more than one spare wheel or
emergency spare wheel that differs in size.
Ronly use a spare wheel or emergency spare
wheel of a different size briefly.
Rdo not switch ESP® off.
Rhave a spare wheel or emergency spare
wheel of a different size replaced at the
nearest qualified specialist workshop. Vehicles with the "Minispare" emergency spare
wheel
Observe that the wheel and tire dimensions
as well as the tire type must be correct. The "Minispare" emergency spare wheel is
secured in emergency spare wheel bag : in the
When using an emergency spare wheel or spare cargo compartment.
wheel of a different size, you must not exceed X Open the tailgate.
the vehicle's maximum design speed of 50 mph X Release securing straps ; on emergency
(80 km/h). spare wheel bag :.
Z
292 Emergency spare wheel
X Remove emergency spare wheel bag : with

the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel.
X Open emergency spare wheel bag : and
remove the "Minispare" emergency spare
wheel.
Observe the instructions and safety notes in the
"Changing a wheel" section (Y page 287).
Wheels and tires
Vehicle electronics 293
Information regarding technical data In particular, the following conditions must be

complied with:
i The data stated here specifically refers to a Ronly approved wavebands may be used
vehicle with standard equipment. Consult an Robserve the maximum permissible output
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the in these wavebands
data for all vehicle variants and trim levels. Ronly approved antenna positions may be
used
Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation
Vehicle electronics may cause damage to your health and the health
of others. Using an exterior antenna takes into
Installing two-way radios and mobile account current scientific discussions relating
phones (RF transmitters) to the possible health hazards that may result
from electromagnetic fields.
G WARNING
The electromagnetic radiation from two-way
radios can interfere with the vehicle electron-
ics if two-way radios are manipulated or ret-
rofitted incorrectly. This could jeopardize the
operating safety of the vehicle. There is a risk
of an accident.
You should have all work on electrical and
electronic components carried out at a quali-
fied specialist workshop.
G WARNING Approved antenna positions

If you incorrectly operate two-way radios in : Front roof area
the vehicle, the electromagnetic radiation ; Rear roof area
may interfere with the vehicle electronics, for = Rear fender
example if: i On vehicles with panorama roof with power
Technical data
Rthe two-way radio is not connected to an tilt/sliding panel, installing an antenna to the
exterior antenna front or rear roof area is not permitted.
On the rear fenders, it is recommended to
Rthe exterior antenna is not correctly moun-
position the antenna on the side of the vehicle
ted or is not low-reflection closest to the center of the road.
This could jeopardize the operating safety of Use the Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609
the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. when retrofitting RF transmitters (Road Vehicles
Have the low-reflection exterior antenna - EMC guidelines for installation of aftermarket
installed at a qualified specialist workshop. radio frequency transmitting equipment).
Observe the legal requirements for accessory
Always connect two-way radios to the low- parts.
reflection exterior antenna when operating in
If your vehicle has installations for two-way radio
the vehicle. equipment, use the power supply or antenna
connections intended for use with the basic wir-
! The operating permit may be invalidated if ing. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's Sup-
the instructions for installation and use of plement when installing.
two-way radios are not observed. Deviations with respect to frequency bands,
maximum transmission outputs or antenna
positions must be approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Z
294 Identification plates
The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the Identification plates

base of the antenna must not exceed the fol-
lowing values: Vehicle identification plate with vehi-
Frequency band Maximum
cle identification number (VIN)
transmission
output
Short wave 100 W
3 - 54 MHz
4 m waveband 30 W
74 - 88 MHz
2 m waveband 50 W
144 - 174 MHz
Trunked radio system/ 10 W
Tetra X Open the driver's door.
380 - 460 MHz You will see vehicle identification plate :.
70 cm waveband 35 W
400 - 460 MHz
Mobile communications 10 W
(2G/3G/4G)
The following can be used in the vehicle without

restrictions:
RRF transmitters with a maximum transmis-
sion output of up to 100 mW
RRF transmitters with transmitter frequencies
in the 380 - 410 MHz frequency band and a : VIN
Technical data
maximum transmission output of up to 2 W

; Paint code
(trunked radio system/Tetra)
RMobile phones (2G/3G/4G) i The data shown on the vehicle identification
There is no restriction for antenna positions on plate is used only as an example. This data is
the outside of the vehicle for the following fre- different for every vehicle and can deviate
quency bands: from the data shown here. You can find the
data applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle
RTrunked radio system/Tetra
identification plate.
R70 cm waveband
R2G/3G/4G
Service products and filling capacities 295
Vehicle identification number (VIN) Comply with instructions on the use, storage
and disposal of service products on the labels
of the respective original containers. Always
store service products sealed in their original
containers. Always keep service products out
of the reach of children.
Dispose of service products in an environ-
mentally responsible manner.
Service products include the following:

X Slide the right-hand front seat to its rearmost RFuels
position. RLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)
X Fold floor covering : upwards.
RCoolant
You will see VIN ;.
RBrake fluid
The VIN can also be found on the vehicle iden- RWindshield washer fluid
tification plate (Y page 294). RClimate control system refrigerant
The VIN can also be found at the lower edge of
Components and service products must match.
the windshield (Y page 295).
Only use products recommended by Mercedes-
Benz. Damage which is caused by the use of
products which have not been recommended is
Engine number not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or
goodwill gestures. Products approved by
Mercedes-Benz are listed in this Operator's
Manual in the appropriate section.
Information on tested and approved products
can be obtained at a Mercedes-Benz Service
Center or on the Internet at
Technical data
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
You can recognize service products approved by
Mercedes-Benz by the following inscription on
the containers:
RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
RMB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)
: Emissions control information plate Other designations or recommendations indi-
; Engine number (stamped into the crank- cate a level of quality or a specification in
case) accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB
= VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield) 229.5). They have not necessarily been
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Other identifications, for example:
Service products and filling capaci- R0 W-30
ties R5 W-30
Important safety notes R5 W-40
G WARNING
Service products may be poisonous and haz-
ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.
Z
296 Service products and filling capacities
Fuel Model Of which

reserve
All models Approx.
G WARNING 1.6 US gal
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel (6.0 l)
incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-
sion. Gasoline
You must avoid fire, open flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine Fuel grade
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a
refueling. gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition
if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.
Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.
G WARNING Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. result in damage to the fuel system and the
There is a risk of injury. engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop
and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained
You must make sure that fuel does not come
completely.
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel ! Only refuel using unleaded premium grade
vapors. Keep fuel away from children. gasoline with at least 91 AKI/95 RON.
If you or others come into contact with fuel, i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol.
observe the following: Your vehicle is E10-compatible. You can
refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel.
RWash away fuel from skin immediately
using soap and water. ! Only use the fuel recommended. Operating
the vehicle with other fuels can lead to dam-
RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, age to the fuel system, engine and exhaust
immediately rinse them thoroughly with system.
clean water. Seek medical assistance with-
! Do not use the following:
out delay.
Technical data
RGasoline with more than 10% ethanol

RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-
RE100 (100% ethanol)
tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-
RGasoline with methanol
ing.
RM100 (100% methanol)
RGasoline with metalliferous additives
has come into contact with fuel.
RDiesel
Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recom-
Tank capacity mended for your vehicle.
Model Total capa- ! To ensure the longevity and full perform-
city ance of the engine, only premium-grade
unleaded gasoline must be used.
Models with 4MATIC 14.8 US gal If standard unleaded gasoline is unavailable
(56.0 l) and you have to refuel with unleaded gasoline
of a lower grade, observe the following pre-
All other models 13.2 US gal cautions:
(50.0 l)
ROnly fill the fuel tank to half full with regular
unleaded gasoline and fill the rest with pre-
mium-grade unleaded gasoline as soon as Mercedes-Benz. You must observe the notes
possible. and mixing ratios specified on the container.
RDo not drive at the maximum speed.
RAvoid sudden acceleration and engine
speeds over 3,000 rpm. Engine oil
You will usually find information about the fuel General notes
grade on the fuel pump. If you cannot find the
label on the fuel pump, ask the gas station staff.
i For more information, contact a qualified
B 250, B 250 4MATIC: as a temporary meas-
ure, if the recommended fuel is not available,
you may also use regular unleaded gasoline with
an octane rating of 88 AKI/93 RON.
All other models: as a temporary measure, if
the recommended fuel is not available, you may
also use regular unleaded gasoline with an
octane rating of 87 AKI/91 RON. This may
reduce engine performance and increase fuel
consumption. Avoid driving at full throttle and ! Do not use engine oil or an oil filter with
sudden acceleration. Never refuel using gaso- specifications deviating from those expressly
line with a lower AKI. required for the prescribed service intervals.
Do not change the engine oil or oil filter in
i The fuels you can use in your vehicle may order to set replacement intervals longer than
differ from the information in the Operator's those prescribed. This could otherwise cause
Manual depending on the country. The fuels damage to the engine or exhaust gas after-
that have been approved for your vehicle can treatment.
be found on the instruction label on the inside Follow the instructions on the service interval
of the fuel filler flap. display for changing the engine oil. This could
Information on refueling (Y page 127). otherwise cause damage to the engine or
exhaust gas aftertreatment.
Technical data
Additives When handling engine oil, observe the important
! Operating the engine with fuel additives safety notes on service products (Y page 295).
added later can lead to engine failure. Do not The engine oils are matched to the performance
mix fuel additives with fuel. This does not of Mercedes-Benz engines and service intervals.
include additives for the removal and preven- You should therefore only use engine oils and oil
tion of residue buildup. gasoline must only be filters that are approved for vehicles with main-
mixed with additives recommended by tenance systems.
Mercedes-Benz. Comply with the instructions For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,
for use on the product label. More information consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
about recommended additives can be Or visit the website
obtained from any authorized Mercedes-Benz http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
Center.
The table shows which engine oils have been
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use bran- approved for your vehicle.
ded fuels that have additives.
The fuel quality available in some countries may Model MB-Freigabe or
not be sufficient. Residue could build up in the MB-Approval
fuel injection system as a result. In such cases, All models 229.5, 229.6
and in consultation with an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, the fuel may be mixed
with the cleaning additive recommended by i MB approval is indicated on the oil contain-
ers.
Z
298 Service products and filling capacities
Filling capacities Coolant

The following values refer to an engine oil Important safety notes
change, including the oil filter.
Model Capacity G WARNING
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-
All models 5.9 US qt (5.6 l)
ponents in the engine compartment, it may
ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Additives
Let the engine cool down before you add anti-
! Do not use any additives in the engine oil. freeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled
This could damage the engine. next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the
antifreeze from components before starting
the engine.
Brake fluid
! Only add coolant that has been premixed
G WARNING with the desired antifreeze protection. You
The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture could otherwise damage the engine.
from the air. This lowers the boiling point of Further information on coolants can be found
the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Ser-
fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the vice Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g. on the
Internet at
brake system when the brakes are applied http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or con-
hard. This would impair braking efficiency. tact a qualified specialist workshop.
! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even
You should have the brake fluid renewed at in countries where high temperatures prevail.
the specified intervals.
Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not
sufficiently protected from corrosion and
When handling brake fluid, observe the impor-
overheating.
tant safety notes on service products
(Y page 295). i Have the coolant regularly replaced at a
Technical data
The brake fluid change intervals can be found in qualified specialist workshop and the replace-
the Maintenance Booklet. ment confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet.
Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes- Comply with the important safety precautions
Benz in accordance with MB-Freigabe or MB- for service products when handling coolant
Approval 331.0. (Y page 295).
Information about approved brake fluid can be The coolant is a mixture of water and corrosion
obtained at any qualified specialist workshop or inhibitor/antifreeze concentrate. It performs
on the Internet at the following tasks:
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
Ranti-corrosion protection
i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a Rantifreeze protection
qualified specialist workshop and the replace- Rraising the boiling point
ment confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet.
If the coolant has antifreeze protection down to
-35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the coolant
during operation is approximately 266 ‡
(130 †).
The antifreeze concentrate/corrosion inhibitor At temperatures above freezing:

concentration in the engine cooling system X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of
should: water and windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB
Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine SummerFit.
cooling system against freezing down to Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.
approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †)
Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down
At temperatures below freezing:
to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat will not be X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of
dissipated as effectively water and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit.
Mercedes-Benz recommends a coolant or cor- For the correct mixing ratio refer to the infor-
rosion inhibitor/antifreeze concentrate in mation on the antifreeze reservoir.
accordance with
MB Specifications for Service Products 310.1. i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB Sum-
merFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid all
i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled year round.
with a coolant mixture that ensures adequate
antifreeze and anti-corrosion protection.
i The coolant is checked with every mainte- Climate control system refrigerant
nance interval at a qualified specialist work-
shop. Important safety notes
The climate control system of your vehicle is fil-
Filling capacities led with refrigerant R‑134a.
The instruction label regarding the refrigerant
Model Capacity type used can be found on the left, on the under-
All models Approx. 8.2 US qt side of the hood.
(7.8 l) ! Only the refrigerant R‑134a and the PAG oil
approved by Mercedes-Benz may be used.
The approved PAG oil may not be mixed with
Windshield washer system any other PAG oil that is not approved for
R-134a refrigerant. Otherwise, the climate
Important safety notes control system may be damaged.
Technical data
Service work, such as refilling with refrigerant or
G WARNING replacing component parts, may only be carried
Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if out by a qualified specialist workshop. All appli-
it comes into contact with hot engine compo- cable regulations, as well as SAE standard J639,
must be adhered to.
nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk of
fire and injury. Always have work on the climate control system
carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Make sure that no windshield washer con-
centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.
! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit

washer fluid should be mixed together. The
spray nozzles may otherwise become
blocked.
Do not use distilled or de-ionized water. Other-
wise, the level sensor may give a false reading.
When handling washer fluid, observe the impor-
tant safety notes on service products
(Y page 295).
Z
300 Vehicle data
Refrigerant instruction label Dimensions and weights
Example: refrigerant instruction label

: Symbol
Model : ;
; Refrigerant filling capacity Maximum Height
headroom when
= Applicable standards opened
? PAG oil part number
A Type of refrigerant All models 73.8 in 78.1 in
Warning symbol : advises you about: (1874 mm) (1985 mm)
RPossible dangers
RHaving service work carried out at a qualified All models
specialist workshop
Vehicle length 173.0 in
(4393 mm)
Filling capacities
Vehicle width 79.1 in
All models Capacity including exterior (2010 mm)
mirrors
Refrigerant 22.9 ± 0.4 oz
(650 ± 10 g) Vehicle width with- 70.31 in
Technical data
out exterior mirrors (1786 mm)

PAG oil 4.2 oz
(120 g) Vehicle height 61.5 in
(1562 mm)
Wheelbase 106.3 in
Vehicle data (2699 mm)
General notes Turning radius 36.1 ft
Please note that for the specified vehicle data: (11.0 m)
RThe heights specified may vary as a result of: Maximum roof load 165 lb
- Tires (75.0 kg)
- Load
- Condition of the suspension
- Optional equipment
ROptional equipment reduces the maximum
payload

B-Class Operator&#39;s Manual

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

B-Class Operator&#39;s Manual

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Your Operator's Manual

Digital form inside the vehicle

Booklet inside the vehicle

Digital form via the Internet

Digital form as an App

Apple® iOS Android™

H Environmental note Editorial office

Digital Operator's Manual .................. 22 Lights and windshield wipers ............ 93

Safety ................................................... 37 On-board computer and displays .... 164

Opening and closing ........................... 64 Multimedia system ........................... 213

Maintenance and care ...................... 239

Breakdown assistance ..................... 251

Wheels and tires ............................... 269

Technical data ................................... 293

1, 2, 3 ... Occupant Classification System

Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 170 B

Display message ............................ 179 Wheels ........................................... 247

Cleaning Connecting a USB device

Declarations of conformity ................. 26 Automatic locking (switch) ............... 71

Rear view camera .......................... 155 Deactivating/activating ................. 118

Entering an address Preparing the vehicle ..................... 253

Opening/closing the garage door .. 236 I

Lane Keeping Assist Lumbar support

MP3 Seat belt .......................................... 38

Panorama roof with power tilt/ PASSENGER AIR BAG

Replacing bulbs ............................... 98 Installing/removing the cover

SD memory card Service message

Convenience opening feature .......... 76 Steering

Tank Tire pressure not reached .............. 256

Display message ............................ 199 Fuel tank ........................................ 210

Introduction Operating the Digital Operator's Man-

cle. The Limited Warranty for your vehicle applies in

brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance" In Canada

! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if: Diagnostics connection

Always have the following work carried out at an Limited Warranty

Correct use QR codes for the rescue card

Data stored in the vehicle

This data is of an exclusively technical nature

Warning: The EDR is a component of the

Function Page Function Page

C Overhead control panel 36 K Opens the hood 239

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page Function Page

i In vehicles with multimedia system Audio 20 i In vehicles with multimedia system

Center console, lower section

Function Page Function Page

Door control panel

Overhead control panel

Function Page Function Page

switched on. It goes out no later than a few sec-

Air bags door or side window. You may otherwise be in

Window curtain air bags : are integrated into

If the system determines that they can offer

Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS)

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The PASSENGER AIR OCS is malfunctioning.

Deployment of Emergency Tensioning Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning

time at the start of the collision.

You will find further information on stowing

This confirmation can also be found in the instal-

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat secur-

Child restraint system on the front-

Child-proof locks for the rear doors Pets in the vehicle

Ractivate vehicle equipment and become

B-Class Operator's Manual

B-Class Operator's Manual